SIEMENS Programming

Operation/Programming 06/2003 Edition
ShopTurn
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D
Introduction 1
Setting Up the 2
Machine
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Machining the 3

Workpiece
ShopTurn Creating a ShopTurn 4

Program
ShopTurn Functions 5
Operation/Programming
G Code Program 6
Tool Management 7
Program Management 8
Messages, Alarms and 9

User Data
Valid for
Examples 10
Control Software Version
SINUMERIK 840D powerline 6
SINUMERIK 840DE powerline 6
SINUMERIK 840Di 2 Appendix A
SINUMERIK 840DiE (Export Version) 2
SINUMERIK 810D powerline 6
SINUMERIK 810DE powerline 6
06.03 Edition
SINUMERIK® Documentation
Printing history
Brief details of this edition and previous editions are listed below.
The status of each edition is indicated by the code in the "Remarks" columns.
Status code in the "Remarks" column:
A .... New documentation.

B .... Unrevised reprint with new Order No.
C .... Revised edition with new status.
Edition Order No. Remarks

03.01 6FC5298-6AD50-0BP0 A
01.02 6FC5298-6AD50-0BP1 C
06.03 6FC5298-6AD50-0BP2 C
This manual is also included in the documentation on CD-ROM (DOCONCD)

Edition Order No. Remarks
09.03 6FC5 298-6CA00-0BG4 C
Trademarks
® ® ® ® ® ®
SIMATIC , SIMATIC HMI , SIMATIC NET , SIROTEC , SINUMERIK and SIMODRIVE are registered
trademarks of Siemens AG. Other names used in this publication may be trademarks, which, if used by third
parties for their own means, could infringe the rights of their owners.
Further information is available on the Internet under: Other functions not described in this documentation might be executable in the
http://www.ad.siemens.de/mc control. This does not, however, represent an obligation to supply such functions
with a new control or when servicing.
This publication was produced with Word 2000 We have checked that the contents of this document correspond to the hardware
and Designer V7.0. and software described. Nonetheless, differences might exist and therefore we
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not cannot guarantee that they are completely identical. The information contained in
permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for damages. this document is, however, reviewed regularly and any necessary changes will be
All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model included in the next edition. We welcome suggestions for improvement.
or design, are reserved.
© Siemens AG, 2001–2003. All rights reserved Subject to change without prior notice.
Order No. 6FC5298-6AD50-0BP2 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft

Printed in Germany
0 0
06.03 Preface
Preface
Structure of the The SINUMERIK documentation is organized in three parts:
documentation • General Documentation
• User Documentation
• Manufacturer/Service Documentation
Target group This documentation is intended for operators of single-slide turning

machines with SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D.
Validity This Operation/Programming Guide is valid for ShopTurn SW 6.4.
Hotline If you have any queries, please contact our hotline:

A&D Technical Support
Phone: +49 (0) 180 5050-222
Fax: +49 (0) 180 5050-223
E-mail: adsupport@siemens.com
If you have any queries (suggestions, corrections) in relation to this

documentation, please fax or e-mail us:
Fax: +49 (9131) 98-2176
The fax form appears with the feedback sheet at the end of the
document.
E-mail: motioncontrol.docu@erlf.siemens.de
Website address http://www.cnc-werkstatt.de

http://www.ad.siemens.de/mc
SINUMERIK 840D Enhanced-performance versions SINUMERIK 840D powerline and

powerline SINUMERIK 840DE powerline have been available since 09.2001.
For a list of available powerline modules, please refer to the hardware
description:
References: /PHD/, Configuring Manual SINUMERIK 840D
SINUMERIK 810D Enhanced-performance versions SINUMERIK 810D powerline and

powerline SINUMERIK 810DE powerline have been available since 12.2001.
For a list of available powerline modules, please refer to the hardware
description:
References: /PHC/, Configuring Manual SINUMERIK 810D
Standard scope This Operation/Programming Guide describes the functionality of the

ShopTurn operator interface. Extensions or changes made by the
machine tool manufacturer are documented by the machine tool
manufacturer.
Please contact your local Siemens office for more detailed information
about other SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D publications and
publications that apply to all SINUMERIK controls (e.g. universal
interface, measuring cycles, etc.).
 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edition v
0 0
Preface 06.03
Other functions not described in this documentation might be

executable in the control. This does not, however, represent an
obligation to supply such functions with a new control or when
servicing.
Principle Your SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D with ShopTurn is designed using

state-of-the-art technology in conformity with recognized safety
regulations, standards and specifications.
Supplementary devices The applications of Siemens controls can be expanded by adding

special additional devices, equipment and expansions supplied by
Siemens.
Personnel Only properly trained, authorized, reliable personnel must be

allowed to use this equipment. No-one without the necessary training
must be allowed to operate the control, even temporarily.
The areas of responsibility assigned to personnel involved in setting

up, operating and maintaining the equipment must be clearly
specified and their compliance verified.
Procedure Before the control is started up, personnel responsible for its
operation must have read and understood the Operator's Guides. The
company used this equipment is also obliged to carry out continuous
monitoring of the overall technical condition of the equipment (with a
view to identifying externally visible defects and damage as well as
changes in the operating behavior of the control).
Service Repairs to equipment may only be carried out by personnel specially

trained and qualified for the application in question in accordance
with the provisions specified in the maintenance and servicing guides.
All relevant safety regulations must be followed.
The following are deemed as improper usage and exclude the

manufacturer from all liability:
• Any usage or application incompatible with or beyond the scope of
the items specified above.
• Cases where the control is operated in a technically imperfect
condition, without due provision for safety considerations and/or
hazards, or in contravention with any of the instructions in the
Instruction Manual.
• Cases where faults which could affect safety are not remedied
before starting up the control.
• Any modification, bypassing or decommissioning of
equipment on the control whose intended purpose is to ensure
proper functioning, unrestricted use of equipment and/or active
and passive safety.

vi SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edition
0 0
06.03 Preface
Warning
Unforeseen danger can arise with reference to:
• Life and limb of personnel
• The control, machine or other assets of the owner and the user.
Structure of the The following blocks of information, identified by appropriate icons, are
documentation used in this documentation:
Orientation
Background information
Operating sequence
Explanation of parameters
Additional notes
Software option
The function described is a software option, i.e. the function can be
executed on the control only if you have purchased and enabled the
appropriate option.
Warnings The following five warnings with varying levels of severity are used in
this document.
Danger
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury or in substantial property damage.
Warning
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injury or in substantial property damage.
Caution
Used with the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury
or in property damage.

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edition vii
0 0
Preface 06.03
Caution
Used without safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, may result in property damage.
Notice
Used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potential situa-
tion which, if not avoided, may result in an undesirable result or
state.
Machine manufacturer The following reference appears wherever particular features or

functions might have been changed or supplemented by the machine
manufacturer:
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
References Whenever specific information can be found in other literature, this is

indicated as follows:
References:
A complete list of available literature is included in the Appendix of this

Operator's Guide.
Terms Some of the basic terms used in this document are defined below.
Program
A program is a sequence of instructions to the CNC which combine to
produce a specific workpiece on the machine.
Contour
The term contour refers generally to the outline of a workpiece.
More specifically, it refers to the section of the program that defines
the outline of a workpiece comprising individual elements.
Cycle
A cycle, e.g. tapping, is a subroutine defined in ShopTurn for
executing a frequently repeated machining operation
(a cycle is sometimes also referred to as a function).
Spindles/axes
The various spindles/axes are designated as follows in this docu-
ment:

viii SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edition
0 0
06.03 Preface
S1: Main spindle

S2: Tool spindle
S3: Counterspindle
C1: C axis, main spindle
C3: C axis, counterspindle
C3: Special axis (e.g. axis for traversing the counterspindle)
The machine manufacturer might, however, have used other

designations.
Unit of measurement Metric units are used for all parameters in this document. The
equivalent imperial units are shown in the table below.
Metric Imperial
mm in
mm/tooth in/tooth
mm/min in/min
mm/rev in/rev
m/min ft/min

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edition ix
0 0
Preface 06.03
Notes

x SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edition
0 0
06.03 Contents
Contents
Introduction 1-17
1.1 ShopTurn .................................................................................................................. 1-18
1.1.1 Procedure.................................................................................................................. 1-19
1.2 Workstation ............................................................................................................... 1-20

1.2.1 Coordinate system .................................................................................................... 1-21
1.2.2 Operator panels ........................................................................................................ 1-22
1.2.3 Keys of the operator panels ...................................................................................... 1-25
1.2.4 Machine control panels ............................................................................................. 1-27
1.2.5 Elements on the machine control panels .................................................................. 1-27
1.3 Operator interface ..................................................................................................... 1-31

1.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................... 1-31
1.3.2 Operation via soft keys and hard keys ...................................................................... 1-33
1.3.3 Program views .......................................................................................................... 1-37
1.3.4 Enter parameters ...................................................................................................... 1-41
1.3.5 CNC-ISO operator interface...................................................................................... 1-43
1.3.6 ShopTurn Open (PCU 50)......................................................................................... 1-45
Setting Up the Machine 2-47

2.1 Switching on and off .................................................................................................. 2-48
2.2 Approaching a reference point .................................................................................. 2-48

2.2.1 User agreement for Safety Integrated....................................................................... 2-50
2.3 Operating modes....................................................................................................... 2-51
2.4 Settings for the machine ........................................................................................... 2-52

2.4.1 Switching over the unit of measurement (millimeter/inch) ........................................ 2-52
2.4.2 Switching over the coordinate system (MCS/WCS).................................................. 2-53
2.4.3 Spindles..................................................................................................................... 2-54
2.5 Tools ......................................................................................................................... 2-56

2.5.1 Creating a new tool ................................................................................................... 2-57
2.5.2 Tool list...................................................................................................................... 2-59
2.5.3 Measuring the tool manually ..................................................................................... 2-65
2.5.4 Measuring the tool with the measuring calipers ........................................................ 2-67
2.5.5 Calibrating the measuring calipers............................................................................ 2-68
2.5.6 Measuring the tool with a magnifying glass............................................................... 2-70
2.6 Measuring the workpiece zero .................................................................................. 2-71
2.7 Work offsets .............................................................................................................. 2-72

2.7.1 Setting the work offset............................................................................................... 2-73
2.7.2 Defining work offsets................................................................................................. 2-75
2.7.3 Work offset list .......................................................................................................... 2-76
2.8 Manual mode ............................................................................................................ 2-78

2.8.1 Selecting a tool and a spindle ................................................................................... 2-78

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edition xi
0 0
Contents 06.03
2.8.2 Traversing the axes................................................................................................... 2-80

2.8.3 Positioning the axes .................................................................................................. 2-82
2.8.4 Simple stock removal from the workpiece................................................................. 2-83
2.8.5 Settings for manual mode ......................................................................................... 2-85
2.9 MDI ............................................................................................................................ 2-87
Machining the Workpiece 3-89

3.1 Starting/stopping program execution......................................................................... 3-90
3.2 Executing a trial program run .................................................................................... 3-93
3.3 Displaying the current program block ........................................................................ 3-94
3.4 Repositioning the axes .............................................................................................. 3-95
3.5 Starting execution at a specific point in the program................................................. 3-96
3.6 Controlling the program run..................................................................................... 3-101
3.7 Testing a program ................................................................................................... 3-103
3.8 Correcting the program ........................................................................................... 3-104
3.9 Displaying G functions and auxiliary functions ........................................................ 3-105
3.10 Simulation of machining .......................................................................................... 3-106

3.10.1 Simulation before machining the workpiece............................................................ 3-107
3.10.2 Simultaneous recording before machining the workpiece....................................... 3-109
3.10.3 Simultaneous recording during machining of the workpiece................................... 3-110
3.10.4 Editing the blank shape for a G code program........................................................ 3-110
3.10.5 Different views of the workpiece.............................................................................. 3-111
3.10.6 Changing the viewport............................................................................................. 3-115
Creating a ShopTurn Program 4-117

4.1 Program structure.................................................................................................... 4-118
4.2 Fundamentals.......................................................................................................... 4-120

4.2.1 Machining planes..................................................................................................... 4-120
4.2.2 Machining cycle approach and return...................................................................... 4-122
4.2.3 Absolute and incremental dimensions..................................................................... 4-124
4.2.4 Polar coordinates..................................................................................................... 4-126
4.2.5 Pocket calculator ..................................................................................................... 4-127
4.2.6 Fits........................................................................................................................... 4-129
4.3 ShopTurn program .................................................................................................. 4-130

4.3.1 Overview.................................................................................................................. 4-130
4.3.2 Create new program................................................................................................ 4-132
4.3.3 Create program blocks ............................................................................................ 4-136
4.3.4 Change program blocks .......................................................................................... 4-140
4.3.5 Program editor......................................................................................................... 4-141
4.3.6 Specify number of workpieces ................................................................................ 4-144

xii SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edition
0 0
06.03 Contents
ShopTurn Functions 5-145

5.1 Linear or circular path motions................................................................................ 5-147
5.1.1 Selecting the tool and the machining plane ............................................................ 5-147
5.1.2 Straight .................................................................................................................... 5-149
5.1.3 Circle with known center point ................................................................................ 5-150
5.1.4 Circle with known radius ......................................................................................... 5-152
5.1.5 Polar coordinates .................................................................................................... 5-154
5.1.6 Straight polar ........................................................................................................... 5-155
5.1.7 Circle polar .............................................................................................................. 5-157
5.2 Drilling ..................................................................................................................... 5-158

5.2.1 Drill centered ........................................................................................................... 5-159
5.2.2 Thread centered...................................................................................................... 5-161
5.2.3 Drilling and reaming ................................................................................................ 5-162
5.2.4 Deep hole drilling..................................................................................................... 5-164
5.2.5 Tapping ................................................................................................................... 5-166
5.2.6 Thread milling.......................................................................................................... 5-168
5.2.7 Positioning and position patterns ............................................................................ 5-170
5.2.8 Freely programmable positions............................................................................... 5-171
5.2.9 Line position pattern ................................................................................................ 5-173
5.2.10 Matrix position pattern............................................................................................. 5-174
5.2.11 Full circle position pattern ....................................................................................... 5-176
5.2.12 Pitch circle position pattern ..................................................................................... 5-178
5.2.13 Repeat positions ..................................................................................................... 5-180
5.3 Turning .................................................................................................................... 5-181

5.3.1 Stock removal cycles .............................................................................................. 5-181
5.3.2 Recessing cycles .................................................................................................... 5-184
5.3.3 Undercut form E and F............................................................................................ 5-187
5.3.4 Thread undercuts .................................................................................................... 5-188
5.3.5 Thread cutting ......................................................................................................... 5-190
5.3.6 Thread re-machining ............................................................................................... 5-194
5.3.7 Parting ..................................................................................................................... 5-195
5.4 Contour turning ....................................................................................................... 5-197

5.4.1 Presentation of the contour ..................................................................................... 5-199
5.4.2 Creating a new contour ........................................................................................... 5-201
5.4.3 Creating contour elements ...................................................................................... 5-202
5.4.4 Changing a contour ................................................................................................. 5-207
5.4.5 Stock removal ......................................................................................................... 5-210
5.4.6 Removal of residual material................................................................................... 5-214
5.4.7 Grooving.................................................................................................................. 5-216
5.4.8 Grooving residual material ...................................................................................... 5-217
5.4.9 Plunge-turning ......................................................................................................... 5-219
5.4.10 Plunge-turning residual material ............................................................................. 5-221
5.5 Milling ...................................................................................................................... 5-223

5.5.1 Rectangular pocket ................................................................................................. 5-224

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edition xiii
0 0
Contents 06.03
5.5.2 Circular pocket ........................................................................................................ 5-227

5.5.3 Rectangular spigot................................................................................................... 5-230
5.5.4 Circular spigot..........................................................................................................5-232
5.5.5 Longitudinal slot....................................................................................................... 5-235
5.5.6 Circumferential slot.................................................................................................. 5-238
5.5.7 Positions .................................................................................................................. 5-241
5.5.8 Multiple edge ........................................................................................................... 5-242
5.5.9 Engraving ................................................................................................................5-244
5.6 Contour milling......................................................................................................... 5-248

5.6.5 Path milling .............................................................................................................. 5-264
5.6.6 Predrilling contour pockets ...................................................................................... 5-268
5.6.7 Milling contour pockets (roughing) .......................................................................... 5-272
5.6.8 Removing residual material from pocket................................................................. 5-274
5.6.9 Finishing the contour pocket ................................................................................... 5-276
5.6.10 Milling contour spigots (roughing)............................................................................ 5-280
5.6.11 Removing residual material from the spigot............................................................ 5-282
5.6.12 Finishing the contour spigot..................................................................................... 5-284
5.7 Calling a subroutine................................................................................................. 5-288
5.8 Repeat program blocks ........................................................................................... 5-290
5.9 Machining with the counterspindle .......................................................................... 5-292
5.10 Changing program settings ..................................................................................... 5-297
5.11 Calling work offsets ................................................................................................. 5-298
5.12 Defining coordinate transformations........................................................................ 5-299
5.13 Programming the approach/return cycle ................................................................. 5-302
5.14 Inserting a G code in a ShopTurn program ............................................................. 5-304
G Code Program 6-307

6.1 Creating a G code program..................................................................................... 6-308
6.2 Executing a G code program................................................................................... 6-311
6.3 G code editor ........................................................................................................... 6-313
6.4 Arithmetic parameters ............................................................................................. 6-316
Tool Management 7-317

7.1 Tool list, tool wear list and tool magazine................................................................ 7-318
7.2 Entering tools in the tool list..................................................................................... 7-323

7.2.1 Creating a new tool.................................................................................................. 7-323
7.2.2 Set up more than one edge for each tool ................................................................ 7-324
7.2.3 Creating a replacement tool .................................................................................... 7-325

xiv SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edition
0 0
06.03 Contents
7.3 Sort tools ................................................................................................................. 7-326
7.4 Deleting tools from the tool list ................................................................................ 7-326
7.5 Loading/unloading a tool into/out of the magazine.................................................. 7-327
7.6 Relocating a tool...................................................................................................... 7-329
7.7 Entering tool wear data ........................................................................................... 7-331
7.8 Activating tool monitoring ........................................................................................ 7-332
7.9 Managing magazine locations................................................................................. 7-334
Program Management 8-335

8.1 Program management in ShopTurn........................................................................ 8-336
8.2 Program management with PCU 20 ....................................................................... 8-337

8.2.1 Open a program ...................................................................................................... 8-339
8.2.2 Execute a program.................................................................................................. 8-340
8.2.3 Execute a G code program from floppy disk or network drive ................................ 8-341
8.2.4 Create a new directory/program.............................................................................. 8-342
8.2.5 Mark several programs ........................................................................................... 8-343
8.2.6 Copy/rename a directory or program ...................................................................... 8-344
8.2.7 Delete directory/program......................................................................................... 8-345
8.2.8 Execute program via RS-232 interface ................................................................... 8-346
8.2.9 Read program in/out via RS-232 interface.............................................................. 8-347
8.2.10 Display error log ...................................................................................................... 8-349
8.2.11 Back-up/import tool or zero point data .................................................................... 8-349

8.3.1 Open a program ...................................................................................................... 8-354
8.3.3 Load/unload program .............................................................................................. 8-355
8.3.4 Execute a G code program from the hard disk, floppy disk or network drive ......... 8-356
8.3.5 Create directory/program ........................................................................................ 8-358
8.3.7 Copy/rename/move a directory or program ............................................................ 8-360
8.3.8 Delete directory/program......................................................................................... 8-362
8.3.9 Read program in/out via RS-232 interface.............................................................. 8-363
8.3.11 Back-up/import tool or zero point data .................................................................... 8-365
Messages, Alarms and User Data 9-369

9.1 Messages................................................................................................................ 9-370
9.2 Alarms ..................................................................................................................... 9-370

9.2.1 Cycle alarms ........................................................................................................... 9-371
9.2.2 ShopTurn alarms..................................................................................................... 9-376
9.3 User data................................................................................................................. 9-388
9.4 Version display ........................................................................................................ 9-390

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edition xv
0 0
Contents 06.03
Examples 10-391
10.1 Standard machining operations............................................................................. 10-392
10.2 Contour milling....................................................................................................... 10-404
Appendix A-411
A Abbreviations...........................................................................................................A-412
B References ..............................................................................................................A-415
C Index......................................................................................................................... I-427

xvi SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edition
1 1
06.03 Introduction
Introduction
1.1 ShopTurn .................................................................................................................. 1-18

1.1.1 Procedure.................................................................................................................. 1-19
1.2 Workstation ............................................................................................................... 1-20

1.2.1 Coordinate system .................................................................................................... 1-21
1.2.2 Operator panels ........................................................................................................ 1-22
1.2.3 Keys of the operator panels ...................................................................................... 1-25
1.2.4 Machine control panels ............................................................................................. 1-27
1.2.5 Elements on the machine control panels .................................................................. 1-27
1.3 Operator interface ..................................................................................................... 1-31

1.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................... 1-31
1.3.2 Operation via soft keys and hard keys...................................................................... 1-33
1.3.3 Program views .......................................................................................................... 1-37
1.3.4 Enter parameters ...................................................................................................... 1-41
1.3.5 CNC-ISO operator interface...................................................................................... 1-43
1.3.6 ShopTurn Open (PCU 50) ........................................................................................ 1-45

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edition 1-17
1 1
Introduction 06.03
1.1 ShopTurn
1.1 ShopTurn
ShopTurn is an operating and programming software program for
turning machines that makes it easy for you to operate the machine
and to program workpieces.
Important features of the software are:
Setting up the machine Special measurement cycles make it easier to gauge the tools and the
workpiece.
Executing a program You can display the execution of a program on the screen three-
dimensionally.
This makes it easy for you to check the result of programming and to
trace the machining of the workpiece at the machine.
Creating a program The workpiece is programmed with ease using ShopTurn because
graphical techniques are used and no knowledge of G codes is re-
quired.
ShopTurn displays the program as a clearly understandable process
plan and presents the individual cycles and contour elements in a
dynamic graphic.
The powerful contour calculator allows any contours to be specified.
A stock removal cycle complete with detection of residual material
saves unnecessary machining.
Tool management ShopTurn saves your tool data. The software can also manage the
data for tools that are not in the tool turret.
Program management Programs can be created simply by copying and modifying similar
programs; there is no need to start again from the beginning.
Remote diagnosis You can also switch from ShopTurn into the CNC-ISO operator inter-
face. Here it is possible to activate remote diagnosis that allows the
machine to be operated via an external computer.

1-18 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edition
1 1
06.03 Introduction
1.1 ShopTurn
1.1.1 Procedure
Two typical working situations are considered separately in this

Guide.
• You want to execute a program for the purpose of automatically
machining a workpiece.
• You want to create the program to be used for machining a
workpiece.
Executing a program Before you execute a program, you have to set up your machine. You
must perform the following steps with the support of ShopTurn (see
the Section "Setting up the machine"):
• Approaching the reference point of the machine
(only for incremental position measuring systems)
• Gauging tools
• Defining the workpiece zero
• Entering any other work offsets
When you have finished setting up the machine, you can select a
program and execute it automatically (see Section "Machining the
workpiece").
Creating a program On creating a new program you can choose whether to set up a
ShopTurn program or a G code program (see "Creating a ShopTurn
program" or "G code program").
On creation of a ShopTurn program, ShopTurn prompts you to enter
all the relevant parameters. As the program progresses, this is auto-
matically indicated by the appearance of blocks in a progress bar.
Help screens that explain the parameters in each operation also
support you with programming.
You can, of course, also insert G code commands in a ShopTurn
program.
A G code program must however be completely generated from G
code commands.

1 1
Introduction 06.03
1.2 Workstation
1.2 Workstation
A ShopTurn workstation comprises an operator panel and a machine
control panel in addition to the turning machine complete with a CNC-/
positioning control.
Operator
panel
Machine
Turning machine control panel
complete with control
Diagram showing the workstation
Turning machine You can use ShopTurn on a single-slide turning machine with three
axes, one main spindle, one tool spindle and one counterspindle.
Control ShopTurn runs on the SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D CNC with

PCU 20 and PCU 50.
Operator panel Communication with ShopTurn takes place via the operator panel.
Machine control panel You operate the turning machine using the machine control panel.

1 1
06.03 Introduction
1.2 Workstation
1.2.1 Coordinate system
When a workpiece is machined on a turning machine, a rectangular

coordinate system is assumed. This comprises the three coordinate
axes X, Y and Z parallel to the machine axes. It is not essential that
coordinate axis Y is set up. The spindle axis Z, which can be rotated
through any angle, is a separate axis of rotation and is designated
as C.
The positions of the coordinate system and the machine zero depend
on the type of machine used.
Y+
M X+
W
Z+
M = Machine zero
W = Workpiece zero
Position of the coordinate system, machine zero and

workpiece zero (example)

1 1
Introduction 06.03
1.2 Workstation
1.2.2 Operator panels
You can use one of the following operator panels for the PCU:
OP 010
OP 010C
OP 010S with OP 032S full CNC keyboard
OP 012
OP 015 with 19" full CNC keyboard
OP 010 operator panel

4
1
.
3 6
2 2
1 Screen
2 Screen keys
3 Horizontal soft key bar
4 Vertical soft key bar
5 Alphanumeric keypad
Correction/cursor pad with control keys and input key
6 USB interface

1 1
06.03 Introduction
1.2 Workstation
OP 010C operator panel

4
1 .
3 6
2 2
OP 010C operator panel
1 Screen
2 Screen keys
6 USB interface
OP 010S slimline
operator panel
2
A 2
A
4
A
3
A
OP 010S operator panel
1 Screen
2 Screen keys
5 USB interface

1 1
Introduction 06.03
1.2 Workstation
5
A
4
A 4
A
1
3
A
2
A 7 6
2
A
1 12" screen
2 Screen keys
6 USB interface
7 Mouse
1 4
A
2
A 2
A
3
A
1 15" screen
2 Screen keys
5 USB interface

1 1
06.03 Introduction
1.2 Workstation
1.2.3 Keys of the operator panels
Alarm Cancel
Cancel the alarm that is marked with this symbol.
Channel
This has no significance for ShopTurn.
Help
Toggle between the process plan and programming graphics as well
as between the parameterization screen form with programming
graphics and the parameterization screen form with the help display.
Next Window
Page Up or Page Down

Page upwards or downwards in the directory or in the process plan.
Cursor keys
Move between different fields or lines.
Use Cursor right to open a directory or program.
Use Cursor left to switch to the next higher level in the directory tree.
Select
Choose one of a number of options presented.
This key has the same function as the "Alternat." soft key.
End
Move the cursor to the last input field in a parameterization screen
form.
Backspace
• Delete the value in the input field.
• Delete the character after the cursor in insertion mode.
Tab
Shift key
Depress the Shift key to enter the uppermost character shown on the
dual input keys.

1 1
Introduction 06.03
1.2 Workstation
Ctrl key
Use the following key combinations to navigate in the process plan
and in the G code editor:
• Ctrl + Pos1: Jump to the start.
• Ctrl + End: Jump to the end.
Alt
Del
• Delete the value in the parameter field.
• Delete the character marked by the cursor in insertion mode.
• Delete machining lines during simultaneous recording and
simulation.
Insert
To activate insertion mode or the pocket calculator.
Input key
• Terminate entry of a value in the input field.
• Open a directory or program.
Alarm - only OP 010 and OP 010C

Open the "Messages/Alarms" operating area.
This key has the same function as the "Alarm list" soft key.
Program - only OP 010 and OP 010C

Open the "Program" operating area.
This key has the same function as the "Prog. edit" soft key.
Offset - only OP 010 and OP 010C

Open the "Tools/Offsets" operating area.
This key has the same function as the "Tool zero" soft key.
Program Manager - only OP 010 and OP 010C

Open the "Program Manager" operating area.
This key has the same function as the "Program" soft key.

1 1
06.03 Introduction
1.2 Workstation
1.2.4 Machine control panels
You can equip your turning machine with a SIEMENS machine control
panel or with a specific machine control panel supplied by the
machine manufacturer.
Siemens can supply a standard machine control panel (19") or the
slimline OP 032S machine control panel.
You use the machine control panel to initiate actions on the turning
machine such as traversing an axis or starting the machining of a
workpiece.
When functions are active, the LEDs on the corresponding keys on
the machine control panel light up.
1.2.5 Elements on the machine control panels
Emergency stop button

Press this pushbutton in an emergency, i.e. when there is a danger to
life or there is a risk of damage to the machine or workpiece.
All drives will be shut down at the greatest possible braking torque.
It is important to read the information provided by the machine manu-

facturer concerning additional reactions to operation of the Emergen-
cy stop button.
Reset
Reset • Interrupt processing of the current program.
The NC control remains synchronized with the machine. It is in its
initial state and ready for a new program run.
• Cancel an alarm.
Jog
Jog Select Machine Manual operating mode.
Teach In
Teach In This has no significance for ShopTurn.
MDI
MDI Select MDI mode.
Auto
Auto Select Machine Auto operating mode.

1 1
Introduction 06.03
1.2 Workstation
Single Block
Single Block Execute the program non-modally (single block).
Repos
Repos Repositioning, re-approach contour.
Ref Point
Ref Point Approach reference point.
Inc Var (Incremental Feed variable)

VAR Incremental mode with variable increment size.
Inc (Incremental Feed)

1 10000 Incremental mode with predefined increment size of 1, ..., 10000
...
increments.
A machine data code determines how the increment value is inter-

preted.
Please read the relevant information in the machine manufacturer's
instruction manual.
Cycle Start
Cycle Start Start execution of a program.
Cycle Stop
Cycle Stop Stop execution of a program.
Axis keys
+X ...
Z Traverse the axis in the appropriate direction.
Rapid
Rapid Move axis at rapid traverse (fastest speed).
WCS MCS
WCS MCS Switch between the workpiece coordinate system (WCS = work) and
machine coordinate system (MCS = machine).

1 1
06.03 Introduction
1.2 Workstation
Feedrate/Rapid Traverse Override

Raise or lower the programmed feedrate or rapid traverse.
The programmed feedrate or rapid traverse is set to 100% and can be
%
adjusted between 0% and 120% (only up to 100% for rapid traverse).
The new feedrate setting appears in the feedrate status display on the
screen as an absolute value and as a percentage.
Feed Stop
Feed Stop Stop executing the running program and shut down axis drives.
Feed Start
Feed Start Continue execution of the program in the current block and ramp up to
the feedrate specified in the program.
Spindle Override
Increase or decrease the programmed spindle speed.
% The programmed spindle speed is set to 100% and can be controlled
from 50 to 120%. The new spindle speed setting appears in the
spindle status display on the screen as an absolute value in percent.
Spindle Dec. – only OP032S machine control panel

Spindle Dec. Decrease the programmed spindle speed.
Spindle Inc. – only OP032S machine control panel
Spindle Inc. Increase the programmed spindle speed.
100 % – only OP032S machine control panel
100% Restore programmed spindle speed.
Spindle Stop
Spindle Stop Stop spindle.
Spindle Start
Spindle Start Start spindle.

1 1
Introduction 06.03
1.2 Workstation
Keyswitch
You can use the keyswitch to set various access rights. The keyswitch
has four settings for protection levels 4 to 7.
Machine data can be programmed to interlock access to programs,
data and functions at various protection levels.
The keyswitch has three keys of different colors that you can remove
in the specified positions:
Position 0 Lowest
No key access authorization
Protection level 7 



Position 1 


Key 1 black 
↓
Protection level 6 Increasing
access authorization
Position 2 
Key 1 green 


Protection level 5 



↓
Position 3
Highest
Key 1 red
access authorization
Protection level 4
When you change the key position to change the access authoriza-
tion, this is not indicated immediately in the operator interface. You
have to initiate an action first (e.g. close or open directory).
If the PLC is in the Stop state (LEDs on the machine control panel
flash), ShopTurn does not evaluate the switch settings on booting.
The machine manufacturer can set up protection levels 0 to 3 using a

password. When the password is used, ShopTurn does not evaluate
the keyswitch setting.

1 1
06.03 Introduction
1.3 Operator interface
1.3.1 Overview
Screen layout
Operator Interface
1 Active operating mode/operating area and secondary mode

2 Alarm and message line
3 Program name
4 Program path
5 Channel state and program control
6 Channel operational messages
7 Position display for the axes
8 Display for
• Active tool T
• Current feedrate F
• Active spindle (S1 = Main spindle, S2 = Tool spindle,
S3 = Counterspindle)
9 Display of active work offsets and rotation
10 Working window
11 Dialog line for additional explanatory text
14 Soft keys
15 Screen keys

1 1
Introduction 06.03
Secondary mode REF: Approaching a reference point

REPOS: Repositioning
INC1 ... INC10000: Fixed increment
INC_VAR: Variable increment
Channel status RESET

active
interrupted
Program control SKP: Skip G code block

DRY: Dry run feedrate
!ROV: Feedrate override only (not feedrate and rapid traverse
override)
SBL1: Single block (stop after every block that triggers a function
on the machine)
SBL2: Not available for selection in ShopTurn (stop after every
block)
SBL3: Single block fine (stop after every block, even within a
cycle)
M01: Programmed stop
DRF: DRF offset
PRT: Program test
Channel operational Stop: An operator action is required.

messages
Wait: No operator action is required.
Feedrate status Feedrate is not enabled
Spindle status Spindle is not enabled

Spindle is stationary
Spindle is turning clockwise
Spindle is turning counterclockwise
Key to meaning of symbol colors:

Red: Machine is stationary
Green: Machine is running
Yellow: Waiting for operator to take action
Gray: Other
Screen keys
Machine
Call active operating mode (Machine Manual, MDI or Machine Auto).
Return

1 1
06.03 Introduction
Expansion
Change horizontal soft key bar.
Menu Select
Call main menu:
The machine manufacturer can display defined symbols instead of the

program path (4). The program path is then displayed together with
the program name (3).
1.3.2 Operation via soft keys and hard keys
The ShopTurn operator interface comprises a range of screen forms,

each of which contains eight horizontal and eight vertical soft keys.
You operate the soft keys with the keys alongside the soft key bars.
Use the soft keys to display a new screen form.
ShopTurn uses 3 operating modes (Machine Manual, MDI and

Machine Auto) and 4 operating areas (Program Manager, Program,
Messages/Alarms and Tools/Work offsets).
To switch from one operating mode/operating area to another, press

the "Menu Select" key. The main menu is displayed in which you can
select the appropriate operating area via a soft key.
Alternatively, you can call the operating areas via the hard keys on the
operator panel.
You can activate an operating mode directly at any time via the keys
Jog MDI Auto on the machine control panel.
If you select the "Machine" soft key in the main menu, the screen form
for the currently active mode appears.

1 1
Introduction 06.03
If you select another operating mode or operating area, the horizontal

and vertical soft key bars change.
Main Menu key
Operating mode

1 1
06.03 Introduction
If you press a horizontal soft key within an operating mode or

operating area, only the vertical soft key bar will change.
Machine Manual operating mode
Function within Machine Manual operating mode

1 1
Introduction 06.03
When the symbol appears to the right of the dialog line in the
operator interface, you can change the horizontal soft key bar within
an operating area. Press the "Expansion" key. The original horizontal
soft key bar will return when you press "Expansion" again.
Within an operating mode or operating area, you can use the soft key
"Back" to return to the higher-level screen form.
Use the "Abort" soft key to exit a screen form without accepting the
entered values and return to the higher-level screen form.
When you have entered all the necessary parameters in the parame-
terization screen form correctly, you can close the screen form and
save the parameters using the "Accept" soft key.
Use the "OK" soft key to initiate an action immediately, e.g. to rename
or delete a program.
If you activate functions using soft keys, the soft key displays a black
On background.
Program To deactivate the function, you must press the soft key again. The soft
test Off key then has a gray background again.

1 1
06.03 Introduction
1.3.3 Program views
You can display different views of a ShopTurn program.
Program manager In the program manager, you can manage all your programs. You can
also select a program here for machining the workpiece.
Program manager
Select the program manager with the "Program" soft key or "Program
-or- Manager" key.
You can move around within a directory using the "Cursor up" and
"Cursor down" keys.
Use the "Cursor right" key to open a directory.
Use the "Cursor left" key to move up to the next-higher directory level.
Use the "Cursor right" or "Input" key to open the process plan for a
-or- program.

1 1
Introduction 06.03
Process plan The process plan provides an overview of the separate machining
steps of a program.
Process plan
You can move between the program blocks in the process plan using
the "Cursor up" and "Cursor down" keys.
Use the "Help" key to switch between the process plan and the pro-
gramming graphics.
Programming graphic The programming graphics show the contour of the workpiece in dy-
namic broken-line graphics. The program block selected in the
machining plan is color-highlighted in the programming graphic.
Programming graphic

1 1
06.03 Introduction
Use the "Cursor right" key to open a program block in the process
plan. The appropriate parameterization mask complete with program-
ming graphics is then displayed.
Parameter screen with The programming graphics in a parameterization screen form show
programming graphics the contour of the current machining step in broken-line graphics
complete with the parameters.
Parameter screen with programming graphics
Use the cursor keys to move between the input fields within a para-
meterization screen form.
Use the "Help" key to switch between the programming graphics and
the help display.

1 1
Introduction 06.03
Parameter screen with The help display in the parameterization screen form explains the
help display parameters of the machining step individually.
Parameter screen with help display
The colored symbols in the help displays have the following meaning:
Yellow circle = reference point
Red arrow = tool traveling at rapid traverse
Green arrow = tool traveling at machining feedrate

1 1
06.03 Introduction
1.3.4 Enter parameters
On setting up the machine and during programming, you must enter

values in the white fields for various parameters.
Parameters with gray input fields are automatically calculated by
ShopTurn.
White field Gray field

input input
Parameter
Unit
Parameterization screen form
Select parameters In the case of certain parameters, you can select from a number of
options in the input field. In such field, it is not possible to type a
value.
Ø Press the "Alternat." soft key or the "Select" key until the required
-or- setting is displayed.
The "Alternat." soft key is only visible when the cursor is positioned on
an input field which has a choice of options. The "Select" key is also
only effective in this situation.
Enter parameters For the remaining parameters, enter a numerical value in the input
field using the keys on the operator panel.
Ø Enter the desired value.
Ø Press the "Input" key to terminate entry.
If you don't want to enter a value, i.e. not even "0", press the
-or- "Backspace" or "Del" key.

1 1
Introduction 06.03
Select units For certain parameters, you can choose between different units.
Ø Press the "Alternat." soft key or the "Select" key until the required
-or- units are displayed.
The "Alternat." soft key is only visible when you have a choice of units
for this parameter. The "Select" key is also only effective in this
situation.
Clear a parameter If an input field contains an invalid value, you can delete it completely.
Ø Press the "Backspace" or "Del" key.

-or-
Change or calculate If you only want to change individual characters in an input field and
parameters not overwrite the complete entry, switch to insert mode. In this mode,
the pocket calculator is also active. You can use it during program-
ming to calculate parameter values.
Ø Press the "Insert" key.
Insert mode and the pocket calculator are activated.
You can move around within the input field using the "Cursor left" and
"Cursor right" keys.
Use the "Backspace" or "Del" key to delete individual characters.
For further information about the pocket calculator, see the Section
"Pocket calculator".
Accept parameters When you have entered all the necessary parameters in the parame-
terization screen form correctly, you can close the screen form and
save the parameters.
Ø Press the "Accept" soft key or the "Cursor left" key.

-or- If there are several input fields in a line and you want to use the
"Cursor left" key to accept the parameters, you must position the
cursor in the input field on the far left.
You cannot accept the parameters if they are incomplete or obviously

erroneous. In this case, you can see from the dialog line which para-
meters are missing or were entered incorrectly.

1 1
06.03 Introduction
1.3.5 CNC-ISO operator interface
You can switch from the ShopTurn interface to the CNC-ISO

interface.
You can activate remote diagnosis here. This enables the control to
be operated via an external computer.
The machine manufacturer must have enabled switchover from the

ShopTurn to the CNC-ISO operator interface.
For a more detailed description of the CNC-ISO operator interface,

please refer to:
References: /BEM/, HMI Embedded Operator's Guide
SINUMERIK 840D/810D
/BAD/, HMI Advanced Operator's Guide
/PG/, Programming Guide Fundamentals
/PGA/, Programming Guide Advanced
The remote diagnosis function is a software option.
For further information about remote diagnosis, please refer to:

References: /FB/, Description of Functions, Extension Functions,
F3 Remote Diagnosis
CNC-ISO operator
interface
Ø Press the "CNC ISO" soft key in the horizontal soft key bar.
-and-
Ø Then press the "CNC ISO" soft key in the vertical soft key bar.

1 1
Introduction 06.03
CNC-ISO operator interface
Ø If you wish to return to the ShopTurn operator interface, press the

"Menu Select" soft key.
-and-
ShopTurn
Ø Press the "ShopTurn" soft key.
Remote diagnosis
Ø Press the "Menu Select" key in the CNC-ISO operator interface.
Diagnosis
Ø Press the "Diagnosis" soft key.
Remote Ø Press the "Remote diagnosis" soft key.

diagnosis

1 1
06.03 Introduction
1.3.6 ShopTurn Open (PCU 50)
Two different variants of the ShopTurn software are available for the
PCU 50, i.e. ShopTurn Classic and ShopTurn Open. ShopTurn
Classic is the software that has been marketed to date under the
name ShopTurn.
ShopTurn Open differs from the ShopTurn Classic variant in terms of

its basic menu bar and extended basic menu bar.
In ShopTurn Open you cannot switch over to the CNC-ISO operator
interface. Instead, you can access the HMI Advanced operating areas
"Services", "Diagnosis", "Start-Up" and "Parameters" (without tool
management and work offsets) directly via soft keys in the extended
horizontal soft key menu.
For a detailed description of the integrated HMI Advanced operating

areas, please refer to:
References: /BAD/, HMI Advanced Operator's Guide
Some of the soft keys in the basic menu or extended menu bars may
be assigned to other operating areas by the machine manufacturer.

1 1
Introduction 06.03
Notes

2 2
06.03 Setting Up the Machine
Setting Up the Machine
2.1 Switching on and off.................................................................................................. 2-48
2.2 Approaching a reference point.................................................................................. 2-48

2.2.1 User agreement for Safety Integrated....................................................................... 2-50
2.3 Operating modes....................................................................................................... 2-51
2.4 Settings for the machine ........................................................................................... 2-52

2.4.1 Switching over the unit of measurement (millimeter/inch) ........................................ 2-52
2.4.2 Switching over the coordinate system (MCS/WCS) ................................................. 2-53
2.4.3 Spindles .................................................................................................................... 2-54
2.5 Tools ......................................................................................................................... 2-56

2.5.1 Creating a new tool ................................................................................................... 2-57
2.5.2 Tool list ...................................................................................................................... 2-59
2.5.3 Measuring the tool manually ..................................................................................... 2-65
2.5.4 Measuring the tool with the measuring calipers........................................................ 2-67
2.5.5 Calibrating the measuring calipers............................................................................ 2-68
2.5.6 Measuring the tool with a magnifying glass .............................................................. 2-70
2.6 Measuring the workpiece zero .................................................................................. 2-71
2.7 Work offsets .............................................................................................................. 2-72

2.7.1 Setting the work offset .............................................................................................. 2-73
2.7.2 Defining work offsets................................................................................................. 2-75
2.7.3 Work offset list........................................................................................................... 2-76
2.8 Manual mode ............................................................................................................ 2-78

2.8.1 Selecting a tool and a spindle ................................................................................... 2-78
2.8.2 Traversing the axes................................................................................................... 2-80
2.8.3 Positioning the axes .................................................................................................. 2-82
2.8.4 Simple stock removal from the workpiece ................................................................ 2-83
2.8.5 Settings for manual mode ......................................................................................... 2-85
2.9 MDI............................................................................................................................ 2-87

2 2
Setting Up the Machine 06.03
2.1 Switching on and off
2.1 Switching on and off

Please refer to the instructions in the machine manufacturer's manual with
regard to switching the control or machine on and off.
The Machine Manual basic display appears when the control has booted
up.
Basic display Machine Manual
2.2 Approaching a reference point

Your turning machine is equipped either with an absolute position measuring
system or with an incremental position measuring system. After you switch
on the control system, an incremental position measuring system must be
calibrated but an absolute position measuring system does not require
calibration.
On an incremental position measuring system, therefore, all the machine
axes must first approach a reference point whose coordinates are known
with reference to the machine zero.
The machine manufacturer specifies the order in which you have to

reference the axes. It is possible to reference all axes simultaneously
(depending on the setting of the machine manufacturer).
The feedrate override is active during reference point approach.

2 2
Caution
The coordinates of the actual-value display are invalid before
referencing is performed.
The limits set by the machine manufacturer for axis travel are also
inactive.
Caution
During referencing, the axes approach the reference point in a straight
line.
For this reason, you must traverse the axes to a safe position
beforehand to prevent a collision during reference point approach.
Please pay careful attention to the actual axis movements on the
machine during reference point approach.
Reference axes
Ø Select "Machine Manual" mode.

Jog
Ø Press the "Ref Point" key on the machine control panel.

Ref Point
Ø Press an axis key.

+X ...
Z
Your selected axis moves to the reference point and stops. The
coordinate of the reference point is displayed. The axis is marked with
.
If an axis key in the wrong direction is selected, the axis does not
move.
Interrupt axis motion
Ø Press the "Feed Stop" key.
Feed Stop The axis stops.
Re-approach axis
Ø Press the axis key again.

+X ...
Z The axis will traverse in the direction of the reference point again.
When all the machine axes have been referenced in this manner, the
position measuring system has been calibrated and the travel limits
set for the axes are effective. The correct coordinates for the
reference point are now shown in the actual-value display.

2 2
2.2.1 User agreement for Safety Integrated
If you are using Safety Integrated (SI) on your machine, you will need
to confirm that the current displayed position of an axis corresponds to
its actual position on the machine when you reference an axis. Your
confirmation is the precondition for the availability of other Safety
Integrated functions.
You can only confirm your user agreement for an axis after it has
approached the reference point.
The displayed axis position always refers to the machine coordinate
system (MCS).
For further information about user agreement, please refer to:

References: /FBSI/, Description of Functions SINUMERIK Safety
Integrated

Jog
Ø Press the "Ref Point" key on the machine control panel.

Ref Point
Ø Press an axis key.

+X ...
Z
Your selected axis moves to the reference point and stops. The
coordinate of the reference point is displayed. The axis is marked with
.
User Ø Select the "User Agreement" soft key.

Agreement
Ø Position the cursor on the relevant axis.
Ø Confirm the machine position.
The axis status is now "safely referenced".

2 2
2.3 Operating modes
2.3 Operating modes

Three different operating modes can be used in ShopTurn:
• Manual mode
• MDI (Manual Data Automatic)
• Automatic mode
Manual mode Manual mode is used for the following preparatory actions:
• Reference point approach, i.e. calibration of the position
measuring system
• Preparing a machine for executing a program in automatic mode,
i.e. gauging tools, gauging the workpiece and, if necessary,
defining the work offsets used in the program
• Traversing axes, e.g. during a program interruption
• Positioning the axes
• Simple stock removal from the workpiece
You can select manual mode by pressing the "Jog" soft key.
Jog The parameters set under "T, S, M..." affect all movements in manual
mode with the exception of reference point approach.
MDI In MDI mode, you can enter and execute G code commands
non-modally to set up the machine or to perform a single action.
You can select MDI mode via the "MDI" key.

MDI
Automatic mode In automatic mode, you can execute a program completely or only
partially. You can also trace execution of the program in a graphical
display on the screen.
You can select "Machine Auto" via the "Auto" key.

Auto

2 2
2.4 Settings for the machine
2.4.1 Switching over the unit of measurement (millimeter/inch)
You can specify either millimeters or inches as the unit of measurement for
the machine. The switchover applies to the entire machine and all para-
meters are converted automatically to the new unit of measurement by
ShopTurn, e.g.:
• Positions
• Tool offsets
• Work offsets
Regardless of the general machine setting, you can still change the unit of
measurement for manual mode (see Section "Settings for manual mode")
or for individual programs (see Section "Creating a new program"). These
settings for the unit of measurement refer, however, only to the program-
med positions. Tool offsets, work offsets, etc. remain in the unit of
measurement set for the machine as a whole.
If, for example, you set millimeters as the unit of measurement for the
machine, but a workpiece drawing is dimensioned in inches, the inch unit
of measurement can be selected for this program. You can therefore
specify the positions directly in inches on programming, but you will specify
tool offsets, feedrates and so on as usual in millimeters.
Ø Open the extended horizontal soft key menu in "Machine Manual"

Jog mode.
Ø Press the "ShopT. sett." soft key.
Inch Ø Press the "Inch" soft key.

Inch
Unit of measurement: Millimeter (soft key is deselected)
Inch
Unit of measurement: Inch (soft key is selected.)
A prompt asks whether you really want to switch over the unit of
measurement.
Ø Press the "OK" soft key.
The unit of measurement will be changed accordingly for the machine as a

whole.

2 2
2.4.2 Switching over the coordinate system (MCS/WCS)
The coordinates in the actual value display are based on either the
machine coordinate system or the workpiece coordinate system. In
contrast to the workpiece coordinate system (WCS), the machine
coordinate system (MCS) does not take into account work offsets (see
Section "work offsets"). The workpiece coordinate system is the default
setting for the actual value display.
Ø Press the "WCS MCS" key.

WCS MCS
-or-
Ø Select "Machine Manual" or "Machine Auto" mode.
Jog Auto
-or- -and-
Actual Ø Press the "Actual value MCS" soft key to select or deselect this
value MCS
coordinate system.
Actual
value MCS WCS = work (soft key is deselected)
Actual
value MCS MCS = machine (soft key is selected)

2 2
2.4.3 Spindles
If your turning machine has a counterspindle, or if you wish to use the

spindle chuck as a reference point for manual tool measurement, you
must specify the spindle dimensions.
Counterspindle You can measure either the front edge or the stop edge of the
counterspindle. The measured edge then automatically applies as the
reference point when the counterspindle traverses. This is particularly
important when the counterspindle is used to grip the workpiece (see
Section "Machining with the counterspindle").
Front edge Stop edge
Counterspindle measurement
Please read the manufacturer's instructions with respect to the

"Clamp" parameter.
Manual tool If you wish to use the clamp for the main spindle or counterspindle as
measurement a reference point for manual tool measurement, you must specify the
clamp dimension ZL0 or ZL1.
Ø Select the "Tools WOs" operating area.
Ø Press the "Expansion" key.
Ø Select the "Spindles" soft key.
Ø Enter the parameters.
The settings take effect immediately.

2 2
Parameters Description Unit
S1 Speed limit for main spindle rpm

Clamp Main spindle: Clamp workpiece internally or externally
ZL0 Chuck dimension, main spindle (inc) mm
S3 Speed limit for counterspindle rpm
Clamp Counterspindle: Clamp workpiece internally or externally
Jaw type Dimensions of front edge or stop edge
ZL1 Chuck dimension, counterspindle (inc) mm
ZL2 Stop dimension, counterspindle (inc) mm
ZL3 Jaw dimension, counterspindle (inc) – (only when stop edge dimensions apply) mm

2 2
2.5 Tools
2.5 Tools
The various tool geometry parameters must be referenced while the
program is running. These are entered as so-called tool offset data in
the tool list. Each time a tool is called up, the control takes into
account the tool offset data.
You then only have to enter the workpiece dimensions from the
manufacturing drawing during programming. The control will
automatically calculate the individual tool path.
Tool length Tool length compensation equalizes the length variations in the X and
compensation Z directions between the different tools.
The tool length is the distance between the tool carrier reference
point T and the tool tip P. If the tool is clamped differently in the tool
turret for a new machining direction, a different tool length offset
applies.
T
X
Z
Length X
P
Length X
P T
Length Z Length Z
Tool length offsets
The tool length offset is determined with the "Measure tools" function,
either manually or using measuring calipers or a magnifying glass.
The control calculates the travel movements from the tool length
offset and wear data (see Section "Entering the tool wear data").

2 2
2.5 Tools
Tool/tool nose radius The workpiece contour and the traverse path of a tool are not
compensation identical, because the center point of a tool is not intended to travel
along the contour to be machined.
ShopTurn displaces the programmed tool path as a function of tool

radius and machining direction in such a way that the tool edge
travels exactly along the programmed contour. This displaced tool
path is called the equidistant path.
Equidistant Equidistant
Equidistant path during turning and milling
The control calculates the displaced tool path from the tool radius that
is entered in the tool list and the wear data (see Section "Entering the
tool wear data").
Please refer to "Creating program blocks" for more information about

radius compensation.
2.5.1 Creating a new tool
You must enter a new tool in the tool list before you can use it. When
you create a new tool, ShopTurn presents a choice of tool types. The
tool type determines which geometry data are required and how they
will be computed.

2 2
2.5 Tools
Possible tool types
The rotary drill can be used for centric drilling and turning.
Ø Mount the new tool in the turret (see also Section "Select tool and
spindle").
Ø Select the "Tool list" soft key in the "Tools WOs" operating area.
Ø Place the cursor on the location in the tool list that the tool
occupies in the tool turret. The location must still be empty in the
tool list.
New > Ø Press the "New tool" soft key.

tool
Roughing 3D_Probe
Ø Select the desired tool type and tool direction with the soft keys.
tool ... Additional tool types and tool point directions can be called up by
pressing the "Further" soft key.
The new tool is created and automatically assumes the name of the
selected tool type.
Ø Enter a unique tool name.

You can edit the tool name as required. A tool name may contain
a maximum of 17 characters. You can use letters, digits, the
underscore symbol "_", periods "." and slashes "/".
Ø Enter the offset data of the tool.

2 2
2.5 Tools
2.5.2 Tool list
Enter all the tool parameters in the tool list that are required:
• For calculating the tool length compensation or radius
compensation,
• For calculating the machining cycles,
• For displaying the tools in the simulated program execution.
Various parameters are required depending on the tool type.
Length X
Toolholder
Plate length
angle
Cutter radius Cutting direction Plate angle
Length Z
Roughing/Finishing tool
Diameter
Length X
Length X
Plate length
Radius Plate width

Length Z Length Z
Recessing tool Milling tool

2 2
2.5 Tools
Length X
Length X
Diameter
Tip angle
Radius
Length Z
Length Z
Drill Threading tool
Diameter
Length X
Length Z
Length X
Dead stop
Radius
Length Z
Mushroom head tool

2 2
2.5 Tools
Plate angle
Length X
88°
90°
Toolholder angle
Rotary drill
Radius
Bore Ø
Length Z
Rotary drill
Length X
Length X
Diameter
Pitch
Diameter
Length Z
Length Z
Screw tap 3D probe

2 2
2.5 Tools
Tool list
The tool list may have been altered by the machine manufacturer.
Loc. Location number in the magazine
The location number of the tool in the machining position in the turret
is displayed with a gray background.
If you are working with more than one magazine, you will see the
magazine number here first followed by the location number within the
magazine (e.g. 1/10). Tools that are not currently in a magazine are
listed without a location number (these tools can be found at the end
of the tool list when the list is sorted according to magazine location
number).
The locations for a spindle and a double gripper can also be displayed
for chain and plate magazines.
Spindle location
Locations for grippers 1 and 2
Type Tool type and tool point direction

You can change the tool point direction of the tool with the "Alternat."
soft key.
Tool name A tool is identified by its name. A tool name can be entered as text or
a number (see Section "Creating a new tool").
DP Duplo number of the sister tool (replacement tool)

(DP 1 = Original tool, DP 2 = First replacement tool,
DP 3 = Second replacement tool, etc.)

2 2
2.5 Tools
Tool offset data

Cutting edge Tool offset data for the selected cutting edge of a tool (D No.)
Length X Tool length offset in the X direction

You can determine this value using the "Measure tool" function (see
Section "Measuring the tool manually" or "Measuring the tool with the
magnifying glass"). If the tool is measured externally, you can enter
the value here.
Length Z Tool length offset in the Z direction

You can determine this value using the "Measure tool" function (see
Section "Measuring the tool manually" or "Measuring the tool with the
magnifying glass"). If the tool is measured externally, you can enter
the value here.
Radius or ∅ Radius or diameter of the tool

You can also enter the diameter for milling cutters and drills, but only
the tool radius for turning tools. A machine data code is used to switch
from radius to diameter specification.
Direction of motion for holder angle
Holder angle of a cutting tool

The holder angle is taken into account during relief cutting.

The cutting tip angle is taken into account during relief cutting.
Pitch Pitch of a screw tap in mm/rev or turns/"
Bore ∅ Diameter of bore for a rotary drill
Tip.width Tip width of grooving tool

ShopTurn needs the tip width to calculate the grooving cycles.
Tip.length Tip length of a cutting or grooving tool

ShopTurn needs the tip length to display tools when simulating the
program run.
N Number of teeth on a milling cutter

The control system uses this to calculate the revolutional feedrate
internally if the feed is set in mm/tooth in the program.
Angle of tool tip on a drilling machine

If you want to insert a drill down to the shank, and not just to the tool
tip, the control will need the angle of the drill tip.

2 2
2.5 Tools
Tool-specific functions
Specification of direction of spindle rotation
The direction of spindle rotation applies to the tool spindle in the case
of driven tools (drill and milling tool), and to the main spindle or
counterspindle in the case of turning tools.
If you are using a drill or milling tool for "Drill centered" or "Thread
centered", the specified direction of rotation thus refers to the cutting
direction of the tool. The main spindle then rotates in the same
direction as the tool.
Clockwise spindle rotation
Counterclockwise spindle rotation
Spindle not activated
Coolant supplies 1 and 2 (e.g. internal and external cooling) on/off

Coolant on
Coolant off
It is not essential to set up the coolant supply on the machine first.
Ø Enter the required tool names and the values for the tool offset
data in the tool list.
Ø Press the "Alternat." soft key or the "Select" key to make the
-or- required settings for the tool-specific functions.

2 2
2.5 Tools
2.5.3 Measuring the tool manually
For manual measurement, move the tool manually to a known

reference point in order to determine the tool dimensions in the X and
Z direction. ShopTurn then calculates the tool offset data from the
position of the toolholder reference point and the reference point.
As a reference point you can either use the workpiece edge or, when
measuring in the Z direction, the main spindle or counterspindle
chuck.
The position of the workpiece edge can be specified during the

measurement process. The position of the chuck on the other hand
must be specified before starting the measurement (see "Spindles").
Workpiece edge as
reference point
Ø Select the "Meas. tool" soft key in "Machine Manual" mode.
Jog
Manual >
Ø Press the "Manual" soft key.
X Z
Ø Press the "X" or "Z" soft key to define the tool length that you want
-or- to measure.
Tools
Ø Press the "Tools" soft key.
Ø Select the tool to be measured from the tool list. The tool point
direction and the radius or diameter of the tool must already be
entered in the tool list.
Back to Ø Press the "Back to manual" soft key.

manual
The tool is loaded into the "Measure tool" screen form.
Ø Select the tool cutting edge D and the duplo number DP for the
tool.
Ø Move the tool towards the workpiece to be measured and scratch

the workpiece (see Section "Traversing the axes").

2 2
2.5 Tools
Measure length X Measure length Z
Ø Enter the position of the workpiece edge in X0 or Z0.

Until a value is entered for X0 or Z0, the value is loaded from the
actual-value display.
Set Ø Press the "Set length" soft key.

length
The tool length is calculated automatically and entered in the tool list.
The tool radius or diameter and the tool point direction are automati-
cally taken into account.
Store If you want to save the position of the tool after scratching the
position
workpiece, press the "Store position" soft key. Then you can, for
example, traverse the axes for the purpose of measuring the position
of workpiece edge X0 more easily.
Chuck as reference point

Ø Select the "Measure tool" soft key in "Machine Manual" mode.
Jog
Manual > Z
Ø Press the "Manual" and "Z" soft keys.
Tools

manual
The tool is loaded into the "Meas. tool" screen form.
Ø Select the tool cutting edge D and the duplo number DP for the
tool.
Ø Traverse to the chuck and scratch it (see Section "Traversing the

axes").

2 2
2.5 Tools
Measure length Z

length
The tool length is calculated automatically and entered in the tool list.
The tool radius or diameter and the tool point direction are automati-
cally taken into account.
2.5.4 Measuring the tool with the measuring calipers
For automatic measurement, determine the tool dimensions in the X

and Z directions using measuring calipers. ShopTurn then calculates
the tool offset data from the known position of the toolholder reference
point and the measuring calipers.
If you wish to use measuring calipers to measure your tools, a special

cycle has to be set up by the machine manufacturer.
If there is a second set of measuring calipers on the counterspindle,
the machine manufacturer must specify it in a machine data code.
Before the actual measuring operation you must enter the tool point
direction and the radius or diameter of the tool in the tool list. You
must also calibrate the measuring calipers in advance.
Ø Fit the tool that you wish to measure (see "Selecting a tool and
spindle").
Ø Select the "Meas. tool" soft key in "Machine Manual" mode.

Jog
Autom. >
Ø Press the "Autom." soft key.
X Z
Ø Press the "X" or "Z" soft key to define the tool length that you want
-or- to measure.

2 2
2.5 Tools
Measure length X Measure length Z
Ø Select cutting edge number D on the tool.
Ø If there are two sets of measuring calipers on the machine,

choose whether you want to use the measuring calipers on the
main spindle or counterspindle.
Ø Position the tool manually close to the measuring calipers, so that

the measuring calipers can be moved in the appropriate direction
without risk of collision.
Ø Press the "Cycle Start" key.

Cycle Start
The automatic measuring operation starts, i.e. the tool is moved to the
calipers and back again at measuring feedrate.
The tool length is calculated and entered in the tool list. The tool
radius or diameter and the tool point direction are automatically taken
into account.
2.5.5 Calibrating the measuring calipers
If you wish to measure your tools automatically, you must first

determine the position of the measuring calipers in the machine space
relative to machine zero.
The "Calibrate measuring calipers" function is only available if the

password for protection level 1 is set.
In order to calibrate the measuring calipers you must move them from
4 directions (+X, –X, +Z, –Z).
You should use a roughing or finishing calibration tool. The cutting
edge (tool point direction) must always be pointing in the –X and –Z
direction for this process. Enter the length and radius or diameter of
the calibration tool in the tool list.
If there is a second set of measuring calipers on the counterspindle,

the machine manufacturer must specify it in a machine data code.

2 2
2.5 Tools
Ø Fit the calibration tool.

Jog
Calibrate Ø Press the "Calibrate measuring calipers" soft key.

meas. cal.
X Z
Ø Press the "X" or "Z" soft key according to which point of the
-or- measuring calipers you wish to measure first.
Calibrate measuring calipers in X Calibrate measuring calipers in Z
Ø If there are two sets of measuring calipers on the machine,

choose whether you want to use the measuring calipers on the
main spindle or counterspindle.
Ø Choose the direction (+ or –) in which you wish to approach the

measuring calipers.
Ø Position the calibration tool close to the measuring calipers so that

the first point of the measuring calipers can be approached
without risk of collision.

Cycle Start
The calibration operation starts, i.e. the calibration tool is automati-
cally moved to the calipers and back again at measuring feedrate.
The position of the measuring calipers is determined and stored in an
internal data area.
Ø Repeat the operation for the other 3 points of the measuring

calipers.

2 2
2.5 Tools
2.5.6 Measuring the tool with a magnifying glass
If a magnifying glass is installed on the machine, it can be used to

determine the tool dimensions.
ShopTurn calculates the tool offset data from the known positions of
the toolholder reference point and the cross-hair of the magnifying
glass.

Jog
Zoom >
Ø Press the "Zoom" soft key.
Tools
manual
Ø Traverse the tool to the magnifying glass (see Section "Traversing
the axes").
Ø Align the tool tip P with the cross-hair of the magnifying glass.

length
The tool lengths area calculated automatically and entered in the tool
list. The tool radius or diameter and the tool point direction are
automatically taken into account.

2 2
2.6 Measuring the workpiece zero
2.6 Measuring the workpiece zero

The reference point for programming a workpiece is always the
workpiece zero. To determine this zero, you measure the length of the
workpiece and store the position of the cylinder end face in the
Z direction in a work offset. In other words, the position is stored in the
coarse offset and existing values in the fine offset are deleted.
In order to be able to measure the tool, a tool of known lengths must

be in the machining position (see Section "Selecting a tool and a
spindle").
Ø Select the "Meas. workp." soft key in "Machine Manual" mode.

Jog
Ø Select the offset in which the position is to be stored.
-or-
Work Ø Press the "Work offset" soft key.
offset
-and-
Ø Position the cursor on the required work offset.
-and-
manual
Ø Traverse the tool in the Z direction and scratch the workpiece (see
Section "Traversing the axes").
Ø Enter the setpoint position of workpiece edge Z0.
Set work Ø Press the "Set work offset" soft key.

offset
The workpiece zero and therefore the work offset is calculated. The
tool length is automatically included in the calculation.
Example: Setpoint position of workpiece edge Z0 = 0

Tool length compensation Z = 37.6 mm
Þ Z = –37.6

2 2
2.7 Work offsets
2.7 Work offsets

Following reference point approach, the actual value display for the
axis coordinates is based on the machine zero (M) of the machine
coordinate system (MCS = machine). The program for machining the
workpiece, however, is based on the workpiece zero (W) of the
workpiece coordinate system (WCS = work).
The machine zero and workpiece zero are not necessarily identical.
The distance between the machine zero and workpiece vary in
accordance with the type of tool and how it is clamped. This work
offset is taken into account during execution of the program and can
be a combination of different offsets.
The offsets are summed as follows:
W WCS
Coordinate transformation
Total
offset
Work offset fine
Work offset coarse
Basic offset MCS

M
Work offsets
When the machine zero is not identical to the workpiece zero, at least
one offset (basic offset or work offset) exists in which the position of
the workpiece zero is saved.
Basic offset The basic offset is a work offset that is always active. If you have not
defined a basic offset, its value will be zero. Specify the basic offset
using "Workpiece zero" ("see Section "Measuring the workpiece
zero") or "Set WO" (see Section "Setting the work offset").

2 2
2.7 Work offsets
Work offsets Every work offset (G54 to G57, G505 to G599) consists of a coarse
offset and a fine offset. You can call the work offsets from any
ShopTurn program (coarse and fine offset are added together).
You can save the workpiece zero, for example, in the coarse offset,
and then store the offset that occurs when a new workpiece is
clamped between the old and the new workpiece zero in the fine
offset.
Fine offsets must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

For instructions on specifying and calling work offsets, see Sections

"Defining work offsets" and "Calling work offsets".
Coordinate Coordinate transformations are only ever programmed for a specific

transformations ShopTurn program. They are defined by:
• Offset
• Rotation
• Scaling
• Mirroring
(See Section "Defining the coordinate transformations")
Total offset The total offset is calculated from the sum of all offsets and coordinate
transformations.
2.7.1 Setting the work offset
You can save the workpiece zero using "Set WO" as an alternative to
"Workpiece zero".
The offset (active work offset or basic offset) in which the new zero is
stored is defined in a machine data code.
If the values are stored in the active work offset, they are stored in the
coarse offset and existing values in the fine offset are deleted.
The currently active work offset is displayed under the position

window for the axes.
Ø Traverse the machine axes to the required position, e.g. to the

end face of the workpiece (see Section "Traversing the axes").
Ø If you do not want to save the zero point in the currently active
work offset or the basic offset, select another one (see Section
"Settings for manual mode").

2 2
2.7 Work offsets
Ø Select the "Set WO" soft key in "Machine Manual" operating

Jog mode.
Set basic work offset
Ø Enter the required new position value for Z, X or Y directly in the

actual value display. You can use the cursor keys to change
between axes.
Ø Press the "Input" key.
-or-
Z=0
Ø Press the "Z=0" soft key if you want the position value to be set to
zero.
The new zero point is saved in the currently active work offset or in
the basic offset.
Delete
If you want to delete the saved zero point again, select the "Delete"
soft key.

2 2
2.7 Work offsets
2.7.2 Defining work offsets
Enter work offsets (coarse and fine) directly in the work offset list.

The total number of work offsets permitted is specified in a machine
data code.
Ø Select the "Work offset" soft key in the "Tools WOs" operating
area.
The work offset list is displayed.
Ø Position the cursor on the coarse or fine offset that you wish to
define.
Ø Enter the desired coordinates for the respective axis. You can use
the cursor keys to change between axes.
-or-
Position Position Ø Press the "Position set X", "Position set Y" or "Position set Z" soft
set X ... set Z key to accept the position value of an axis from the position
display for a coarse offset.
-or-
Position Ø Press the "Position set all" soft key to accept the position values
set all
of all axes from the position display for a coarse offset.
The new coarse offset is set. The values from the fine offset are
included in the calculation and then deleted.
Clear Ø Press the "Clear offset" soft key to delete the coarse and fine
offset
offset values at the same time.
Further Press the "Further axes" soft key to display a further three axes
axes
(2 rotary axes, 1 linear axis) and define their offset. These additional
axes must be activated via machine data.

2 2
2.7 Work offsets
2.7.3 Work offset list
The individual work offsets as well as the total offset are all displayed
in the work offset list. The currently active work offset is displayed on
a gray background. The work offset list also includes the current axis
positions in the machine and workpiece coordinate systems.
If your turning machine has a counterspindle, the column on the far

right also displays the work offset which has been mirrored for
machining with the counterspindle. If necessary, you can deactivate
work offset mirroring again.
Work offset list
Basic offset
Basic The coordinates of the basic offset appear.
You can change these here in the list.
Work offsets
WO1 ... WO4 The coordinates of the individual work offsets (line 1: coarse offset,
line 2: fine offset) appear. You can edit them here in the list (see
Section "Defining the work offsets").
You can display more work offsets with the "Page Down" key.

2 2
2.7 Work offsets
Coordinate
transformations
Program The active coordinates of the "Offset" transformation are displayed as
well as the angle set in the "Rotation" transformation by which the
coordinate system rotates.
You cannot edit these values here.
Scale The active scaling factor for the "Scaling" transformation is displayed
for the respective axis.
Mirror The mirror axis that was defined by means of the "Mirroring" trans-
formation is displayed.
Total offset
Total The total offset resulting from the basic offset and all active work
offsets and coordinate transformations appears.
Further Press the "Further axes" soft key to display a further three axes (2
axes
rotary axes, 1 linear axis) and define their offset. These additional
axes must be activated via machine data.
Ø Select the "Work offset" soft key in the "Tools WOs" operating
area.
The work offset list appears.

2 2
2.8 Manual mode
2.8 Manual mode

Use "Machine Manual" mode to set up the machine for executing a
program or when you want to perform simple traversing movements at
the machine.
2.8.1 Selecting a tool and a spindle
For the preparatory work in manual mode, tool selection and spindle
control are performed centrally in a screen form.
In addition to the main spindle (S1), a tool spindle also exists for
driven tools (S2). Your turning machine may also be equipped with a
counterspindle (S3).
You can select a tool in manual mode either via its name or via its
turret location number. If you enter a number, ShopTurn first searches
for a name and then for the location number, i.e. if you input "5", for
example, and no tool with the name "5" exists, then the tool with
location number "5" is selected.
Using the turret location number in this way, you can swivel an empty
location into machining position and then load a new tool with ease.
Selecting a tool
Ø Select the "T, S, M" soft key in "Machine Manual" mode.

Jog
Ø Enter the name or the number of the tool T.
-or-
Tools
Ø Call up the tool list by pressing the "Tools" soft key or the "Offset"
-or- key.
-and-
Ø Place the cursor on the required tool in the tool list.

Only one tool can be selected from the tool turret.
-and-

manual
The tool is transferred to the "T, S, M... window".
Ø Select tool edge D and enter the number directly in the field.

2 2
2.8 Manual mode

Cycle Start
The tool is automatically swiveled into the machining position and the
name of the tool is displayed in the tool status line.
Start spindle
Jog
Ø In the left-hand input field of the Spindle parameter, select the
main spindle (S1), the tool spindle (S2) or the counterspindle (S3).
Ø Enter the desired spindle speed or cutting rate in the right-hand

input field.
Ø If your machine has a gear unit for the spindle, you can set the
gear stage.
Ø Select the direction of spindle rotation in the field below:
Spindle rotates clockwise

Spindle rotates counterclockwise

Cycle Start
The spindle rotates.
Stop spindle
Jog
Ø Select the "Stop spindle" function in the bottom spindle field.

Cycle Start
The spindle stops.
Change spindle speed S

Jog
Ø Enter the desired spindle speed.

Cycle Start
The spindle continues to rotate at a different speed.
Position spindle
Jog

2 2
2.8 Manual mode
Ø Select the main spindle (S1), the tool spindle (S2) or the
counterspindle (S3).
Ø Select the "Spindle position" function in the field below.
Ø Enter the desired spindle position (in degrees) in the "Stop Pos."
parameter field.

Cycle Start
A stationary spindle is positioned via the shortest possible route.
A rotating spindle is positioned as it continues to turn in the same
direction.
2.8.2 Traversing the axes
You can traverse the axes in manual mode via the Increment and Axis
keys or handwheels.
During a traverse initiated from the keyboard, the selected axis moves
by a specified increment with the programmed setup feedrate.
You can move the axes simultaneously depending on the machine

manufacturer's settings.
The feedrate and rapid traverse overrides are active during traversal.
Traversing the axes

using the keyboard
Ø Choose a tool, if applicable (see Section "Selecting a tool and a
spindle").

Jog mode.
Ø Press the "ShopTurn sett." soft key.
Ø Enter a value for parameter "Setup feedrate" in mm/min and

mm/rev.
To find out which of the two feedrates is applied to traverse the axes,
please refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
You can move the axes in fixed or variable increments.

2 2
2.8 Manual mode
Ø Press one of the keys [1], [10], ..., [10000] to move the axis
1 10000 through a defined increment.
...
The numbers on the keys indicate the traverse path in
micrometers or micro-inches.
Example: For an increment of 100 µm
(= 0.1 mm), press the "100" key.
-or-
Jog mode.
-and-
Ø Press the "ShopT. sett." soft key.
-and-
Ø Enter your selected setting for the parameter "Variable
increment".
Example: For an increment of 500 µm
(= 0.5 mm), enter 500.
-and-
Ø Press the "Inc Var" key.
VAR
Ø Press the axis key in the appropriate direction.
+X Each time you press the axis key, the axis moves through the
selected increment.
If you want to traverse more than one axis simultaneously, you must
press the relevant axis keys simultaneously.
Traversing the axes Please note the machine manufacturer's instruction manual with
using a handwheel regard to the selection and mode of operation of handwheels.

2 2
2.8 Manual mode
2.8.3 Positioning the axes
In Manual mode, you can move the axes to certain positions for the
purpose of performing simple machining operations.
The feedrate and rapid traverse overrides are active during traversal.
Ø Choose a tool, if applicable (see Section "Selecting a tool and a

spindle").
Ø Select the "Position" soft key in "Machine Manual" mode.

Jog
Ø Enter the target position for the axis/axes that you wish to move.
Ø Enter your selected setting for feedrate F.
-or-
Rapid
traverse Ø Press the "Rapid traverse" soft key.

Cycle Start
The axis is moved to the specified target position. If target positions
have been specified for more than one axis, these axes will traverse
simultaneously.

2 2
2.8 Manual mode
2.8.4 Simple stock removal from the workpiece
Some blanks do not have a smooth or even surface. Use the stock
removal cycle, for example, to turn the end face of the workpiece flat
before machining actually begins.
In order for simple stock removal from a workpiece to function in manual

mode, a gauged tool must be in the machining position (see Section
"Select a tool and a spindle").
If you wish to bore a chuck with the stock removal cycle, you can
program an undercut (XF2) in the corner.
Caution
The tool moves in a straight line to the starting point for stock removal.
Traverse the tool to a safe position beforehand to prevent a collision
during approach.
Ø Select the "Stock removal" soft key in "Machine Manual" mode.

Jog
Ø Enter the desired values for the parameters.
The input form is closed.
Stock removal in manual mode

Cycle Start
The "Stock removal" cycle is started.

2 2
2.8 Manual mode
F, S, V See Section "Create program blocks".

In the left-hand input field of the Spindle parameter you can choose between main
spindle (S1) and counterspindle (S3). In the right-hand input field, enter the spindle
speed or the cutting rate.
Machining Roughing
type Finishing
Position Roughing position:
Direction Roughing direction (flat or lengthwise) in the coordinate system:

parallel to Z axis (longitudinal) parallel to X axis (plane)
Outside Inside Outside Inside
X X X X
Z Z Z Z
X X X X
Z Z Z Z
X0 Reference point ∅ (abs) mm

Z0 Reference point (abs) mm
X1 End point ∅ (abs) or end point (inc) mm
Z1 End point (abs or inc) mm
FS Chamfer (n=1...3) alternative to R mm
R Radius (n=1...3) alternative to FS mm
XF2 Undercut (as an alternative to FS2 or R2) mm
D Infeed depth (inc) – (for roughing only) mm
UX Final machining allowance in X direction (inc) – (for roughing only) mm
UZ Final machining allowance in Z direction (inc) – (for roughing only) mm

2 2
2.8 Manual mode
2.8.5 Settings for manual mode
For manual mode, you can select the central machine functions and
work offsets and set the unit of measurement.
Machine functions (M functions) are functions, such as "Close door"
or "Release chuck" that are additionally provided by the machine
manufacturer.
In manual mode, you can display the axis positions and distance-
defining parameters either in "mm" or "inches". Tool offsets and work
offsets remain, however, in the original unit of measurement in which
the machine was set (see Section "Switching over the unit of
measurement (millimeter/inch)").
Select M function

Jog
Ø In the "Misc. M fct." parameter field, enter the number of the

desired M function.
Refer to the machine manufacturer's table for the correlation
between the meaning and number of the function.
Example:
M function Description
... ...
M88 Close door
... ...
"88" must be entered in the input field
to close the door.
The M function will be active when you next press the "Cycle Start"
key.
Select work offset
Jog
Ø Select the required work offset.
-or-

offset
-and-
Ø Position the cursor on the required work offset.
-and-

manual

2 2
2.8 Manual mode
The work offset will be active when you next press the "Cycle Start"
key.
Set unit of measurement
Jog
Ø Select the unit of measurement.
The unit of measurement will be active in manual mode when you

next press the "Cycle Start" key.

2 2
2.9 MDI
2.9 MDI
In "MDI" (Manual Data Automatic) mode, you can enter G code
commands non-modally to set up the machine and execute them
immediately.
During execution of the G code commands, you can intervene as

follows:
• Execute the program non-modally
• Testing a program
• Set up dry run feedrate
(See Section "Machining the workpiece")
Ø Press the "MDI" key.

MDI
The MDI editor is opened.
MDI
Ø Enter the required commands with the keyboard as G codes.

Cycle Start
The control executes the blocks you have entered.
Delete MDI A program created in MDI mode can either be deleted automatically on
Progr.
completion or you can delete it by pressing the "Delete MDI Program"
soft key, depending on the machine manufacturer's setting.
n

2 2
2.9 MDI
Notes

3 3
06.03 Machining the Workpiece
Machining the Workpiece
3.1 Starting/stopping program execution ........................................................................ 3-90
3.2 Executing a trial program run.................................................................................... 3-93
3.3 Displaying the current program block ....................................................................... 3-94
3.4 Repositioning the axes.............................................................................................. 3-95
3.5 Starting execution at a specific point in the program ................................................ 3-96
3.6 Controlling the program run .................................................................................... 3-101
3.7 Testing a program ................................................................................................... 3-103
3.8 Correcting the program ........................................................................................... 3-104
3.9 Displaying G functions and auxiliary functions ....................................................... 3-105
3.10 Simulation of machining .......................................................................................... 3-106

3.10.1 Simulation before machining the workpiece ........................................................... 3-107
3.10.2 Simultaneous recording before machining the workpiece ...................................... 3-109
3.10.3 Simultaneous recording during machining of the workpiece .................................. 3-110
3.10.4 Editing the blank shape for a G code program ....................................................... 3-110
3.10.5 Different views of the workpiece ............................................................................. 3-111
3.10.6 Changing the viewport ............................................................................................ 3-115

3 3
Machining the Workpiece 06.03
3.1 Starting/stopping program execution

During execution of a program, the workpiece is machined in
accordance with the programming on the machine.
After the program is started in automatic mode, workpiece machining
is performed automatically.
You must load the program in "Machine Auto" mode, from where you
can start it. You can, however, stop the program at any time and then
resume execution later. You can also display the program run in
graphic form on the screen.
Once the program is loaded in "Machine Auto" mode, and "Automatic"

mode is also activated on the machine control panel, you can start the
program whatever your current operating area, even if you are not in
"Machine Auto" mode.
This start option must be enabled in a machine data code.
The following conditions must be met before a program can be

executed:
• The measuring system of the control is synchronized with the
machine.
• A program created in ShopTurn is available.
• The necessary tool offsets and work offsets have been entered.
• The necessary safety interlocks implemented by the machine
manufacturer are activated.
ShopTurn programs created in earlier versions of ShopTurn can also

be executed in the current ShopTurn version. Once an old ShopTurn
program has been executed in the current version of ShopTurn, it is
treated as a program with the current ShopTurn version.
Select a program (whole)
Ø Press the "Program" soft key or "Program manager" key.

-or- The directory overview is displayed.
Ø Place the cursor on the directory that contains the program that
you want to select.
Ø Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

-or-

3 3
The program overview is displayed.
Ø Place the cursor on the required program.
Execute
Ø Press the "Execute" soft key.
ShopTurn switches automatically to "Machine Auto" operating mode

and loads the program.
Select a program
(from program block)
you want to select.

-or- The program overview is displayed.
Ø Place the cursor on the required program.

-or- The selected program is opened in the "Program" operating area. The
process plan of the program is displayed.
Ø Place the cursor on the program block at which the program run
must begin.
ShopTurn automatically switches to the "Machine Auto" mode, loads

the program and performs a block search up to the block you have
selected (see Section "Starting execution at a specific point in the
program").

3 3
Example of the program view in "Machine Auto" mode
When you select a program for the first time for execution, that con-
tains the cycles "Stock removal towards contour" or "Contour pocket",
the individual stock removal steps or solid machining steps for the
contour pocket are calculated automatically. This process may take
several seconds depending on the complexity of the contour.
Start the program
Press the "Cycle Start" key.

Cycle Start
The program starts and is executed from the beginning or from the
selected program block.
Stop the program
Press the "Cycle Stop" key.
Cycle Stop
Machining stops immediately, individual blocks do not finish execu-
tion. When the program is started again, machining will resume at the
point at which it stopped.
Abort the program
Ø Press the "Reset" key.
Reset
Execution of the program is interrupted. When it is started again, it will
execute from the beginning.
Start program execution The program is loaded in "Machine Auto" mode and "Automatic" mode
from an operating area is activated on the machine control panel.

Cycle Start
The program is started and executed from the beginning. However,
the interface of the previously selected operating area remains on the
screen.

3 3
3.2 Executing a trial program run
3.2 Executing a trial program run

During a trial run of a program, ShopTurn can interrupt machining of
the workpiece after every program block that initiates a movement or
auxiliary function at the machine. In this manner, you can check the
result of machining one block at a time during the first pass of a
program.
The entire machining process is combined in one block during drilling,

and machining operations on one plane are combined in a block
during pocket milling.
Drilling and pocket machining functions can be broken down into
individual blocks using the "Single block fine" function. When this
option is selected, machining is also stopped after every individual
contour element in a contour.
Single block Ø Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section "Starting/
stopping program execution").
Ø Press the "Single Block" key.

Single Block

Cycle Start
The first block of the program is executed. Then execution stops. The
text "Stop: Block ended in SBL" is displayed in the channel status line.

Cycle Start
The next block of the program is executed. Then execution stops
again.
Ø Press the "Single Block" key when execution block-by-block is no

Single Block longer required (the key is deactivated again).
If you press the "Cycle Start" key, the program will be executed
through to the end without interruption.
Single block fine Ø Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section "Starting/
Stopping program execution").
Single
Ø Press the "Prog. Cntrl." and "Single block fine" soft keys to
block fine execute each individual drill infeed and each individual pocket
milling motion in a separate block.
Ø Press the "Single Block" key.

Single Block
Ø Continue as described for "Single Block".

3 3
3.3 Displaying the current program block
3.3 Displaying the current program block

If you want precise information about axis positions and key G func-
tions during a trial run or execution of the program, you can show the
basic block display.
You can use the basic block display both in test mode and when
machining the workpiece on the machine. All G code commands that
initiate a function on the machine are displayed in the "Basic block"
window for the currently active program block:
• Absolute axis positions
• G functions for the first G group
• Other modal G functions
• Other programmed addresses
• M functions
The basic block display function must be set up by the machine

manufacturer.
Ø Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section "Starting/

Stopping program execution").
Basic block
Ø Press the "Basic block" soft key.
Ø Press the "Single Block" key if you wish to execute the program
Single Block block by block.
Ø Start program execution.

Cycle Start
The precise axis positions, modal G functions, etc., are displayed in
the "Basic block" window for the currently active program block.

3 3
3.4 Repositioning the axes
3.4 Repositioning the axes

Following a program interruption in automatic mode (e.g. after a tool
breakage), you can retract the tool from the contour in manual mode.
ShopTurn stores the coordinates of the interruption point and displays
the differences in distance traveled by the axes in manual mode in the
actual value window. This difference in distance is known as the
"Repos" offset.
The "Repos" function allows you to reposition the tool on the work-
piece contour, in order to resume program execution.
Overtravel past the position of interruption is not possible due to

blocking by the control.
The feedrate/rapid traverse override is active.
Caution
During repositioning, the axes traverse at the programmed feedrate
and linear interpolation, i.e. along a straight line from the current posi-
tion to the point of interruption. For this reason, you must traverse the
axes to a safe position beforehand to prevent a collision.
If you do not use the "Repos" function after a program interruption and
subsequently traverse the axes in manual mode, on changeover to
automatic mode ShopTurn will traverse the axes and subsequently
start processing automatically on a straight line to the point of inter-
ruption.
The following conditions must be met for repositioning of the axes:

• Program execution has been interrupted by means of "Cycle Stop".
• The axes have been moved from the interruption position to
another position in manual mode.
Ø Press the "Repos" key.

Repos
Ø Select each axis to be traversed, one at a time, in the appropriate

+X traversing direction.
The axes are moved to the interruption position.

3 3
3.5 Starting execution at a specific point in the program

If you only want to execute a particular section of a program on the
machine, it is not mandatory to start execution of the program from
the beginning, you can also start processing from a specific program
block or text string.
The point in the program at which you wish to start machining is called
the "target".
ShopTurn distinguishes between 3 different target types:
• ShopTurn cycle
• Other ShopTurn block or G code block
• Any text
For the "Other ShopTurn block or G code block" target type, you can
again define the target in 3 different ways:
• Position cursor on target block
This is ideal for straightforward programs.
• Choose point of interruption
Machining resumes at the point at which it was interrupted earlier.
This is especially convenient in large programs with multiple
program levels.
• Specify target directly
This option is only possible if you know the exact syntax of the
target.
Once the target has been specified, ShopTurn calculates the exact
starting point for program execution.
With "ShopTurn cycle" and "Any text" target types, the calculation is
always based on the end of the block. For calculating the start point
from all other ShopTurn blocks and G code blocks, you can choose
between four different methods.
Calculation methods 1. Calculation to contour:

During the block search, ShopTurn performs the same calculations
as during execution of the program. The program is executed from
the beginning of the target block, just like normal program execu-
tion.
2. Calculation to end point:

During the block search, ShopTurn performs the same calculations
as during execution of the program. The program is executed from
the end of the target block or from the next programmed position of
the target block.
3. Without calculation
ShopTurn does not perform any calculations during block search,
i.e. calculation is skipped until the target block is reached.

3 3
The parameters within the control contain the values valid before
the block search.
This option is only available for programs that exclusively comprise
G code blocks.
4. External - without calculation
This method is performed in the same way as calculation to end
point, except that subroutines called via EXTCALL are skipped in
the calculation. In the same way, with G code programs that are
executed entirely by external drives (disk drive/network drive),
calculation is skipped until the target block is reached.
This helps to speed up the calculation process.
Caution
Modal functions included in the part of the program that is not calcu-
lated are not taken into account for the part of the program to be
executed. In other words, with the "Without calculation" and "External
– without calculation" methods, you should choose a target block after
which all the information needed for machining is included.
Specify target directly With the "Other ShopTurn block or G code block" target type, you can
enter the target directly in the "Search pointer" screen form.
Each line of the screen form represents one program level. The actual
number of levels in the program depends on the nesting depth of the
program. Level 1 always corresponds to the main program and all
other levels correspond to subroutines.
You must enter the target in the line of the screen form corresponding
to the program level in which the target is located. For example, if the
target is located in the subroutine called directly from the main pro-
gram, you must enter the target in program level 2.
The specified target must always be unambiguous. This means for
example that if the subroutine is called in the main program in two
different places, you must also specify a target in program level 1
(main program).
The parameters in the "Search pointer" screen form have the

following meaning:
Number of program level
Program: Program name (the name of the main program is
entered automatically)
Ext: End of file
P: Continuous counter (if part of a program is repeated
several times, you can specify the repetition number
at which you wish machining to be resumed)
Line: Parameter assigned by ShopTurn
Type: " " Search target is ignored on this level

3 3
N no. Block number

Marker Jump marker
Text Character string
Sub-r. Subroutine call
Line Line number
Search target: Point in the program at which machining is to start
Select ShopTurn cycle
Ø Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section "Start/Stop

the program").
Ø Position the cursor on the desired target block.
Start
Ø Press the "Block search" and "Start search run" soft keys.
search run
Ø Where chained program blocks have several technology blocks,
select the desired technology block in the "Search run" window.
The prompt does not appear in the case of single program blocks.
Ø Press the "Accept" soft key.
Ø For chained program blocks, enter the number for the desired
starting position.

Cycle Start
ShopTurn sets all the necessary parameters.
Ø Press the "Cycle Start" key again.

Cycle Start
The new starting position is approached. The workpiece is then
machined from the beginning of the target block.
You can abort the search by pressing the "Reset" key.

Reset
Select other ShopTurn Position cursor on target block

block or G code block
the program").
Ø Position the cursor on the desired target block.
Ø Press the "Block search" soft key.
To External - Ø Select a calculation technique.

contour ... without cal.

3 3

Cycle Start

Cycle Start
The new starting position is approached. The program executes from
the beginning or end of the target block, depending on the calculation
technique.

Reset
Select point of interruption

Program execution must have been interrupted by pressing the
"Reset" key. (ShopTurn automatically remembers this point of
interruption.)
Ø Switch back to "Machine Auto" mode.
Search
Ø Press the "Block search" and "Search pointer" soft keys.
pointer
Interrupt Ø Press the "Interrupt point" soft key.
point
ShopTurn inserts the saved point of interruption as the target.


Cycle Start
Press the "Cycle Start" key again.

Cycle Start
technique.

Reset
Specify target directly

the program").
Search
Ø Press the "Block search" and "Search pointer" soft keys.
pointer
Ø Specify the desired target.


Cycle Start

3 3

Cycle Start
technique.

Reset
Search for any text

the program").
Ø Press the "Block search" and "Search" soft keys.

Search
Ø Enter the text string that you want to locate.
Ø Select whether the search is to commence at the start of the

program or the current cursor position.
Search
Ø Press the "Search" soft key.
The program block that contains the text string is marked.
Find Ø Press the "Find next" soft key to continue the search, as
next
necessary.
Start Ø Press the "Abort" and "Start search run" soft keys.
search run
Ø Where chained program blocks have several technology blocks,
select the desired technology block in the "Search run" window
and press the "Accept" soft key.
Ø For chained program blocks, enter the number for the desired
starting position and press the "Accept" soft key.

Cycle Start

Cycle Start
The new starting position is approached. The workpiece is then
machined from the beginning of the target block.

Reset

3 3
3.6 Controlling the program run

During workpiece machining, if you want to check the result from time
to time, you can stop machining at specified points (programmed
stop).
Conversely, if you do not want to execute certain machining steps

programmed in G codes on every program run, you can mark these
blocks accordingly (skip G code blocks). ShopTurn blocks cannot be
selected in this way.
You can also choose to allow DRF offsets, i.e. offsets with the hand-
wheel, during machining. This function must be set up by the machine
manufacturer.
Programmed stop Ø Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section "Starting/
Ø Press the "Prog. Cntrl." soft key.
Program. Ø Press the "Program. stop" soft key.

stop
Cycle Start
Execution of the program starts. Program execution stops at every
block for which the G code command "M01" was programmed (see
Section "Inserting a G code in a ShopTurn program").
Ø Press the "Cycle Start" key again each time.

Cycle Start
Execution of the program is continued.
Program. Ø Select the "Program. stop" soft key again if you want the program
stop
to be executed without a programmed stop (the soft key is deacti-
vated again)
Skip G code blocks Ø Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section "Starting/
Skip
Ø Press the "Skip" soft key.

Cycle Start
Execution of the program starts. G code blocks with the "/" character
(slash) in front of the block number are not executed.

3 3
Skip
Ø Press the "Skip" soft key again if you want the marked G code
blocks to be executed again during the next run (the soft key is
deactivated again).
Allow DRF offset Ø Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section "Starting/
DRF Ø Press the "DRF offset" soft key.

offset
Cycle Start
Execution of the program starts. Offsets with the handwheel affect the
machining process directly.
DRF Ø Press the "DRF offset" soft key again if you no longer want to
offset
allow handwheel offsets during machining (the soft key is deacti-
vated again.)

3 3
3.7 Testing a program
3.7 Testing a program

To prevent incorrect machining of the workpiece during the first pass
of the program on the machine, test the program first without moving
the machine axes.
During testing of the program, ShopTurn checks for the following

faults:
• Geometric incompatibility
• Missing data
• Non-executable instruction sequences and jumps
• Violation of working area
ShopTurn detects syntax errors automatically when it loads a program

in "Machine Auto" mode.
ShopTurn will execute auxiliary functions (M and H functions) during

the program test if this has been set by the machine manufacturer.
The following functions can be used during the program test:

• Stop execution with "Programmed Stop" (see Section "Controlling
the program run")
• Graphic display on the screen (see Section "Simultaneous
recording before machining the workpiece")

the program").
Program Ø Press the "Program test" soft key.

test
Cycle Start
The program is tested without traversing of the machine axes.
Program Ø Press the "Program test" soft key again to deactivate test mode
test
on completion of the program (the soft key is deactivated again).

3 3
3.8 Correcting the program
3.8 Correcting the program

As soon as ShopTurn detects a syntax error while a program is being
loaded in "Machine Auto" mode, it displays the error in the alarm line.
You can correct the program in the program editor.
The type of correction that can be made depends on whether the

program is in NC Stop or Reset status following interruption by
ShopTurn.
• NC Stop status:
You can only modify blocks that have not yet been executed on the
machine or read in by the NC.
• Reset status:
You can modify any block.
Ø Press the "Progr. corr." soft key.
The program appears in the "Program" operating area with the block
containing the error highlighted.
Ø Press the "Cursor Right" key.
The parameter screen appears.
Ø Enter the corrections.
The correction will be loaded into the current program.
The program is loaded in "Machine Auto" mode again and you can
start machining the workpiece.

3 3
3.9 Displaying G functions and auxiliary functions
3.9 Displaying G functions and auxiliary functions

While the workpiece is being machined, if you want to know, for
example, whether the tool tip radius compensation is currently active
or which unit of measurement is being used, you can activate display
of the G functions or auxiliary functions.
16 different G groups are displayed under "G function". Within a G

group, only the G function currently active in the NC is displayed. You
can also see the currently active transformations in the window
header.
As an alternative, all G groups with all associated G functions are

listed in "All G functions".
Auxiliary functions include M and H functions preprogrammed by the

machine manufacturer, which pass parameters to the PLC to trigger
reactions defined by the manufacturer.
A maximum of five M functions and three H functions are displayed.
Even when a ShopTurn program is executing, you can display the G

functions currently active in the NC, because the ShopTurn functions
are converted into G code internally.
G Ø Press the "G function" soft key in "Machine Manual" or "Machine

function
Auto" mode.
Instead of parameters T, F and S, the currently active G functions

within a G group will be displayed.
If you press the "G Function" soft key again, the "T, F, S" status
display reappears.
-or-
All G Ø Press the "All G functions" soft key.

functions
Instead of parameters T, F and S, all G groups with G functions are
now listed. If you select the "All G functions" soft key again, the "T, F,
S" status display reappears.
-or-
Auxiliary Ø Press the "Auxiliary function" soft key.

function
Instead of parameters T, F and S, the currently active auxiliary
functions will be displayed. If you press the "Auxiliary function" soft
key again, the "T, F, S" status display reappears.

3 3
3.10 Simulation of machining

Execution of the program can be viewed on the screen in graphical
form to enable the result of programming to be checked easily without
the need to traverse the machine axes. In this way, you can detect
incorrectly programmed machining steps beforehand and prevent
faulty machining of the workpiece.
You can also use the graphical display to follow machining of the
workpiece on the machine when the view of the working area is
blocked, for example, by coolant.
In this graphical display, ShopTurn shows the workpiece and the tools
on the screen in the right proportions, i.e. the programmed blank di-
mensions in the program header are used and the tools are depicted
differently in accordance with their type and size.
In the graphical display of G code programs, ShopTurn displays a pre-

defined blank shape that you can change in any way you want.
Finished-part contour If you have programmed turning operations in the main program,
ShopTurn shows the corresponding finished-part contour at the start
of the graphical display. You can therefore easily compare the actual
contour with the finished-part contour and also detect any residual
material left behind during machining.
This function must be set up using a machine data code.
Display versions You can select from three different versions of the graphical display:
• Simulation before machining the workpiece
Before machining the workpiece on the machine, you can display
execution of the program graphically on the screen at high speed.
The machine axes do not move.
• Simultaneous recording before machining the workpiece
Before machining the workpiece on the machine, you can display
execution of the program graphically on the screen at dry run feed-
rate. The machine axes do not move. In contrast to simulation
mode, you are able here to use the program control functions, e.g.
you can stop graphical machining or continue one block at a time.
• Simultaneous recording during machining of the workpiece
While the program is executing on the machine, you can follow
machining of the workpiece on the screen.

3 3
Views The following views are available for each of these three modes:
• 3-window view
• Side view
• Front view
• Volume model
The traverse paths for the tools are shown in color:

Red line = tool is moving at rapid traverse
Green line = tool is moving at machining feedrate
In all views, a clock is displayed during graphical processing. The

displayed machining time (in hours/minutes/seconds) indicates the
approximate time that would actually be required to execute the
machining program on the machine (incl. tool change).
If a program is interrupted during simultaneous recording the clock
stops.
In addition, the current axis coordinates and the program block that is
currently executing are also displayed.
The active tool with the cutting edge number and feedrate are also
displayed in the simulation.
Counterspindle If during programming you open or close the chuck for the main
spindle or counterspindle using M functions, ShopTurn can only dis-
play this graphically if these M functions are assigned via machine
data cycles.
3.10.1 Simulation before machining the workpiece

form at high speed to enable the result of programming to be checked
easily before the workpiece is machined.
Feedrate override is also active during simulation.

0% = Simulation stops.
> 100% = Speed is 100%.
Feedrate override must be activated via a machine data code.

3 3
Start simulation

you want to simulate.

Ø Place the cursor on the program that you want to simulate.
Ø Press the "Input" or "Cursor Right" key.

-or- The selected program is displayed in the "Program" operating area.
Ø Press the "Simulation" soft key.
Execution of the program will be displayed on the screen in graphical

form. The machine axes do not move.
Details Single Ø Press the "Details" and "Single Block" soft keys if you wish to
Block
execute the program block by block.
Stop simulation
Ø Press the "Stop" soft key.
Simulation is stopped.
Abort simulation
Ø Press the "Reset" soft key.
Simulation is aborted and the blank shape of the workpiece is

displayed again.
Resume simulation
Ø Press the "Start" soft key.
Simulation is resumed.
End simulation
End
Ø Press the "End" soft key.
The process plan or programming graphic for the program is dis-

played again.

3 3
3.10.2 Simultaneous recording before machining the workpiece

form to enable the result of programming to be checked easily before
the workpiece is machined.
Simultaneous recording is a software option.
You can replace the programmed feedrate with a dry run feedrate
defined in a machine data code to speed up machining.
You can also interrupt or control graphical machining, i.e. the program
control functions such as "NC stop", "Single block" and "Feedrate
override" are active.
You can switch to program view if you would like to view the current
program blocks again instead of the graphical display.
This function must be set up using a machine data code.

the program").
Program
Ø Press the "Prog. Cntrl." and "Program test" soft keys.
test
Dry run Ø Press the "Dry run feedrate" soft key to replace the programmed
feedrate
feedrate with a dry run feedrate.
Ø Press the "Realsim." soft key.

Cycle Start
Execution of the program will be displayed on the screen in graphical
form. The machine axes do not move.
Dry run Ø Press the "Dry run feedrate" soft key again if simultaneous re-
feedrate
cording should take place at the programmed feedrate (the soft
key is deactivated again).
Program Ø Press the "Program view" soft key to switch from the graphical
view
display to the program view of the "Machine Auto" mode.
Recording of the graphical data continues in the background.

3 3
Ø Press one of the four soft keys for the graphical views to switch
... back to the graphical display.
3.10.3 Simultaneous recording during machining of the workpiece
When the view of the working area is blocked, for example, by

coolant, you can follow the machining of the workpiece on the screen.
Simultaneous recording is a software option.
You can also activate simultaneous recording of machining when

workpiece machining has already started on the machine.

the program").
Ø Press the "Realsim." soft key.

Cycle Start
Machining of the workpiece is started on the machine and displayed
graphically on the screen.
3.10.4 Editing the blank shape for a G code program
Typical G code programs do not contain a definition of the blank

shape. For the purposes of graphic display, ShopTurn uses a pre-
defined blank shape which you can change in any way you wish.
Ø Select "Simulation" or "Realsim.".

-or-
Ø Press the "Side View" and "Details" soft keys.

Details
>
Setting
Ø Press the "Settings" soft key.
Ø Select the blank shape (cylinder, tube, rectangle or polygon).
Ø Enter the desired dimensions.
Ø Press the "Back" soft key.
When a G code program is next displayed graphically, the dimensions

you have entered will be applied.

3 3
3.10.5 Different views of the workpiece
You can switch between different views in the graphical display for a
clearer view of machining of the workpiece or to display details or the
overall view of the finished workpiece.
The following views are available:

• Side view
The display shows the workpiece partly in lengthwise cross-section
and partly the surface.
• Front view
The workpiece is displayed in cross-section. The end face of the
workpiece is displayed by default.
• Volume model
The volume model is a three-dimensional view of the workpiece. It
does not appear during simulation itself, only when you stop
simulation.
The volume model is a software option.
• 3-window view
The 3-window view shows a side view and front view, along with a
volume model on the PCU 50. The viewport changes synchronous-
ly for the side and front views but the viewport for the volume
module cannot be changed here.
In the volume model only drilling and milling operations are dis-
played continuously by ShopTurn; turning operations are only
updated when you switch to drilling or milling operations.
You can also reposition the displayed viewport in each view.
If there is no longer enough memory for the graphical view, ShopTurn

hides the blank. You can still view the side and front view as a broken-
line graphic.

3 3
Side view
Ø Press the "Side View" soft key.
Side view
See "Changing the viewport" for more information on how to change

the viewport.

3 3
Front view
Ø Press the "Front View" soft key.
Front view
Details Ø Press the "Details" soft key to move the cross-section in the Z
>
direction.
-and-
Z Cut
Ø Press the "Z Cut +" soft key or the "Page Up" key to move the
+ or cross-section in the positive Z direction.
-or-
Z Cut
Ø Press the "Z Cut -" soft key or the "Page Down" key to move the
- or cross-section in the negative Z direction.

the viewport.

3 3
Volume model
Ø Press the "Volume model" soft key.
Volume model
Display volume model

Ø Press the "Stop" soft key to display the volume model at the
current machining point.
Ø Press the "Side view" and "Start" soft keys to continue with the
simulation.
Change view
Details Ø Press the "Details" soft key to change the view.
>
-and-
Ø Press the "View ß" or "View à" soft key to rotate the workpiece
or about the X axis.
-or-
Ø Press the " Rotate View" soft key to rotate the workpiece about
the Z axis.
-or-
Cut
Ø Press the "Cut" soft key to cut the workpiece.
-and-
Cut
Ø Press the "Cut" soft key again to display the complete volume
model.

the viewport.

3 3
3-window view
Ø Press the "3-Window View" soft key.
3-window view

the viewport.
3.10.6 Changing the viewport
You can use the zoom or the magnifying glass to move, enlarge or
reduce the viewport of the graphical view, e.g. to view details or to
display the entire workpiece again afterwards.
With the zoom you can enlarge or reduce the existing viewport from
the center. You can then also move the new viewport.
With the magnifying glass, on the other hand, you can first define the
viewport itself and then enlarge or reduce it.
The zoom/magnifying glass settings are program-specific, i.e. the

settings are saved if you change the viewport and then change to the
process plan and back to the graphic, for example. If you then simu-
late a new program, ShopTurn uses the default zoom and magnifying
glass settings.
You can also return to the default view of the workpiece from a
changed viewport.
You can also delete the machining lines drawn into the graphic in
order to obtain a clearer view, for example.

3 3
Details Ø Press the "Details" soft key.

>
Original viewport
Back to Ø Press the "Back to original" soft key to restore the original size of
original
the viewport.
The workpiece on the main spindle or counterspindle is displayed.
Zoom
Ø Press the "Zoom +" soft key or the "+" key to enlarge the viewport.
Zoom +
+ or -or-
Zoom
Ø Press the "Zoom -" soft key or the "-" key to reduce the viewport.
- or
-or-
Ø Press a cursor key to move the viewport up, down, left, or right.
The new viewport is displayed.
Magnifying glass
Zoom
Ø Press the "Zoom" soft key.
A magnifying glass in the form of a rectangular frame appears.
Ø Press a cursor key to move the magnifying glass up, down, left, or
right.
Magnifying Ø Press the "Magnifying glass +" soft key to enlarge the viewport
glass +
selected with the magnifying glass.
-or-
Magnifying Ø Press the "Magnifying glass -" soft key to reduce the viewport
glass -
selected with the magnifying glass.
Magnifying Ø Press the "Magnifying glass zoom" soft key.

glass zoom
The new viewport is displayed.
Delete machining lines

Ø Press the "Del" key.
The previous machining lines are deleted.

4 4
06.03 Creating a ShopTurn Program
Creating a ShopTurn Program
4.1 Program structure ................................................................................................... 4-118
4.2 Fundamentals ......................................................................................................... 4-120

4.2.1 Machining planes .................................................................................................... 4-120
4.2.2 Machining cycle approach and return ..................................................................... 4-122
4.2.3 Absolute and incremental dimensions .................................................................... 4-124
4.2.5 Pocket calculator..................................................................................................... 4-127
4.2.6 Fits........................................................................................................................... 4-129
4.3 ShopTurn program .................................................................................................. 4-130

4.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 4-130
4.3.2 Create new program ............................................................................................... 4-132
4.3.3 Create program blocks............................................................................................ 4-136
4.3.4 Change program blocks.......................................................................................... 4-140
4.3.5 Program editor ........................................................................................................ 4-141
4.3.6 Specify number of workpieces ................................................................................ 4-144

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edtion 4-117
4 4
Creating a ShopTurn Program 06.03
4.1 Program structure

A ShopTurn program is divided into three sub-areas:
• Program header
• Program blocks
• End of program
These sub-areas form a process plan.
Program
header
Program
blocks
Program
end
Program structure
Program header The program header contains parameters that are applicable to the
entire program, for example, blank part dimensions or retraction
planes.
Program blocks You specify the individual machining steps in the program blocks. You
specify technology data and positions here.
Technology data and

positions
Plain text, e.g. type
of machining
Block number allocated

by control
Symbol of machining cycle
Program block
Chained program blocks Technology blocks and contours or positioning blocks are pro-
grammed separately for the "Contour turning", "Contour milling",
"Milling" and "Drilling" functions. These program blocks are chained
together automatically by the control and joined by square brackets in
the process plan.
In the technology blocks, you specify how and in what form machining
should be performed, e.g. first center and then drill. In the positioning
blocks, you specify the positions for drilling or milling, e.g. placing the
drill holes in a full circle on the end face.

4-118 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edtion
4 4
Technology blocks
Positioning blocks
Technology block and positioning block
Contours
Technology blocks
Contour and technology block
End of program The end of program signals to the machine that machining of the
workpiece has ended. You can also specify the number of workpieces
that you wish to machine here.

4 4
4.2 Fundamentals
4.2 Fundamentals
4.2.1 Machining planes
A workpiece can be machined on various planes. A machining plane

is defined by two coordinate axes in each case. In the case of turning
machines with an X, Z and C axis, three planes are available:
• Turning
• Face
• Peripheral surface
Machining planes Face and Peripheral Surface are available only if

the CNC-ISO functions "Face machining" (Transmit) and "Cylinder
surface transformation" (Tracyl) have been configured.
These functions are a software option.
For turning machines with an additional Y axis, there are two more
planes:
• Face Y
• Peripheral surface Y
The Face and Peripheral Surface planes are then referred to as Face
C and Peripheral Surface C.
If the Y axis is an inclined axis (i.e. this axis is not perpendicular to the
others), you can also select the machining planes "Face Y" and
"Peripheral surface Y" and program the traversing movements in
Cartesian coordinates. The control then automatically translates the
programmed traversing movements from the Cartesian coordinates
system into the traversing movements for the inclined axis.
In order to translate the programmed traversing movements,
ShopTurn needs the CNC-ISO function "Inclined axis" (Traang).
The function is a software option.
The choice of machining plane is integrated in the parameter screens

for the individual drilling and milling cycles. ShopTurn automatically
selects the Turning plane for turning cycles and for "Drill centered"
and "Thread centered". For the "Straight" and "Circle" functions, you
have to specify the machining plane.
The settings for the machining plane are modally active, that is, until
you select another plane.
The machining planes are defined as follows:

4 4
4.2 Fundamentals
Y
X
ce
Fa
Pe
r
su iphe
erf ral
ac Tu
e rni
ng
Machining planes
Turning The Turning machining plane corresponds to the Z/X plane (G18).
End face/End face C The Face/Face C machining plane corresponds to the X/Y plane
(G17).
In the case of machines without a Y axis, the tools can however only
move in the Z/X plane. ShopTurn therefore automatically transforms
the X/Y coordinates that you entered into a movement of the X and C
axis.
You can use end face machining with the C axis for drilling and mill-
ing, for example, to mill a pocket on the end face. In this case, you
can choose either the front or rear end face.
Peripheral surface/ The Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C machining plane corre-

Peripheral surface C sponds to the Y/Z plane (G19). In the case of machines without a Y
axis, the tools can however only move in the Z/X plane. ShopTurn
therefore automatically transforms the Y/Z coordinates that you
entered into a movement of the C and Z axis.
You can use peripheral surface machining with the C axis for drilling
and milling, for example, to mill a slot at constant depth on the
peripheral surface. In this case, you can choose either the internal or
external surface.
Face Y The Face Y machining plane corresponds to the X/Y plane (G17).
You can use end face machining with the Y axis for drilling and mill-
ing, for example, to mill a pocket on the end face. In this case, you
can choose either the front or rear end face.
Peripheral surface Y The Peripheral surface Y machining plane corresponds to the Y/Z
plane (G19).
You can use peripheral surface machining with the Y axis for drilling
and milling, for example, to mill a pocket with a flat floor on the sur-
face or to create drilled holes that do not point to the center. In this
case, you can choose either the internal or external surface.

4 4
4.2 Fundamentals
4.2.2 Machining cycle approach and return
The sequence for approaching to and returning from the machining

cycle is always the same if you have not defined a special approach/
return cycle (see Section "Programming the approach/return cycle"). If
your machine has a tailstock, you can take this into account as an
additional parameter.
Tool change point
Retract plane
Rapid traverse
Machining feedrate
Safety distance
Machining cycle approach/return
• The tool travels at rapid traverse in a direct path from the tool
change point to the return plane that runs parallel to the machin-
ing plane.
• The tool then moves to the safety clearance at rapid traverse.
• Machining of the workpiece is then performed at the programmed
machining feedrate.
• After machining, the tool is retracted vertically at rapid traverse to
the safety clearance.
• The tool then continues to travel vertically at rapid traverse to the
return plane.
• From here, the tool travels at rapid traverse across the shortest
path to the tool change point.
If the tool does not have to be changed between two machining
steps, the tool approaches the next machining cycle from the
return plane.
The spindle (main, tool or counterspindle) starts to turn immediately

after the tool change.
You define the tool change point, the return plane and the safety
clearance in the program header (see Section "Creating a new
program").

4 4
4.2 Fundamentals
Include tailstock
Tool change point
Retract plane
XR
Safety distance
Rapid traverse
Machining feedrate
Approach/return allowing for a tailstock
• The tool travels at rapid traverse in a direct path from the tool
change point to the protection plane XR of the tailstock.
• The tool is then fed in at rapid traverse in X direction in the return
plane.
• The tool then moves to the safety clearance at rapid traverse.
• Machining of the workpiece is then performed at the programmed
machining feedrate.
• After machining, the tool is retracted vertically at rapid traverse to
• The tool then continues to travel vertically at rapid traverse to the
return plane.
• The tool then moves in direction X to the protection plane XR of
the tailstock.
• From here, the tool travels at rapid traverse across the shortest
path to the tool change point.
If the tool does not have to be changed between two machining
steps, the tool approaches the next machining cycle from the
return plane.
You define the tool change point, the return plane, the safety
clearance and the protection zone for the tailstock in the program
header (see Section "Creating a new program").

4 4
4.2 Fundamentals
4.2.3 Absolute and incremental dimensions
When a ShopTurn program is created, you can enter positions in

either absolute or incremental dimensions in accordance with the
dimensioning of the workpiece drawing.
You can also mix absolute and incremental dimensions, i.e. by enter-
ing one coordinate in absolute dimensions, the other in incremental
dimensions.
For the transverse axis (the X axis here), the machine data program-
ming indicates whether the radius or diameter is programmed in
absolute or incremental dimensions.
Absolute dimension With an absolute dimension, all position data always refer to the zero
(ABS) point of the active coordinate system.
P4
P3 P2
Ø 60
P1
Ø 40
Ø 25
7.5 Z
15
25
35
Absolute dimensions
The positions for points P1 to P4 in absolute dimensions are as

follows with reference to the zero point:
P1: X25 Z-7.5
P2: X40 Z-15
P3: X40 Z-25
P4: X60 Z-35

4 4
4.2 Fundamentals
Incremental dimensions In the case of incremental dimensions, positional data references the
(INC) previously programmed point, i.e. the input value corresponds to the
path to be traversed. The plus/minus sign entered with the incremen-
tal value is not normally of any significance. ShopTurn only evaluates
the amount of the increment. For certain parameters however, the
sign specifies the traversing direction. These exceptional cases are
indicated in the parameter tables of the individual functions.
P4
10
P3 P2
7.5
P1
Z
10 10 7.5 7.5
Incremental dimension
The positions for points P1 to P4 in incremental dimensions are as

follows:
P1: X25 Z-7.5 (with reference to zero point)
P2: X15 Z-7.5 (with reference to P1)
P3: Z-10 (with reference to P2)
P4: X20 Z-10 (with reference to P3)

4 4
4.2 Fundamentals
4.2.4 Polar coordinates
Positions can be specified in Cartesian coordinates or polar coordi-

nates.
If a point in a workpiece drawing is determined by a value for each co-
ordinate axis, you can easily enter the position in the parameterization
screen form by means of Cartesian coordinates. For workpieces di-
mensioned with arcs or angles, it is often easier to enter positions
using polar coordinates.
You can only program in polar coordinates with the "Straight/Circle"

and "Contour milling" function.
The point of reference for dimensions in polar coordinates is called the
"pole".
P3
P2
P1
30
30°
30°
30°
Pole
30
Z
30
Polar coordinates
The positions for the pole and points P1 to P3 in polar coordinates

are:
Pole: X30 Z30 (with reference to zero point)
P1: L30 α30° (with reference to the pole)

4 4
4.2 Fundamentals
4.2.5 Pocket calculator
You can use the pocket calculator during programming to calculate

parameter values. If, for example, the diameter of a workpiece is only
indirectly dimensioned in the workpiece drawing, that is the diameter
must be obtained by adding a number of other dimensions, you can
calculate the diameter directly in the input field for this parameter.
A parameter value is always calculated in the input field for the para-
meter. Any number of calculations can be performed using the follow-
ing operations.
• Operators
+ Addition
- Subtraction
* Multiplication
/ Division
() Brackets
MOD Modulo operation
AND AND operator
OR OR operator
NOT NOT operator
• Constants
PI 3.14159265358979323846
TRUE 1
FALSE 0
• Functions
SIN(x) Sine of x, (x in degrees)
COS(x) Cosine of x, (x in degrees)
TAN(x) Tangent of x, (x in degrees)
ATAN2(x,y) Inverse tangent of x/y, (x and y in degrees)
SQRT(x) Square root of x
ABS(x) Absolute value of x
Up to 256 characters can be entered in a field.

4 4
4.2 Fundamentals
Ø Place the cursor on an input field in a parameterization screen

form.
Ø Press the "Insert" or "=" key.

=
or The pocket calculator is active.
Ø Enter the arithmetic expression.

You can use the four arithmetic signs, numbers and decimal
points.
Ø Press the "Input" or "=" key.

=
or The new value is calculated and displayed in the input field. The
pocket calculator is deactivated.
To delete the previous value in an input field first, press the

"Backspace" key.
Example: Tool wear +0.1 Ø Place the cursor on the input field "∆LengthX" in the tool wear list.
Ø Enter the arithmetic expression: + 0.1
Example: Calculate
diameter
30
Ø120
Ø50
ØA
40
160
Workpiece drawing

4 4
4.2 Fundamentals
Ø Place the cursor on input field "X" in a parameterization screen

form.
Ø Enter the arithmetic expression: 30 * 2 + 50
4.2.6 Fits
If you wish to make a workpiece with an exact fit, you can enter the fit
dimension directly into the parameterization screen form at the pro-
gramming stage.
The fit dimension is specified as follows:
F Diameter/Length Tolerance class Tolerance grade
"F" indicates a fit dimension. You can include any number of spaces
between the individual elements.
Example: F 20h7
Possible tolerance classes:

A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J, JS, T, U, V, X, Y, Z, ZA, ZB, ZC
Uppercase letter: Drill holes
Lowercase letters: Shafts
Possible tolerance grades:

1 to 18, unless limited by DIN standard 7150.
Ø Place the cursor on an input field in a parameterization screen

form.
Ø Enter the fit.
The control automatically calculates the mean value from the upper
and lower limiting value.
If you want to enter a lowercase letter, highlight the uppercase letter

entered with the cursor and press the "Select" key. Press the key
again to change it back to an uppercase letter.

4 4
4.3 ShopTurn program
4.3.1 Overview
To create a ShopTurn program, the procedure is as follows:

• Create a new program
• Assign the program name
• Complete program header
• Program the individual machining steps
The machining steps listed below can be used.
Tool
à >
Straight
>
Circle
center >
Circle
radius >
Polar
>
Approach/
Retract >
Drilling
à centric >
Thread
centric >
Drilling
Reaming >
Deep hole
drill >
Thread Tapping
> à
Thread
drilling
Positions
>
Repeat
Position >
Solid
à machin. >
Recess
>
Undercut
>
Thread
>
Cutoff
>

4 4
New
à contour >
Solid
machin. >
St. remov.
Rest >
Grooving
>
Grooving
Rest >
Plunge
turning >
Plunge tur.
Rest >
Pocket
à >
Spigot
>
Groove
>
Multi-edge
>
Engraving
Contour New
milling > à contour >
Path
milling >
Predrilling
>
Pocket
milling
Pocket
resid. mat.
Spigot
milling
Spigot
resid. mat.
Set
à mark >
Repeat
>
Sub-
program >
Counter-
spindle >
Settings
>
Transfor- Work
mations > à offset >
Offset
>

4 4
Rotation
>
Scaling
>
Mirroring
>
Rotation
C axis
4.3.2 Create new program
A separate program has to be created for each new workpiece that

you want to manufacture. The program contains the individual
machining steps that must be completed in order to manufacture the
workpiece.
When you create a new program, the program header and the end of
the program are automatically defined. The following parameters,
which are active throughout the entire program, must be set in the
program header.
WO Work offset in which the workpiece zero is stored.

You can also delete the default parameter setting if you do not wish to
specify a work offset.
Unit of measurement The setting for the unit of measurement (millimeter or inch) in the
program header is only applicable to the positional data in the current
program. All other data, such as feedrate or tool offsets must be
specified in the unit of measurement that you set for the machine as a
whole.
Blank The shape (cylinder, barrel, rectangle or polygon) and dimensions

must be specified for the workpiece blank.
W: Blank width – rectangle only
L: Blank length – rectangle only
N: Number of sides – polygon only
L: Edge length (alternative to SW) – polygon only
SW: Width across flats (alternative to L) – polygon only
XA: External diameter (abs.) – cylinder and barrel only
XI: Internal diameter (abs. or inc.) – barrel only
ZA: Start dimension (abs.)
ZI: Finishing dimension (abs. or inc.)
ZB: Machining dimensions (abs. or inc.)

4 4
Cylinder blank Barrel blank
Retraction The retraction area defines the area outside which collision-free
traversing of the axes must be possible.
A return plane is defined for every infeed direction that is only crossed
in the infeed direction during positioning. The return planes depend on
the shape of the blank and the type of retraction (simple, extended or
all).
XRA: Outer return plane in the X direction (abs.)
XRI: Inner return plane in the X direction (abs. or inc.)
ZRA: Outer return plane in the Z direction (abs.)
ZRI: Inner return plane in the Z direction (abs. or inc.)
The return planes XRA and XRI are always set in a circular shape
around the blank, even for a rectangle and polygon.
Retraction barrel: Simple Retraction barrel: All
Tailstock If your machine has a tailstock, you can extend the retraction zone
further to prevent collisions between the axes and the tailstock. Input
the protection plane XR above the tailstock as an absolute dimension.
Tool change point The tool turret approaches the tool change point with its zero point
and then moves the required tool into the machining position. The tool
change point must be far enough outside the retraction area to ensure
that no tool can enter the retraction area when the tool turret rotates.
Specify the current tool position as either the tool change point (teach
tool change point) or enter the coordinates of the tool change point XT
and ZT directly in the parameter screen form.
Teaching the tool change point is possible only if you have selected
the machine coordinate system (MCS = machine).

4 4
Safety clearance The safety clearance SC defines how close the tool can approach the
workpiece at rapid traverse mode.
The safety clearance must be entered in incremental dimensions
without a plus/minus sign.
Speed limits If you want the workpiece to be machined at constant cutting speed,
ShopTurn must increase the spindle as soon as the diameter of the
workpiece decreases. Since the speed cannot be increased by any
amount, you can specify a speed limit for the main spindle (S1) and
for the counterspindle (S3) as a function of the shape, size and
material of the workpiece or chuck.
The machine manufacturer only specifies a speed limit for the
machine, i.e. not one that is related to the workpiece.
Ø Press the "Program" soft key.
Ø Select the directory in which you want to create a new program.
New ShopTurn Ø Press the "New" and "ShopTurn program" soft keys.
program
Ø Enter a program name.
Program names may be a maximum of 24 characters in length.
You can use any letters, digits or the underscore symbol (_).
ShopTurn automatically changes lower case to upper case.
Ø Press the "OK" soft key or the "Input" key.

-or- The "Program header" parameter screen appears.

4 4
Work Ø Select a work offset or enter a work offset directly in the input field
offset
or use the "Work offset" soft key to call the work offset list, from
which you can select a work offset.
Ø Enter the other parameters.
Teach TC Ø Select the "Teach TC position" soft key if you want to define the
position
current tool position as a tool change point.
The tool coordinates are transferred to parameters XT and ZT.
The process plan is displayed.

ShopTurn has automatically defined the end of the program.

4 4
4.3.3 Create program blocks
After a new program has been created and the program header has
been completed, you can define the individual machining steps that
are necessary for manufacturing the workpiece.
An infinite amount of memory is available for one program. You can

program a total of 1000 program blocks with the "Straight line" func-
tion. If you use other functions which need more memory, the maxi-
mum number of possible program blocks will decrease accordingly.
You can only create program blocks between the program header and
the end of the program. The following function groups are available for
programming:
• Straight line/circle
• Drilling
• Turning
• Contour turning
• Milling
• Contour milling
• Transformations
For each machining step, you must parameterize a separate screen

form. Parameter entry is supported by various "help displays" that
explain the parameters.
The parameters tool, feedrate, speed and machining are explained
below:
T (tool) You have to program a tool for each machining operation on the work-
piece. A tool is selected via its name and is already integrated in all
parameter screen forms in the machining cycles with the exception of
straight line/circle.
Tool length compensations take effect immediately the tool is loaded
into the spindle.
Tool selections are modal with respect to straight line/circle, i.e. for a
succession of machining steps using the same tool, you need only
program a tool for the 1st straight line/circle.
D (cutting edge) For tools with several cutting edges, a separate set of tool offset data
exists for each cutting edge. With these tools, you must select or
specify the number of the edge you wish to use for machining.
Caution
If you specify the wrong cutting edge number and traverse the tool,
this may cause a collision in the case of certain tools (e.g. counter-
bore with spigot or step drill). It is important to ensure that you always
specify the right cutting edge number.

4 4
Radius compensation ShopTurn automatically takes account of the tool radius compensa-
tion for all machining cycles with the exception of path milling and
straight lines. You can work with or without radius compensation for
path milling and straight lines. Tool radius compensation acts modally
in the case of the straight line machining cycle, therefore you must
deactivate the radius compensation again when you want to traverse
without radius compensation.
Radius compensation to right of contour
Radius compensation to left of contour
Radius compensation off
Radius compensation retains previous setting
F (feed) The feed F, also known as the machining feedrate, specifies the
velocity at which the axes move during processing of the workpiece.
The machining feedrate is entered in mm/min, mm/rev or in mm/tooth.
The feedrate for milling cycles is automatically converted on switch-
over from mm/min to mm/rev and vice versa.
Entering the feed in mm/tooth is only possible for milling tools and
ensures that every cutting edge of the milling tool machines under the
best possible conditions. Feed per tooth corresponds to the linear
path traversed by the mill when a tooth is engaged.
With milling and turning cycles, the feedrate for roughing always re-
fers to the milling tool or cutting edge center point. This also applies to
finishing except for contours with inside curvature, where the feedrate
refers to the contact point between tool and workpiece.
The maximum feedrate is set via machine data.

Please read the relevant information in the machine manufacturer's
instruction manual.
S (spindle speed) The spindle speed S specifies the number of spindle rotations per
minute (rpm) and is programmed in conjunction with a new tool. The
speed data apply to the main spindle (S1) or counterspindle (S3) for
turning operations and centric drilling and to the tool spindle (S2) for
drilling and milling operations.
The spindle is started directly after the tool is loaded; the spindle is
stopped on a reset, end of program or tool change. The direction of
rotation of the spindle is specified for each tool in the tool list.
You can program the cutting rate as an alternative to spindle speed.

The spindle speed is automatically converted to cutting rate and vice
versa for milling cycles.

4 4
V (cutting rate) The cutting rate V is a peripheral speed (m/min) and is programmed
as an alternative to the spindle speed in conjunction with a tool. The
cutting rate applies to the main spindle (V1) or the counterspindle (V3)
in the case of turning operations and centric drilling and corresponds
to the peripheral speed of the workpiece at the point that is currently
being machined.
The cutting rate applies to the tool spindle (V2) in the case of drilling
and milling operations and corresponds to the peripheral speed at
which the cutting edge of the tool is machining the workpiece.
Machining You can choose between roughing, finishing and complete machining
when executing certain cycles. For certain types of milling cycles,
edge finishing or base finishing base is also possible.
• Roughing
Single or multiple machining operation with depth infeed
• Finishing
Single machining operation
• Edge finishing
Only the edge of the object is finished
• Base finishing
Only the base of the object is finished
• Complete machining
Roughing and finishing with the same tool in one machining step
If you want to rough and finish using two different tools, you have to
call the machining cycle twice (Block 1 = roughing, Block 2 =
finishing). The programmed parameters are retained on the second
call.

4 4
Ø Position the cursor in the process plan on the line after which the
new program block is to be inserted.
Ø Select the desired functions using the soft keys (see the Sections
... below).
The corresponding parameter screen appears.
Ø Enter the values for the individual parameters.
Ø Press the "Help" key to display a help screen for an explanation of

a specific parameter.
Tools
Ø Press the "Tools" soft key to select a tool from the tools list for the
parameter "T".
-and-
Ø Place the cursor on the tool that you want to use for machining.
-and-
To Ø Press the "To Program" soft key.
Program
The selected tool is loaded into the parameterization screen form.
The values are saved and the parameterization screen form is closed.
The process plan is displayed and the newly created program block is
marked.

4 4
4.3.4 Change program blocks
You can optimize the parameters in the ShopTurn blocks or adapt

them to new situations, e.g. when you want to increase the feedrate or
move a position. In this case, you can change all the parameters in
every program block directly in the associated parameterization
screen form.
The directory overview is displayed.
you want to open.

-or- All the programs in this directory are displayed.
Ø Select the program that you want to change.

-or- The process plan of the program is displayed.
Ø Place the cursor on the desired program block in the process

plan.
The parameter screen for the selected program block appears.
Ø Make the desired changes.
Ø Press the "Accept" soft key or the "Cursor left" key.

-or- The changes are accepted in the program.

4 4
4.3.5 Program editor
You use the program editor when you want to change the sequence
of program blocks within a program, delete program blocks or copy
program blocks from one program to another.
The following functions are available in the program editor:

• Mark
You can mark several program blocks simultaneously, for
example, for cutting and pasting them subsequently.
• Copy/Paste
You can copy and paste program blocks within a program or
between different programs.
• Cut
You can cut and therefore delete program blocks. The program
blocks however remain in the buffer, so you can still paste them in
somewhere else.
• Search
You can search for a specific block number or any character
string in a program.
• Rename
You can rename a contour in the program editor, e.g. if you have
copied the contour.
• Renumber
If you insert a new or copied program block between two existing
program blocks, a new block number is automatically assigned by
ShopTurn. This block number may be higher than the one in the
following block. The "Renumber" function is used to renumber the
program blocks in ascending order.

4 4
Open program editor Ø Select a program.
The soft keys for the program editor are displayed in the vertical soft
key bar.
Select a program block Ø Position the cursor in the process plan on the first or last block
you want to select.
Mark
Ø Press the "Mark" soft key.
Ø Use the cursor keys to select any further program blocks.
The program blocks are marked.
Copy a program block Ø Select the program block(s) in the process plan.
Copy
Ø Press the "Copy" soft key.
The program blocks are copied into buffer memory.
Cut a program block Ø Select the program block(s) in the process plan.
Cut
Ø Press the "Cut" soft key.
The program blocks are removed from the process plan and stored in
buffer memory.
Paste a program block Ø Copy or cut the desired program blocks in the process plan.
Ø Position the cursor on the line after which the program block(s) is
(are) to be inserted.
Insert
Ø Press the "Insert" soft key.
The program blocks are inserted in the process plan of the program.

4 4
Search
Search Ø Press the "Search" soft key.

>
Ø Enter a block number or text.
Ø Select whether the search is to commence at the start of the

program or the current cursor position.
Search
ShopTurn searches the program. The cursor highlights the search hit.
Find Ø Press the "Find next" soft key to continue the search, as
next
necessary.
Rename contour Ø Place the cursor on a contour in the process plan.
Rename
Ø Press the "Rename" soft key.
Ø Enter a new name for the contour.
The name of the contour is changed and displayed in the process

plan.
Number program blocks
Renumber
Ø Press the "Renumber" soft key.
The program blocks are renumbered in ascending order.
Close program editor

Ø Press the "Back" soft key to close the program editor.

4 4
4.3.6 Specify number of workpieces
If you wish to produce a particular number of the same workpiece, you

can input the required workpiece count at the end of the program.
When the program starts, the program run is automatically repeated
the number of times you have specified.
If your machine has, for example, a bar loader, you can program
reloading of the workpiece, followed by the actual machining process,
at the beginning of the program. You can part the finished workpiece
on completion and input the desired workpiece count at the end of the
program.
In this way you can implement a fully automatic workpiece production
process.
Ø Open the "End of program" block if you wish to machine more

than 1 workpiece.
Ø You can also specify the number of workpieces that you wish to
machine here.
When you start the program later, the program run is automatically
repeated the number of times you have specified.
Endless
If you want to repeat the program run an unlimited number of times,
select the "Endless" soft key.
You can then cancel the program run again with "Reset".

5 5
06.03 ShopTurn Functions
ShopTurn Functions
5.1 Linear or circular path motions................................................................................ 5-147

5.1.1 Selecting the tool and the machining plane ............................................................ 5-147
5.1.2 Straight .................................................................................................................... 5-149
5.1.3 Circle with known center point ................................................................................ 5-150
5.1.4 Circle with known radius ......................................................................................... 5-152
5.1.6 Straight polar........................................................................................................... 5-155
5.1.7 Circle polar .............................................................................................................. 5-157
5.2 Drilling ..................................................................................................................... 5-158

5.2.1 Drill centered ........................................................................................................... 5-159
5.2.2 Thread centered...................................................................................................... 5-161
5.2.3 Drilling and reaming ................................................................................................ 5-162
5.2.4 Deep hole drilling .................................................................................................... 5-164
5.2.5 Tapping ................................................................................................................... 5-166
5.2.6 Thread milling.......................................................................................................... 5-168
5.2.7 Positioning and position patterns ............................................................................ 5-170
5.2.8 Freely programmable positions............................................................................... 5-171
5.2.9 Line position pattern................................................................................................ 5-173
5.2.10 Matrix position pattern............................................................................................. 5-174
5.2.11 Full circle position pattern ....................................................................................... 5-176
5.2.12 Pitch circle position pattern ..................................................................................... 5-178
5.2.13 Repeat positions ..................................................................................................... 5-180
5.3 Turning .................................................................................................................... 5-181

5.3.1 Stock removal cycles .............................................................................................. 5-181
5.3.2 Recessing cycles .................................................................................................... 5-184
5.3.3 Undercut form E and F............................................................................................ 5-187
5.3.4 Thread undercuts .................................................................................................... 5-188
5.3.5 Thread cutting ......................................................................................................... 5-190
5.3.6 Thread re-machining ............................................................................................... 5-194
5.3.7 Parting ..................................................................................................................... 5-195
5.4 Contour turning ....................................................................................................... 5-197

5.4.3 Creating contour elements...................................................................................... 5-202
5.4.4 Changing a contour................................................................................................. 5-207
5.4.5 Stock removal ......................................................................................................... 5-210
5.4.6 Removal of residual material .................................................................................. 5-214
5.4.7 Grooving.................................................................................................................. 5-216
5.4.8 Grooving residual material ...................................................................................... 5-217
5.4.9 Plunge-turning......................................................................................................... 5-219
5.4.10 Plunge-turning residual material ............................................................................. 5-221
5.5 Milling ...................................................................................................................... 5-223

5.5.1 Rectangular pocket ................................................................................................. 5-224
5.5.2 Circular pocket ........................................................................................................ 5-227

5 5
ShopTurn Functions 06.03
5.5.3 Rectangular spigot .................................................................................................. 5-230

5.5.4 Circular spigot ......................................................................................................... 5-232
5.5.5 Longitudinal slot ...................................................................................................... 5-235
5.5.6 Circumferential slot.................................................................................................. 5-238
5.5.7 Positions .................................................................................................................. 5-241
5.5.8 Multiple edge ........................................................................................................... 5-242
5.5.9 Engraving ................................................................................................................5-244
5.6 Contour milling ........................................................................................................ 5-248

5.6.5 Path milling .............................................................................................................. 5-264
5.6.6 Predrilling contour pockets ...................................................................................... 5-268
5.6.7 Milling contour pockets (roughing) .......................................................................... 5-272
5.6.8 Removing residual material from pocket................................................................. 5-274
5.6.9 Finishing the contour pocket ................................................................................... 5-276
5.6.10 Milling contour spigots (roughing) ........................................................................... 5-280
5.6.11 Removing residual material from the spigot............................................................ 5-282
5.6.12 Finishing the contour spigot .................................................................................... 5-284
5.7 Calling a subroutine................................................................................................. 5-288
5.8 Repeat program blocks ........................................................................................... 5-290
5.9 Machining with the counterspindle .......................................................................... 5-292
5.10 Changing program settings ..................................................................................... 5-297
5.11 Calling work offsets ................................................................................................. 5-298
5.12 Defining coordinate transformations ....................................................................... 5-299
5.13 Programming the approach/return cycle ................................................................. 5-302
5.14 Inserting a G code in a ShopTurn program............................................................. 5-304

5 5
5.1 Linear or circular path motions

When you want to perform linear or circular path movements or
machining without defining a complete contour, you can use the
functions "Straight" or "Circle" respectively.
To program simple machining operations, proceed as follows:

• Specify the tool and the spindle speed
• Select the machining plane
• Program the machining
• Program any further machining
The following machining options are available:

• Line
• Circle with known center point
• Circle with known radius
• Line with polar coordinates
• Circle with polar coordinates
If you want to program a line or a circle using polar coordinates, you

must define the pole first.
Caution
If you use a straight or circular path movement to move the tool into
the retraction zone specified in the program header, you must also
move the tool out again. Otherwise a collision could occur as a result
of the traversing movements in a subsequently programmed
ShopTurn cycle.
5.1.1 Selecting the tool and the machining plane
Before you can program a line or circle, you have to select the tool,
spindle, spindle speed and machining plane.
If you program a sequence of different linear or circular path motions,

the settings for the tool, spindle, spindle speed and machining plane
remain active until you change them again.
If you change the selected machining plane subsequently, the coordi-

nates of the programmed path motion are adjusted automatically to
the new machining plane. The originally programmed coordinates
remain unchanged only for a linear motion (right-angled, not polar).

5 5
Ø Press the "Strai. Circle" and "Tool" soft keys.

Tool >
Ø Enter a tool in parameter field "T".
-or-
Tools
Ø Press the "Tools" soft key and select a tool from the tool list.
-and-
-and-
To Ø Press the "To Program" soft key.

Program
The tool is copied into the "T" parameter field.
Ø Select the tool cutting edge number D if the tool has several
cutting edges.
Ø In the left-hand input field of the Spindle parameter, select main

spindle (S1), tool spindle (S2) or counterspindle (S3).
Ø Enter the spindle speed or cutting rate in the right-hand input field.
Ø Choose one of the machining planes (Rotate, End face/End

face C, Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C, End face Y or
Peripheral surface Y).
Ø Enter the cylinder diameter if you selected the machining plane

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C.
-or-
Ø Enter the positioning angle for the CP machining area if you

selected machining plane End face Y.
-or-
Ø Enter reference point C0 if you selected the machining plane

Peripheral surface Y.
Ø Choose whether the spindle should be clamped or released or

whether there should be no change (input field left blank).
The values are saved and the parameterization screen form is closed.
The process plan is displayed and the newly created program block is
marked.

5 5
5.1.2 Straight
When you want to program a straight line in Cartesian coordinates,

you can use the "Straight" function.
The tool moves across a straight line at the programmed feedrate or

at rapid traverse from its current position to the programmed end
position.
Radius compensation Alternatively you can implement the straight line with radius compen-
sation. The radius compensation acts modally, therefore you must de-
activate the radius compensation again when you want to traverse
without radius compensation. Where several straight line blocks with
radius compensation are programmed sequentially, you may select
radius compensation only in the first program block.
For the first straight line with radius compensation, the tool ap-
proaches the starting point without radius compensation and the end
point with radius compensation, i.e. if a vertical path is programmed, a
slope will be traversed. The compensation does not act over the entire
traverse path until the second programmed straight line with radius
compensation. The reverse occurs when radius compensation is
deactivated.
Programmed
Programmed path
path
Travel path Travel path
First straight line with radius First straight line with deactivated radius
compensation compensation
If you want to prevent deviation from the programmed path, you can
program the first straight line with radius compensation or with deacti-
vated radius compensation at a distance from the workpiece. Pro-
gramming without coordinate data is not possible.
Ø Press the "Strai. Circle" and "Straight" soft keys.

Straight >
Rapide Ø Press the "Rapid traverse" soft key if you want to use rapid
traverse
traverse instead of a programmed machining feedrate.

5 5
X Target position in the X direction (abs. or inc.) mm

Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Z Target position in the Z direction (abs. or inc.) mm
Y Target position in the Y direction (abs. or inc.) mm
C1 Target position of C axis of main spindle (abs. or inc.) mm
C3 Target position of C axis of counterspindle (abs. or inc.) mm
Z3 Target position of special axis (abs. or inc.) mm
F Machining feedrate mm/rev
mm/min
mm/tooth
Radius Input defining which side of the contour the tool machines in the programmed
compensation direction:
The previously programmed setting for radius compensation is used
5.1.3 Circle with known center point
To program a circle or arc with a known center point in Cartesian

coordinates, use the "Circle center point" function.
The tool traverses a circular path from its current position to the
programmed target position at the machining feedrate. ShopTurn
calculates the radius of the circle/arc on the basis of the entered
interpolation parameter settings I and K.
Circle cen- Ø Press the "Strai. Circle" and "Circle center point" soft keys.
ter point >
Direction of Direction of rotation in which the tool travels from the circle starting point to the
rotation circle end point:
Direction of rotation clockwise (right)
Direction of rotation counterclockwise (left)

Machining plane End face/End face C:

5 5

I Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the X mm
direction (inc.)
J The plus/minus sign is evaluated. mm
Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the Y
direction (inc.)
The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Machining plane Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C:
J Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the Y mm
direction (inc.)
K The plus/minus sign is evaluated. mm
Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the Z
direction (inc.)
Machining plane End face Y:
I Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the X mm
direction (inc.)
J The plus/minus sign is evaluated. mm
Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the Y
direction (inc.)
Machining plane Peripheral surface Y:
J Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the Y mm
direction (inc.)
K The plus/minus sign is evaluated. mm
Dist. between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the Z direct. (inc.)
Machining plane Rotate:
X Target position ∅ in the X direction (abs.) or target position in the X direction (inc.) mm
I Dist. between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the X direct. (inc.) mm
K Dist. between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the Z direct. (inc.) mm
mm/min
mm/tooth

5 5
5.1.4 Circle with known radius
To program a circle or arc with a known radius in Cartesian

coordinates, use the "Circle radius" function.
The tool traverses a circular arc with the programmed radius from its
current position to the programmed target position at the machining
feedrate. The position of the circle center point is calculated by
ShopTurn.
You can choose to traverse the arc in the clockwise or anticlockwise

direction. Depending on the direction of rotation, there are two options
for approaching the target position from the current position via an arc
of the specified radius. You can select the arc of your choice by
entering a positive or a negative sign for the radius.
Target
+ Arc angles of up to 180°: +

Start Arc angles larger than 180°: –
Arcs with different arc angles
Circle Ø Press the "Strai. Circle" and "Circle radius" soft keys.
radius >
rotation circle end point:


5 5

X Target position ∅ in the X direction (abs.) or target position in the X direction (inc.) mm
R Radius of arc mm
The sign determines the type of arc traversed.
mm/min
mm/tooth

5 5
5.1.5 Polar coordinates
If a workpiece has been dimensioned from a central point (pole) with

radius and angles, you will find it helpful to program these dimensions
as polar coordinates.
Before you program a straight line or circle in polar coordinates, you

must define the pole, i.e. the reference point, of the polar coordinate
system.
Ø Press the "Strai. Circle", "Polar" and "Pole" soft keys.

Polar >
Pole >

X X position of the pole (abs. or inc.) mm
Y Y position of the pole (abs. or inc.) mm
Z Z position of the pole (abs. or inc.) mm
X X position of the pole (abs. or inc.) mm
X X position of the pole ∅ (abs.) or X position of the pole (inc.) mm

5 5
5.1.6 Straight polar
When you want to program a straight line in polar coordinates, you

can use the "Straight polar" function.
A straight line in the polar coordinate system is defined by the length L

and the angle α. The angle is based on another axis depending on the
machining plane. The direction in which a positive angle points also
depends on the machining plane.
Machining plane Turning Face Peripheral
surface
Reference axis for angle Z X Y
Positive angle in direction of the axis X Y Z
The tool traverses a straight line from its current position to the
programmed end point at the machining feedrate or at rapid traverse.
The 1st line in polar coordinates entered after the pole must be pro-
grammed in absolute dimensions. You can program any further lines
or circles with incremental coordinates.
Radius compensation Alternatively you can implement the straight line with radius compen-
sation. The radius compensation acts modally, therefore you must de-
activate the radius compensation again when you want to traverse
without radius compensation. Where several straight line blocks with
radius compensation are programmed sequentially, you may select
radius compensation only in the first program block.
For the first straight line with radius compensation, the tool ap-
proaches the starting point without radius compensation and the end
point with radius compensation, i.e. if a vertical path is programmed, a
slope will be traversed. The compensation does not act over the entire
traverse path until the second programmed straight line with radius
compensation. The reverse occurs when radius compensation is
deactivated.
Programmed
Programmed path
path
Travel path
Travel path
First straight line with radius First straight line with deactivated radius
compensation compensation

5 5
If you want to prevent deviation from the programmed path, you can
program the first straight line with radius compensation or with de-
activated radius compensation at a distance from the workpiece.
Programming without coordinate data is not possible.
Ø Press the "Strai. Circle", "Polar" and "Straight polar" soft keys.
Polar >
Straight
polar >
Rapide Ø Press the "Rapid traverse" soft key if you want to use rapid
traverse
traverse instead of a programmed machining feedrate.
L Distance between the pole and the end point of line mm

α Polar angle (abs. or inc.) Degrees
The sign specifies the direction.
mm/min
mm/tooth
Radius Input defining which side of the contour the tool machines in the programmed
compensation direction:
The previously programmed setting for radius compensation is used

5 5
5.1.7 Circle polar
If you want to program a circle or arc using polar coordinates, you can
use the "Circle polar" function.
A circle in the polar coordinate system is defined by an angle α. The

angle is based on another axis depending on the machining plane.
The direction in which a positive angle points also depends on the
machining plane.
Machining plane Turning Face Peripheral
surface
Reference axis for angle Z X Y
Positive angle in direction of the axis X Y Z
The tool traverses a circular path from its current position to the pro-
grammed end point (angle) at the machining feedrate.
The radius is obtained from the distance between the current tool
position and the defined pole, i.e. the circle start and end point posi-
tions are at the same distance from the pole.
The 1st arc in polar coordinates entered after the pole must be pro-
grammed in absolute dimensions. You can program any further lines
or circles with incremental coordinates.
Ø Press the "Strai. Circle", "Polar" and "Circle polar" soft keys.
Polar >
Circle
polar >
rotation circle end point

α Polar angle (abs. or inc.) Degrees
The sign specifies the direction.
mm/min
mm/tooth

5 5
5.2 Drilling
5.2 Drilling
The functions explained in this section are used when you want to
program various drill holes on the end face or peripheral surface.
You program drilling operations in the order in which they are per-
formed. The following technology cycles can be used:
• Drill centered
• Thread centered
• Centering
• Drilling
• Reaming
• Deep hole drilling
• Thread tapping
• Thread milling
You have to program the positions or position pattern after the

technology cycles.
All program blocks involved in the drilling operation are shown in the
process plan in square brackets.
Example: Drilling
Clamp spindle In eccentric drilling operations you can choose to clamp the spindle in
order to avoid spindle rotation.
You should note that when machining in planes End face/End face C
and Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C, clamping remains acti-
vated only until the drilling operation ends. When machining in planes
End face Y and Peripheral surface Y, on the other hand, clamping is
modal, i.e. it remains activated until the machining plane is changed
or clamping is deselected in the "Straight circle" à "Tool" menu.
The "Clamp spindle" function must be set up by the machine manu-
facturer.

5 5
5.2 Drilling
5.2.1 Drill centered
The "Drill centered" function is used to make a drill hole in the center
of the end face.
You can choose between chip breakage during drilling or retraction

from the workpiece for stock removal.
During machining, either the main spindle or counterspindle rotates.
You can use a drill, rotary drill or milling cutter as the tool.
The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the programmed position,

allowing for the return plane and safety clearance.
Chipbreaking 1. The tool drills at the programmed feedrate F as far as the first
infeed depth.
2. The tool retracts by the retraction value V2 and drills as far as the
next infeed depth that can be reduced by the factor DF.
3. Step 2 is repeated until final drilling depth Z1 has been reached
and dwell time DT has expired.
4. The tool moves back to the safety clearance at rapid traverse.
Stock removal 1. The tool drills at the programmed feedrate F as far as the first
infeed depth.
2. The tool is retracted from the workpiece at rapid traverse to the
safety clearance for stock removal and is then re-inserted at the
1st infeed depth reduced by a clearance distance calculated by the
control system.
3. The tool then drills down to the next infeed depth that can be
reduced by the factor DF and the tool retracts again for stock
removal.
If you want, for example, to drill very deep holes, you can also employ
a rotating tool spindle. First specify the required tool and tool spindle
speed under "Straight/Circle" à "Tool" (see Section "Select tool and
machining plane"). Then program the "Drill centered" function.
Drilling Ø Press the "Drilling" and "Drilling centric" soft keys.

centric >

5 5
5.2 Drilling
Break Solid Ø Press the "Break chips" or "Solid machin." soft key.
chips -or- machin.
T, D, F, S, V See Section "Create program blocks".

Shank The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill shank reaches the value
programmed for Z1. The insertion angle entered in the tool list is applied.
Tip The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill tip reaches the value
programmed for Z1.
Z0 Reference point (abs.) mm
Z1 Insertion depth with reference to Z0 for drill tip or drill shank. (abs. or inc.) mm
D Maximum infeed mm
DF Percentage for each additional infeed %
DF = 100: Amount of infeed remains constant
DF < 100: Amount of infeed is reduced in direction of final drilling depth
Example: DF = 80
Last infeed was 4 mm;
4 x 80% = 3.2; next infeed increment is 3.2 mm
3.2 x 80% = 2.56; next infeed increment is 2.56 mm, etc.
V1 Minimum infeed mm
Parameter V1 is available only if DF<100% has been programmed.
If the amount of infeed is very small a minimum infeed can be programmed with
parameter V1.
V1 < Amount of infeed: Infeed with infeed value
V1 < Amount of infeed: Infeed with the value programmed in V1
V2 Retraction amount (for chipbreaking only) mm
Amount by which the drill is retracted for chipbreaking.
DT Dwell time for release cut s
U
XD Center offset in X direction mm
The center offset can be used for example to produce a drill hole with an exact fit. A
rotary drill (rotary drill type) or U drill (drill type) is required. A "normal" drill is not
suitable.
The maximum center offset is stored in a machine data code.

5 5
5.2 Drilling
5.2.2 Thread centered
The "Thread centered" function is used to tap a right-hand or left-hand

thread in the center of the end face.
During machining, either the main spindle or counterspindle rotates.

You can alter the spindle speed via the spindle override; feedrate
override is not operative.
You can select drilling in one cut, chipbreaking or retraction from the
workpiece for stock removal.

1 cut 1. The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed S or cut rate V as
far as the final drilling depth Z1.
2. The direction of rotation of the spindle reverses and the tool
retracts to the safety clearance at the programmed spindle speed
SR or cut rate VR.
Stock removal 1. The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed S or feedrate V as
far as the first infeed depth (maximum infeed depth D).
2. The tool retracts from the workpiece to the safety clearance at
spindle speed SR or cut rate VR for stock removal.
st
3. The tool is then inserted again as far as the 1 infeed depth at
spindle speed S or feedrate V and drills to the next infeed depth.
4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the programmed final drilling
depth Z1 is reached.
retracts to the safety clearance at spindle speed SR or cut rate VR.
Chipbreaking 1. The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed S or feedrate V as

far as the first infeed depth (maximum infeed depth D).
2. The tool retracts by the retraction amount V2 for chipbreaking.
3. The tool then drills to the next infeed depth at spindle speed S or
feedrate V.
depth Z1 is reached.
retracts to the safety clearance at spindle speed SR or cut rate VR.

5 5
5.2 Drilling
The machine manufacturer may have made specific settings for

centered tapping in a machine data code.
Thread Ø Press the "Drilling" and "Thread centric" soft keys.

centric >
T, D, S, V See Section "Create program blocks".

P Pitch mm/rev
The pitch is determined by the tool used. in/rev
Turns /"
MODUL-
US
1 cut The thread is drilled in one cut without stopping.
Stock removal The drill is retracted from the workpiece for stock removal.
Chipbreaking The drill is retracted by the retraction amount V2 for chipbreaking.
Z1 Tapping depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) mm
D Maximum infeed (for stock removal or chipbreaking only) mm
Amount by which the tap is retracted for chipbreaking.
V2=automatic: The tool is retracted by one revolution.
5.2.3 Drilling and reaming
The "Drilling" and "Reaming" functions are used when you want to
program various drill holes on the end face or peripheral surface.

Centering 1. The tool is inserted into the workpiece at the programmed feedrate
F until it reaches the depth or diameter.
2. On expiry of dwell time DT, the tool is retracted at rapid traverse to
Drilling 1. The tool is inserted into the workpiece at programmed feedrate F

until it reaches the depth X1 or Z1.
2. On expiry of dwell time DT, the tool is retracted at rapid traverse to
Reaming 1. The tool is inserted into the workpiece at programmed feedrate F

until it reaches the depth X1 or Z1.
2. On expiry of dwell time DT, the tool is retracted at the programmed
feedrate to the safety clearance.

5 5
5.2 Drilling
Drilling Ø Press the "Drilling" and "Drilling reaming" soft keys.

reaming >
Centering Drilling
Ø Press the "Centering", "Drilling" or "Reaming" soft key.
-or-
Reaming
-or-

FB Retraction feedrate (for reaming only) mm/min
Position Select from 8 different positions:
• End face/End face C – Front
• End face/End face C – Rear
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer
• End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists)
• End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – inner (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)
Clamp/release spindle
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.
Diameter The tool is inserted into the workpiece until the diameter of the tool reaches the
workpiece surface. The angle of the center drill specified in the tool list is taken into
account (only for centering).
Shank The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill shank reaches the programmed
depth 1. The angle specified in the tool list is taken into account (only for drilling).
Tip The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill tip reaches programmed depth 1
(only for centering and drilling).
∅ Diameter of centering (only for centering – diameter) mm
Z1 Insertion depth for the drill tip or the drill shank with reference to Z0 mm
(abs. or inc.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y)
X1 Insertion depth for the drill tip or the drill shank with reference to Z0 mm
(abs. or inc.) – (only for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral
surface Y)
DT Dwell time before retraction to release from cut s
U

5 5
5.2 Drilling
5.2.4 Deep hole drilling
The "Deep hole drilling" function is used when you want to drill deep
holes with several infeed steps on the end face or peripheral surface.
You can choose between chip breakage during drilling or retraction

from the workpiece for stock removal.

Chipbreaking 1. The tool drills at the programmed feedrate F as far as the first
infeed depth.
2. The tool is retracted by V2 for chipbreaking and drills up to the next
infeed depth.
Stock removal 1. The tool drills at the programmed feedrate F as far as the first
infeed depth.
2. The tool is retracted from the workpiece at rapid traverse to the
safety clearance for stock removal and is then re-inserted as far as
the 1st infeed depth, reduced by a clearance distance V3.
3. Drilling is then resumed up to the next infeed depth and the tool is
then retracted again.
4. Step 3 is repeated until the programmed drilling depth Z1 has been
reached and dwell time DT has expired.
Deep hole Ø Press the "Drilling" and "Deep hole drilling" soft keys.
drilling >

5 5
5.2 Drilling

Shank The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill shank reaches the programmed
depth 1.
The insertion angle entered in the tool list is applied.
Tip The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill tip reaches the programmed
depth 1.
Z1 Insertion depth for drill tip or drill shank with reference to Z0. mm
(abs. or inc.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y)
X1 Insertion depth for drill tip or drill shank with reference to X0. mm
(abs. or inc.) – (only for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral
surface Y)
D Maximum infeed mm
DF Percentage for each additional infeed %
DF = 100: Amount of infeed remains constant
DF < 100: Amount of infeed is reduced in direction of final drilling depth
Example: DF = 80
Last infeed was 4 mm;
4 x 80% = 3.2; next infeed increment is 3.2 mm
3.2 x 80% = 2.56; next infeed increment is 2.56 mm, etc.
V1 Minimum infeed mm
Parameter V1 is available only if DF<100% has been programmed.
If the amount of infeed is very small a minimum infeed can be programmed with
parameter V1.
V1 < Amount of infeed: Infeed with infeed value
V1 < Amount of infeed: Infeed with the value programmed in V1
V2=0: The tool is not retracted but is left in place for one revolution.
V3 Clearance distance (stock removal only) mm
Distance to the last infeed depth to which the drill is inserted at rapid traverse after
stock removal.
Automatic: The clearance distance is calculated by ShopTurn.
DT Dwell time for release cut s
U

5 5
5.2 Drilling
5.2.5 Tapping
The "Tapping" function is used when you want to tap an internal

thread on the end face or peripheral surface.
The spindle speed can be changed with the spindle override during
tapping. The feed override is inoperative during this process.
You can select drilling in one cut, chipbreaking or retraction from the
workpiece for stock removal.

With the spindle stationary, the tool moves at rapid traverse to the
return plane and then to the safety clearance.
Here the spindle begins to rotate and the spindle speed and feedrate
are synchronized.
The tool continues to move at rapid traverse towards the programmed
position.
1 cut 1. The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed S or cut rate V as
far as the tapping depth X1 or Z1.
retracts to the safety clearance at the programmed spindle speed
SR or cut rate VR.
Stock removal 1. The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed S or feedrate V
as far as the first infeed depth (maximum infeed depth D).
2. The tool retracts from the workpiece to the safety clearance at
spindle speed SR or cut rate VR for stock removal.
st
3. Then the tool is inserted again as far as the 1 infeed depth
at spindle speed S or feedrate V and drills to the next infeed
depth.
depth X1 or Z1 is reached.
retracts to the safety clearance at spindle speed SR or cut
rate VR.
Chipbreaking 1. The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed S or feedrate V

as far as the first infeed depth (maximum infeed depth D).
2. The tool retracts by the retraction amount V2 for chipbreaking.
3. The tool then drills to the next infeed depth at spindle speed S or
feedrate V.
depth X1 or Z1 is reached.

5 5
5.2 Drilling
5. The direction of rotation of the spindle reverses and the tool re-
tracts to the safety clearance at spindle speed SR or cut rate VR.
The machine manufacturer may have made specific settings for

tapping in a machine data code.
Ø Press the "Drilling", "Thread" and "Tapping" soft keys.

Thread >
Tapping

P Pitch mm/rev
The pitch is determined by the tool used. in/rev
MODULUS: Used with endless screws, for example, which extend into a gear Turns/"
wheel. MODUL-
US
Turns/": Used with pipe threads, for example.
Where values are entered in turns/", enter the whole number before the decimal
point in the first parameter field and the figures after the decimal point as a fraction
in the second and third field.
For example, 13.5 turns/" is entered as follows:
1 cut The thread is drilled in one cut without stopping.
Z1 Tapping depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) – (only for End face/End face C mm
and End face Y)
X1 Tapping depth with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) – (only for Peripheral surface/ mm
Peripheral surface C and Peripheral surface Y)
D Maximum infeed (for stock removal or chipbreaking only) mm
V2=automatic: The tool is retracted by one revolution.

5 5
5.2 Drilling
5.2.6 Thread milling
The "Thread milling" function is used when you want to mill an internal
or external thread on the end face.
You can mill a right-hand thread or a left-hand thread.
Internal thread 1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the thread center point on
the return plane, and then to the safety clearance.
2. The tool describes an approach circle calculated by the control and
then approaches the thread diameter at the programmed feedrate
along a helical path.
3. The thread is cut along a helical path in clockwise or counterclock-
wise direction (depending on whether it is a left-hand or right-hand
thread).
4. The tool is retracted from the workpiece along a helical path at the
programmed feedrate.
Please note that when milling an internal thread the tool must not
exceed the following value:
Milling cutter diameter < (nominal thread diameter ∅ – 2 x thread
depth K)
External thread 1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the starting point on the
return plane, and then to the safety clearance.
2. The tool describes an approach circle calculated by the control and
then approaches the thread diameter at the programmed feedrate
along a helical path.
3. The thread is cut along a helical path in clockwise or counterclock-
wise direction (depending on whether it is a left-hand or right-hand
thread).
4. The tool is retracted from the thread along a helical path at the
programmed feedrate.
Ø Press the "Drilling", "Thread" and "Cut thread" soft keys.

Thread >
Cut
thread

5 5
5.2 Drilling

Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y only)
Machining Roughing
type Finishing
Direction Depending on the rotational direction of the spindle, a change in direction also
changes the machining direction (climb/conventional).
Z0 to Z1: Machining starts at workpiece surface Z0
(only for End face/End face C and End face Y)
Z1 to Z0: Machining starts at the thread depth
(only for End face/End face C and End face Y)
X0 to X1: Machining starts at workpiece surface X0
(only for Peripheral surface Y)
X1 to X0: Machining starts at the thread depth (only for Peripheral surface Y)
Internal thread Internal thread
External thread External thread
Left-hand thread Left-hand thread
Right-hand Right-hand thread
thread
NT Number of teeth in a milling insert.
Single of multiple toothed milling inserts can be used. The motions required are
executed by the cycle internally, so that the tip of the bottom tooth on the milling
insert corresponds to the programmed end position when the thread end position
is reached. Depending on the cutting edge geometry of the milling insert, the
retraction path must be taken into account at the base of the workpiece.
Z1 Thread length (abs. or inc.) – (only for End face/End face C and End face Y) mm
X1 Thread length (abs. or inc.) – (only for Peripheral surface Y) mm
∅ Nominal thread diameter, example: nominal thread diameter of M12=12mm mm
P Pitch mm/rev
If the cutter has several teeth, the thread pitch is determined by the tool. in/rev
Turns/"
MODUL-
US
K Thread depth mm
DXY Infeed per cut (for roughing only) – (only for End face/End face C and End face Y) mm
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) %
DYZ Infeed per cut (for roughing only) – (only for Peripheral surface Y) mm
U Final machining allowance (for roughing only) mm
α0 Start angle Degrees

5 5
5.2 Drilling
5.2.7 Positioning and position patterns
The drilling positions must be programmed after you have pro-

grammed the drilling technologies (centering, tapping, etc.).
The following position patterns are available:

• Freely programmable positions
• Line
• Matrix
• Full circle
• Pitch circle
You can program any number of position patterns in sequence. These

will be traversed in the order in which you entered them.
1. The first tool in the program (e.g. centering tool) initially traverses
all programmed positions.
2. All programmed positions are then machined with the second
programmed tool.
3. This procedure is repeated until each programmed technology has
been executed at all programmed positions.
Within a position pattern or on approach from one position pattern to

the next, the tool is retracted to the safety clearance, and the new
position or position pattern is then approached at rapid traverse.

5 5
5.2 Drilling
5.2.8 Freely programmable positions
You can use the "Freely programmable positions" function to program

any number of positions on the peripheral surface or end face.
ShopTurn approaches the individual positions in the order in which

you enter them.
In a program block, you can specify up to 8 positions. To program
other freely programmable positions, you must call the "Freely
programmable positions" function again.
Ø Press the "Drilling", "Positions" and "Freely Programmable

Positions >
Positions" soft keys.
Delete Ø Press the "Delete all" soft key if you want to delete all the
all
programmed positions.

Cartesian/ Dimensioning in Cartesian coordinates or polar coordinates mm
polar (only for End face/End face C and End face Y)
Cartesian/ Dimensioning in Cartesian coordinates or cylinder coordinates mm
cylindrical (only for Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C)
End face/End face C and End face Y - Cartesian:
Z0 Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) mm
CP Positioning angle for machining area (only for End face Y) Degrees
X0 X coordinate for first position (abs.) mm
Y0 Y coordinate for first position (abs.) mm
X1 ... X7 X coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) mm

Y1 ... Y7 Y coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) mm

5 5
5.2 Drilling
End face/End face C and End face Y - Polar:

CP Positioning angle for machining area (only for End face Y) Degrees
C0 C coordinate for first position (abs.) Degrees
L0 1st position of hole with reference to Y axis (abs.) mm
C1 ... C7 C coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) Degrees

L1 ... L7 Distance to position (abs. or inc.) mm
Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C - Cartesian:
X0 Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) mm
Z0 Z coordinate for first position (abs.) mm
Y1 ...Y7 Y coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) mm

Z1 ... Z7 Z coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) mm
Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C - Cylindrical
C0 C coordinate for first position (abs.) Degrees
Z0 1st position of hole with reference to Z axis (abs.) mm
C1 ...C7 C coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) Degrees

Z1 ... Z7 Further positions in the Z axis (abs. or inc.) mm
Peripheral surface Y:
X0 Reference point in X direction (abs.) mm
C0 Reference point Degrees
Z0 Z coordinate for first position (abs.) mm
Y1 ...Y7 Y coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) mm

Z1 ... Z7 Z coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) mm

5 5
5.2 Drilling
5.2.9 Line position pattern
The "Line position pattern" function is used to program any number of

positions that lie equidistant on a line.
Ø Press the "Drilling", "Positions" and "Line/Matrix" soft keys.

Positions >
Ø Select the "Line" setting in the input field for the "Line/Matrix"
parameter.

End face/End face C:
X0 X coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) mm
Y0 Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) mm
α0 Angle of rotation of line in relation to the X axis Degrees
Positive angle: Line is rotated in CCW direction.
Negative angle: Line is rotated in CW direction.
Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C:
Z0 Z coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) mm
α0 Angle of rotation of line with reference to Y axis Degrees
End face Y:
CP Positioning angle for machining area Degrees
α0 Angle of rotation of line in relation to the X axis Degrees

5 5
5.2 Drilling
X0 X coordinate of the reference point (abs.) mm
α0 Angle of rotation of line with reference to Y axis. Degrees
L Position spacing mm
N Number of positions
5.2.10 Matrix position pattern
The "Matrix position pattern" function is used to program any number

of positions that lie equidistant on several parallel straight lines.
Ø Press the "Drilling", "Positions" and "Line/Matrix" soft keys.

Positions >
Ø Select the "Matrix" setting in the input field for the "Line/Matrix"
parameter.

α0 Angle of rotation of matrix in relation to X axis Degrees
Positive angle: Matrix is rotated in CCW direction.
Negative angle: Matrix is rotated in CW direction.
L1 Column spacing in X direction mm
L2 Line spacing in Y direction mm
N1 Number of columns in X direction
N2 Number of lines in Y direction

5 5
5.2 Drilling

α0 Angle of rotation of matrix with reference to Y axis Degrees
L1 Column spacing in Y direction mm
L2 Line spacing in Z direction mm
N1 Number of columns in Y direction
N2 Number of lines in Z direction
End face Y:
α0 Angle of rotation of matrix in relation to X axis Degrees
L1 Column spacing in X direction mm
L2 Line spacing in Y direction mm
N1 Number of columns in X direction
N2 Number of lines in Y direction
α0 Angle of rotation of matrix with reference to Y axis Degrees
L1 Column spacing in Y direction mm
L2 Line spacing in Z direction mm
N1 Number of columns in Y direction
N2 Number of lines in Z direction

5 5
5.2 Drilling
5.2.11 Full circle position pattern
The "Full circle position pattern" function is used to program any

number of positions that lie on a circle with a defined radius.
ShopTurn calculates the distance (angle) between the individual

positions from the number of positions. This distance is always the
same.
You can choose whether the tool should approach the next position
on a straight line or circular path. The rapid traverse feedrate for
positioning on a circular path is defined in a machine date code.
If you approach the next position in a straight line in a circumferential
groove, a collision may result.
Approach next position Approach next position

on a straight line in a circle
Approach positions on a linear or circular path
Ø Press the "Drilling", "Positions" and "Full/Pitch Circle" soft keys.

Positions >
Ø Select the "Full circle" setting in the input field for the "Full circle/
Pitch circle" parameter.

5 5
5.2 Drilling

• Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists)
Centered Position full circle centered on the end face
Off-center Position full circle off-center on the end face
X0 X coordinate of the reference point (abs.) – (only for off-center) mm
Y0 Y coordinate of the reference point (abs.) – (only for off-center) mm
α0 Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to X axis. Degrees
Positive angle: Full circle is rotated in CCW direction.
Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction.
R Radius of full circle mm
α0 Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to Y axis. Degrees
End face Y:
X0 X coordinate of reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to C0) mm
Y0 Y coordinate of reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to L0) mm
C0 Reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to X0) mm
L0 Reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to Y0) mm
Positioning Linear: Next position is approached linearly at rapid traverse.
Circular: Next position is approached along a circular path at the feedrate defined in
a machine data code.
Y0 Y coordinate of the reference point (abs.) mm

5 5
5.2 Drilling

Linear: Next position is approached linearly at rapid traverse.
Circular: Next position is approached along a circular path at the feedrat defined in
N Number of positions on full circle
5.2.12 Pitch circle position pattern
The "Pitch circle position pattern" function is used to program any

number of positions that lie on a pitch circle with a defined radius.
You can specify whether the tool should approach the next position
along a straight line or circular path (for detailed description, see
Section "Full circle position pattern").
Ø Press the "Drilling", "Positions" and "Full/Pitch Circle" soft keys.

Positions >
Ø Select the "Pitch circle" setting in the input field for the "Full circle/
Pitch circle" parameter.

Z0 Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.)
X0 X coordinate of the reference point (abs.) – (only for off-center)
Y0 Y coordinate of the reference point (abs.) – (only for off-center)
α0 Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to X axis.
R Radius


5 5
5.2 Drilling

End face Y:
Centered Position full circle centered on the end face.
Off-center Position full circle off-center on the end face.

X0 X coordinate of reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to C0) mm
Y0 Y coordinate of reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to L0) mm
C0 Reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to X0) mm
L0 Reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to Y0) mm
R Radius mm
Y0 Y coordinate of the reference point (abs.) mm
R Radius mm
Circular: Next position is approached along a circular path at the feedrate
defined in a machine data code.
α1 Advance angle; after the first hole has been drilled, all further positions are Degrees
approached at this angle.
Positive angle: Further positions are rotated in counterclockwise direction.
Negative angle: Further positions are rotated in clockwise direction.
N Number of positions on pitch circle

5 5
5.2 Drilling
5.2.13 Repeat positions
If you want to approach positions that you have already programmed

again, you can do this quickly with the function "Repeat position".
ShopTurn automatically allocates a number for each position pattern

and displays it next to the block number in the process plan.
Position pattern 001
Repeat position
pattern 001
Repeat position pattern
Repeat Ø Press the "Drilling", and "Repeat position" soft keys.

position >
Ø Enter the number of the position pattern that you want to repeat.

5 5
5.3 Turning
5.3 Turning
If your turning machine has a Y axis and if you want to work with a
position Y ≠ 0, proceed as follows:
1. Select the "Turning" machining level from the "Straight/Circle"
function group (see Section "Selecting the tool and the machining
plane").
2. Program a straight line to the required Y position using the
"Straight/Circle" function group (see Section "Straight").
3. Program the turning function.
The Y position is retained until you deactivate the "Turning" machining

plane.
5.3.1 Stock removal cycles
The stock removal cycles are used to remove stock from corners at
external and internal contours in the longitudinal or transverse direction.
You can select the machining mode (roughing, finishing).
Roughing In roughing applications, paraxial cuts are machined to the programmed

finishing allowance. If no final machining allowance is programmed, the
workpiece is roughed down to the final contour.
During roughing, ShopTurn reduces the programmed infeed depth D if

necessary to make cuts of an equal size. For example, if the overall
infeed depth is 10 and you have specified an infeed depth of 3, this
would result in cuts of 3, 3, 3 and 1. ShopTurn would reduce the infeed
depth to 2.5 to create 4 cuts of equal size.
Whether the tool rounds the contour at the end of each cut by the infeed
depth D, to remove residual corners, or is raised immediately, depends
on the angle between the contour and the tool cutting edge.
The angle above which rounding is performed is stored in a machine
data code.
If the tool does not round the corner at the end of the cut, it is raised by
the safety distance or a value specified in machine data at rapid
traverse. ShopTurn always observes the lower value, since otherwise
stock removal at inside contours, for example, could cause the contour
to be damaged.

5 5
5.3 Turning
Finishing Finishing is performed in the same direction as roughing.

ShopTurn automatically selects and deselects tool radius compensation
during finishing.
Longitudinal stock removal from external Paraxial roughing

contour
Approach/retraction 1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse first to the return plane and then
to the safety clearance.
2. The tool moves to the first infeed depth at rapid traverse.
3. The first cut is made at machining feedrate.
4. The tool rounds the contour at machining feedrate or is raised at
rapid traverse (see "Roughing").
5. The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the starting point for the next
infeed depth.
6. The next cut is made at machining feedrate.
7. Steps 4 to 6 are repeated until the final depth is reached.
Stock Ø Press the "Turning" and "Stock Removal" soft keys.

Removal >
Ø Select one of the three stock removal cycles with the soft key:
Simple stock removal cycle straight line
-or-
Stock removal cycle straight line with radii or chamfers
-or-
Stock removal cycle with oblique lines, radii or chamfers

5 5
5.3 Turning

Machining Roughing
type Finishing
Position Roughing position:
Direction Roughing direction (flat or lengthwise) in the coordinate system:

parallel to Z axis (longitudinal) parallel to X axis (plane)
Outside Inside Outside Inside
X X X X
Z Z Z Z
X X X X
Z Z Z Z
X0 Reference point ∅ (abs.) mm

X1 End point ∅ (abs.) or end point (inc.) mm
Z1 End point (abs. or inc.) mm
D Infeed depth (inc.) – (for roughing only) mm
UX Final machining allowance in X direction (inc.) – (for roughing only) mm
UZ Final machining allowance in Z direction (inc.) – (for roughing only) mm
FSn Chamfer (n=1 to 3) alternative to Rn mm
Rn Radius (n=1 to 3) alternative to FSn mm
Xm-Zm-α1-α2 Select which of the parameters Xm, Zm, α1 and α2 should be displayed – (only for
stock removal cycle with oblique lines, radii and chamfers)
Xm Intermediate point ∅ (abs.) or intermediate point (inc.) mm
Zm Intermediate point (abs. or inc.) mm
α1 Angle of first path (only for stock removal cycle with oblique lines, radii and Degrees
chamfers)
α2 Angle of second path (only for stock removal cycle with oblique lines, radii and Degrees
chamfers)

5 5
5.3 Turning
5.3.2 Recessing cycles
Recessing cycles are used when you want to machine symmetrical

and asymmetrical grooves on any straight contour element.
Inclined recess
You can machine outside and inside recesses in the longitudinal or

transverse directions.
Use the Recess width and Recess depth parameters to determine the
shape of the recess. If a recess is wider than the active tool, it is
machined in several cuts. The tool is moved by (a maximum of) 80%
of the tool width for each recess.
You can specify a final machining allowance for the recess base and
the flanks; the part is then roughed down to this allowance.
The hold time between recessing and retraction is stored in a machine
data code.
Approach/retraction Roughing (infeed depth D > 0)

Safety clearance
(1) D
(2)
(7) (5) (6) (8) D D + safety clearance
(3)
(4) D D + safety clearance
Machining steps in recessing
1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse first to the return plane and
then to the safety clearance.
2. The tool cuts a recess in the center of infeed depth D (1).
3. The tool moves back by D + safety clearance at rapid traverse.
4. The tool cuts a recess next to the first recess of infeed depth
2D (2).

5 5
5.3 Turning
5. The tool moves back by D + safety clearance at rapid traverse.

6. The tool cuts alternately in the first and second recess by the
infeed depth 2D until the final depth T1 is reached (3) and (4).
Between the individual recess cuts the tool moves back by D +
safety clearance at rapid traverse. After the last recess cut, the tool
is retracted at rapid traverse to the safety clearance.
7. All further recess cuts are made alternately directly down to the
final depth T1 (5) to (8). Between the individual recess cuts the tool
moves back to the safety clearance at rapid traverse.
Finishing
1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse first to the return plane and
2. The tool moves at machining feedrate down one flank and along
the bottom to the center.
4. The tool moves at machining feedrate down the other flank and
along the bottom to the center.
Ø Press the "Turning" and "Recess" soft keys.

Recess >
Ø Select one of the three recess cycles with the soft key:
Simple recessing cycle
-or-
Recessing cycle with oblique lines, radii or chamfers
-or-
Recessing on an incline with oblique lines, radii or chamfers

5 5
5.3 Turning

Machining Roughing
type Finishing
+ Complete machining
Position Groove position:
Reference Reference point:

point

B1 Recess width, bottom (inc.) mm
B2 Recess width, top (inc.) alternative to B1 – (only for recess with oblique lines and mm
radii)
T1 Recess depth at reference point (abs. or inc.) mm
T2 Recess depth opposite reference point (abs. or inc.) alternative to T1 – mm
(only for inclined recess with oblique lines, radii and chamfers)
α0 Angle of the incline on which the recess should be machined – (only for inclined Degrees
recess with oblique lines, radii and chamfers)
The angles can be between –180 and +180°
Longitudinal recess: α0 = 0° Þ Parallel to Z axis
Face recess: α0 = 0° Þ Parallel to X axis
A positive angle indicates rotation from the X axis to the Z axis.
α1, α2 Flank angle (not for simple recess cycle) Degrees
Asymmetrical recesses can be described by separate flank angles. The angles can
be between 0 and < 90°.
FS Chamfer (n = 1 ... 4) alternative to R (not for simple recess cycle) mm
R Radius (n = 1 ... 4) alternative to FS (not for simple recess cycle) mm
D Infeed depth for 1st cut (inc.) – (for roughing only) mm
D = 0: 1st cut is made directly to final depth T1
D>0: The 1st and 2nd cuts are made alternately to infeed depth D
for improved chip clearance and avoidance of tool breakage.
1 2 D
5 D T1
3
4
All further cuts are made directly to final depth T1.

The lateral infeed for the alternate cuts is determined automatically in the cycle.
Alternate cutting is not possible if the tool can only reach the recess base at one
position.
U Final machining allowance (inc.) – (for roughing only) mm
N Number of recesses (N=1....65535)
P Distance between recesses (inc.) mm
P is not displayed when N=1.

5 5
5.3 Turning
5.3.3 Undercut form E and F
The "Undercut form E" and "Undercut form F" are used when you
want to turn undercuts to DIN509 in form E or form F.
Approach/retraction 1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse first to the return plane and
2. The undercut is made in one cut at machining feedrate, starting
from the flank through to the cross-feed V.
3. The tool moves back to the return plane at rapid traverse.
Undercut form E Undercut form F
Ø Press the "Turning" and "Undercut" soft keys.

Undercut >
Undercut Undercut Ø Press the "Undercut form E" or "Undercut form F" soft key.
form E -or- form F

5 5
5.3 Turning

Position Position of undercut form E:
Position of undercut form F:
Undercut size Undercut size according to DIN table:

Radius/depth, e.g.: E1.0x0.4 (undercut form E) or
F0.6x0.3 (undercut form F)
X0 Reference point for dimensioning ∅ (abs.) mm
Z0 Reference point for dimensioning (abs.) mm
X1 Allowance in X direction ∅ (abs.) or allowance in X direction (inc.) mm
Z1 Allowance in Z direction (abs. or inc.) – (for undercut form F only) mm
V Cross-feed X ∅ (abs.) or cross-feed X (inc.) mm
5.3.4 Thread undercuts
The "Thread undercut DIN" or "Thread undercut" functions are used

when you want to program thread undercuts to DIN76 for workpieces
with metric ISO threads or freely-definable thread undercuts.
2. The first cut is made at machining feedrate starting from the flank
along the shape of the thread undercut as far as the safety
clearance.
3. The tool moves to the next starting position at rapid traverse.
4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the thread undercut is finished.
During finishing the tool travels as far as cross-feed V.
Thread undercut

5 5
5.3 Turning
Ø Press the "Turning" and "Undercut" soft keys.

Undercut >
Undercut Undercut Ø Press the "Undercut thread DIN" or "Undercut thread" soft key.
thread DIN -or- thread

Machining Roughing
type Finishing
Position Position of thread undercut
P Select the pitch from the preset DIN table or enter – (for "Thread undercut DIN" only) mm/rev
X1 Allowance in X direction ∅ (abs.) or mm
Allowance in X direction (inc.) – (for "Thread undercut" only)
Z1 Allowance in Z direction (abs. or inc.) – (for "Thread undercut" only) mm
R1,R2 Radius1, Radius2 (inc.) – (for "Thread undercut" only) mm
α Plunge angle Degrees
V Cross-feed X ∅ (abs.) or cross-feed X (inc.) mm
D Infeed (inc.) – (for roughing only) mm

5 5
5.3 Turning
5.3.5 Thread cutting
The "Longitudinal thread", "Conical thread" and "Face thread"

functions are used when you want to cut external or internal threads
with constant or variable pitch.
The thread can be single or multiple.

You define a right or left-hand thread by the direction of spindle
rotation and the feed direction.
The infeed is performed automatically with constant infeed depth or

constant cutting cross-section.
• With constant infeed depth, the cutting cross-section increases

from cut to cut. The final machining allowance is machined in one
cut after roughing.
A constant infeed depth can produce better cutting conditions at
small thread depths.
• With constant cutting cross-section, the cutting pressure remains

constant over all roughing cuts and the infeed depth is reduced.
For metric threads (thread pitch P in mm/rev) ShopTurn assigns a

value calculated from the thread pitch to the thread depth K
parameter. You can change this value.
The default selection must be activated via a machine data code.
Approach/retraction 1. The tool moves to the return plane at rapid traverse.

2. Thread with advance:
The tool moves at rapid traverse to the first starting position
displaced by the thread advance W.
Thread with run-in:
The tool moves at rapid traverse to the first starting position
displaced by the thread run-in W2.
3. The first cut is made with thread pitch P as far as the thread run-
out R.
4. Thread with advance:
The tool moves at rapid traverse to the return distance V and then
to the next starting position.
Thread with run-in:
The tool moves at rapid traverse to the return distance V and then
back to the starting position.
5. Steps 3 and 4 are repeated until the thread is finished.

5 5
5.3 Turning
Thread longitudinal
The cycle requires a speed-controlled spindle with a position

measuring system.
Ø Press the "Turning" and "Thread" soft keys.

Thread >
Thread Thread Ø Press the "Thread long.", "Thread cone" or "Thread face" soft key.
long. -or- cone
Thread
-or- face

P Pitch mm/rev
in/rev
Turns/"
MODULE
G Pitch change – only for P= mm/rev or inch/rev
G = 0 The thread pitch P does not change.
G > 0 The thread pitch P increases by the value G per revolution.
G < 0 The thread pitch P decreases by the value G per revolution.
If the start and end pitch of the thread are known, the pitch change to be
programmed can be calculated as follows:
2 2
|Pe – P |
2
G =  [mm/rev ]
2*Z1
Key:
Pe End pitch of thread [mm/rev]
P Start pitch of thread [mm/rev]
Z1 Thread length [mm]
A larger pitch results in a larger distance between the threads on the workpieces.
Linear: Infeed with constant cutting depth (for roughing only)
Degressive: Infeed with constant cutting cross-section (for roughing only)
Machining Roughing
type Finishing

5 5
5.3 Turning
Internal Internal thread

thread External thread
External
thread
X0 Reference point for dimensioning ∅ (abs.) mm
Z0 Reference point for dimensioning (abs.) mm
X1/Xα Thread incline ∅ (abs. or inc.) – (for conical thread only) mm/degrees
X1 Thread length ∅ (abs.) or thread length (inc.) – (for face thread only) mm
Z1 Thread length (abs. or inc.) – (only for longitudinal and conical threads) mm
W Thread advance (inc.) mm
The starting point for the thread is the reference point (X0, Z0) displaced by the
thread advance distance W. The thread advance can be used if you wish to begin
the individual cuts slightly earlier in order to produce a precise start of thread too.
W2 Thread run-in (inc.) mm
The thread run-in can be used if you cannot approach the thread from the side but
have to insert the tool into the material (e.g. lubrication groove on a shaft).
W2=R Thread run-in = thread run-out (inc.) mm
R Thread run-out (inc.) mm
The thread run-out can be used if you wish to retract the tool obliquely at the end
of the thread (e.g. lubrication groove on a shaft).
K Thread depth (inc.) mm
If the value is calculated by ShopTurn, the field is displayed with a gray
background. The value can still be changed, however, in which case the field is
displayed with a white background again.
The programmed final machining allowance U is subtracted from the preset thread
depth K and the remainder is segmented into a number of roughing cuts. The
cycle automatically calculates the individual current infeed depths as a function of
the specified cut segmentation.
α Infeed slope as angle – alternative to infeed slope as flank Degrees
α > 0: Infeed along the rear flank
α < 0: Infeed along the front flank
α = 0: Infeed at right angles to cutting direction
If you wish to infeed along the flanks, the absolute value for this parameter must
not exceed half the flank angle of the tool.
I Infeed slope as flank (inc.) – alternative to infeed slope as angle mm
I > 0: Infeed along the rear flank
I < 0: Infeed along the front flank
Infeed along the flank
Infeed with alternate flanks (alternative)

Instead of infeeding along one flank, you can also infeed along alternate flanks to
avoid always loading the same tool cutting edge and increase the tool life.
α > 0: Start at rear flank
α < 0: Start at front flank
AS Number of roughing cuts or first infeed (for roughing only) mm
The respective value is displayed when you switch between the number of
roughing cuts and the first infeed.

5 5
5.3 Turning

NN Number of noncuts (finishing only)
To improve the surface finish the tool moves along the thread depth K a further
NN times.
V Return distance (inc.) mm
Q Starting angle offset for single-start threads, i.e. angle that determines the initial Degrees
cut of the start of thread on the circumference of the turned part (–360°<Q<360°).
e.g. Q = 30.0
The initial cut of the thread is at 30°.
Multiple thread The sequence of motions for single and multiple threads is funda-
mentally the same.
Ø Place the cursor on parameter field "Q".
Ø Press the "Alternat." soft key.
Instead of parameter "Q", the parameters for a multiple thread are

displayed.
L Number of threads (max. 6)

The threads are distributed evenly across the periphery of the turned part; the first
thread is always placed at 0°.
If a multiple thread is to be machined with the first thread not starting at 0°, a cycle
must be programmed for each thread and the appropriate starting angle offset must
be entered for Q.
A Thread changeover depth (inc.) mm
First machine all threads in sequence to thread change depth A, then machine all
threads in sequence to depth 2A, etc., until the final depth is reached.
A=0: Thread changeover depth is not taken into account, i.e. finish machining each
thread before starting the next thread.
N 1 of L threads
N ≠ 0: only machine thread N
N = 0: machine all threads
P Starting thread P = 1 … L only if N=0
If P > 1, the previous threads are not taken into account.

5 5
5.3 Turning
5.3.6 Thread re-machining
The "Thread re-machining" function is used if you want to machine a

thread again, e.g. if the tool cutting tip breaks while the thread is being
cut.
ShopTurn takes into account the angular offset of a thread that occurs
due to reclamping the workpiece.
Ø Switch the spindle off.

Jog
Ø Thread the thread cutting tool into the thread groove.
Ø Press the "Turning" and "Thread" soft keys.

Thread >
Sync. Ø Press the "Sync. Point" soft key when the thread cutting tool is
Point
exactly in the thread groove.
Ø Enter the value 0 in parameter field "Q" (starting angle offset).
Ø Move the thread cutting tool back until the reference point
(X0, Z0) can be reached without a collision.

the program").
Ø Place the cursor on the thread cutting program block.
Start
Ø Press the "Block search" and "Start search run" soft keys.
search run
Cycle Start

Cycle Start
The new start position is approached and re-machining of the thread
starts. The angular offset is taken into account.

5 5
5.3 Turning
5.3.7 Parting
The "Parting" function is used when you want to cut off dynamically
balanced parts (e.g. screws, bolts or barrels).
You can program a chamfer or rounding on the edge of the machined

part.
You can machine at a constant cutting rate V or speed of rotation S
up to a depth X1, from which point the workpiece is machined at a
constant speed. From the depth X1, you can also program a reduced
feedrate FR or a reduced speed of rotation SR in order to adapt the
velocity to the smaller diameter.
Use parameter X2 to enter the final depth that you wish to reach with
parting. With barrels, for example, you do not need to part right to the
center; it is sufficient to part to slightly more than the wall thickness of
the barrel.
2. The chamfer or radius, if applicable, is made at machining
feedrate.
3. Parting down to depth X1 is performed at machining feedrate.
4. Parting is continued down to depth X2 at reduced feedrate FR and
reduced speed SR.
If your turning machine is appropriately set up, you can extend a

drawer to accept the cut-off workpiece. Extension of the workpiece
drawer must be enabled in a machine data code.
Ø Press the "Turning" and "Part" soft keys.

Part >

5 5
5.3 Turning

SV Speed limit for constant cutting rate (with V only) rpm
FS Chamfer alternative to R mm
R Radius alternative to FS mm
X1 Depth for feedrate reduction ∅ (abs.) or depth for feedrate reduction (inc.) mm
FR Reduced feedrate mm/rev
SR Reduced speed of rotation rpm
Part drawer Yes: Extend workpiece drawer.
No: Do not extend workpiece drawer.
XM Depth to which the drawer must be extended (abs.) mm
X2 Final depth ∅ (abs.) or final depth (inc.) mm

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
5.4 Contour turning

The "Contour turning" function is used when you want to create and
cut complex contours. A contour comprises separate contour
elements, whereby at least two and up to 250 elements result in a
defined contour. You can also program chamfers, radii, undercuts or
tangential transitions between the contour elements.
The integrated contour calculator calculates the intersection points of

the individual contour elements taking into account the geometrical
relationships, which allows you to enter incompletely dimensioned
elements.
When you machine the contour, you can make allowance for a blank
contour which must be entered before the finished part contour. You
then choose one of the following machining technologies:
• Stock removal
• Grooving
• Plunge-turning
You can rough, remove residual material and finish for each of the
three technologies above.
For example, the programming procedure for stock removal is as

follows:
1. Enter unmachined-part contour

If you want to base cutting of the contour on a contour of an
unmachined part (instead of a cylinder or allowance), you have to
define the contour of the unmachined part before you define the
finished-part contour. You build up the unmachined-part contour
gradually from a series of different contour elements.
2. Enter finished-part contour
You build up the finished-part contour gradually from a series of
different contour elements.
3. Stock removal towards the contour (roughing)
The contour is machined in the longitudinal or transverse directions
or parallel to the contour.
4. Remove residual material (roughing)
During stock removal, ShopTurn automatically detects residual
material that has been left. A suitable tool will allow you to remove
this without having to machine the contour again.
5. Stock removal towards the contour (finishing)
If you programmed a finishing allowance for roughing, the contour
is machined again.

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
All machining steps involved in the contour turning operation are

shown in the process plan in square brackets.
Example: Cut a contour
If your turning machine has a Y axis and if you want to work with a
position Y ≠ 0, proceed as follows:
1. Select the "Turning" machining level from the "Straight/Circle"
function group (see Section "Selecting the tool and the machining
plane").
2. Program a straight line to the required Y position using the
"Straight/Circle" function group (see Section "Straight").
3. Program the turning function.
The Y position is retained until you deactivate the "Turning" machining

plane.

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
5.4.1 Presentation of the contour
ShopTurn presents a contour as one program block in the process

plan. If you open this block, the individual contour elements are listed
symbolically and displayed in broken-line graphics.
Symbolic representation The individual contour elements are represented by symbols adjacent
to the graphics window. They appear in the order in which they were
entered.
Contour element Symbol Meaning
Start point Start point of contour
Straight line up Straight line in 90° matrix
Straight line down Straight line in 90° matrix
Straight line left Straight line in 90° matrix
Straight line right Straight line in 90° matrix
Straight line in any Straight line with any gradient

direction
Arc Right Circle
Arc Left Circle
Finish contour END End of contour definition
The different color of the symbols indicates their status:
Foreground Background Meaning

- Red Cursor on new element
Black Red Cursor on current element
Black White Normal element
Red White Element not currently evaluated
(element will only be evaluated when
it is selected with the cursor)

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
Graphical representation The progress of contour programming is shown in broken-line

graphics while the contour elements are being entered.
Graphical presentation of the contour during contour turning
When the contour element has been created, it can be displayed in

different line styles and colors:
• Black: Programmed contour
• Orange: Current contour element
• Green dashed: Alternative element
• Blue dotted: Partially defined element
The scaling of the coordinate system is adjusted automatically to

match the complete contour.
The symmetry axis of the contour is represented as a line with dots
and dashes.
The position of the coordinate system is displayed in the graphics

window.

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
5.4.2 Creating a new contour
For each contour that you want to cut, you must create a new contour.
The first step in creating a contour is to specify a starting point.

ShopTurn automatically defines the end of the contour.
You have the option of beginning the contour with a transition element
to the blank. You can also enter any additional commands (up to 40
characters) in G code format for the start point.
If you want to create a contour that is similar to an existing contour,

you can copy the existing one, rename it and just alter selected
contour elements.
In contrast, if you want to use an identical contour at another place in
the program, you must not rename the copy. Changes to the one
contour will then automatically be applied to the other contour with the
same name.
New Ø Press the "Cont. turn." and "New contour" soft keys.
contour >
Ø Enter a name for the new contour.
The contour name must be unique.
The input form for the start point of the contour appears.
Ø Enter the individual contour elements (see Section "Create

contour elements").
X Start point in X direction ∅ (abs.) mm

Z Start point in Z direction (abs.) mm
Transition to FS: Chamfer as transition element at contour start mm
contour start R: Radius as transition element at contour start mm
FS=0 or R=0: No transition element
Location of transition element relative to contour start point
Additional Any additional command in G code format

command

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
5.4.3 Creating contour elements
When you have created a new contour and specified the start point,
you can define the individual elements that the contour comprises.
The following contour elements are available for the definition of a

contour:
• Vertical line
• Horizontal line
• Diagonal line
• Circle/arc
For each contour element, you must parameterize a separate screen

form. Parameter entry is supported by various "help displays" that
explain the parameters.
If you leave certain fields blank, ShopTurn assumes that the values
are unknown and attempts to calculate them from other parameters.
Conflicts may result if you enter more parameters than are absolutely
necessary for a contour. In such a case, try entering less parameters
and allowing ShopTurn to calculate as many parameters as possible.
Contour transition As the transition element between two contour elements, you can se-
elements lect a radius or a chamfer or, in the case of linear contour elements,
an undercut. The transition is always appended to the end of a con-
tour element. The contour transition is selected in the parameteriza-
tion screen form of the contour element.
You can use a contour transition element whenever there is an inter-

section between two successive elements which can be calculated
from input values. Otherwise you must use the "Straight/Circle" con-
tour elements.
The contour end is an exception. Although there is no interface to

another element, you can still define a radius or a chamfer as a tran-
sition element to the blank.

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
Additional commands You can enter any additional commands in the form of G code for
each contour element.
You can enter the additional commands (max. 40 characters) in the
extended parameterization screen form ("All parameters" soft key).
Additional functions The following additional functions are available for programming a
contour:
• Tangent to preceding element

You can program the transition to the preceding element as a
tangent.
• Dialog selection
If two different possible contours result from the parameters
entered thus far, one of the options must be selected.
• Close contour
From the current position, you can close the contour with a
straight line to the starting point.
Create exact contour The contour is finished in continuous-path mode (G64). As a result,
transitions contour transitions such as corners, chamfers or radii may not be
machined precisely.
To prevent this you have a choice of two different programming

options (using an additional command or programming a special
feedrate for the transition element).
• Additional command
For the contour illustrated below, first program the vertical straight
line and enter the additional command "G9" (Non-modal exact
stop) for the parameter. Then program the horizontal straight line.
The corner will be machined exactly, since the feedrate at the end
of the vertical straight line is briefly zero.
Machining direction
G9
G64
Workpiece
Finishing contour edges

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
• Feedrate for transition element

If you have chosen a chamfer or a radius as the transition ele-
ment, enter a reduced feedrate in the "FRC" parameter. The
slower machining rate means that the transition element is turned
more accurately.
Create contour element
Ø Select a contour element via soft key.

... Ø Enter all the data available from the workpiece drawing in the in-
put form (e.g. length of straight line, target position, transition to
next element, angle of lead, etc.).
The contour element is added to the contour.
Ø Repeat the procedure until the contour is complete.
The programmed contour is transferred to the process plan.
All If you want to display further parameters for certain contour elements,
parameters
e.g. to enter additional commands, press the "All parameters" soft
key.
Tangent to preceding When entering data for a contour element you can program the
element transition to the preceding element as a tangent.
Tangent to Ø Press the "Tangent to prec. elem." soft key.

prec. elem.
The angle to the preceding element α2 is set to 0°. The "tangential"
selection appears in the parameter input field.
Select a dialog When entering data for a contour element, there may be two different
contour options, one of which you have to select.
Select Ø Press the "Select dialog" soft key to switch between the two
dialog
different contour options.
The selected contour appears in the graphics window as a solid black

line and the alternative contour appears as a dashed green line.
Accept Ø Press the "Accept dialog" soft key to accept the chosen
dialog
alternative.

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
Close the contour A contour always has to be closed. If you do not wish to create all
contour elements from starting point to starting point, you can close
the contour from the current position to the starting point.
Close Ø Press the "Close contour" soft key.

contour
ShopTurn inserts a straight line between your current position and the
starting point.
Transition element at When you have created all contour elements, you can still define a
contour end transition element to the blank at the end of the contour before you
transfer the contour to the process plan.
Ø Place the cursor on the last contour element.
The associated input screen form opens.
Ø Enter a transition element.
Ø Place the cursor on the contour end .
The associated input screen form opens.
Ø Choose the position you require for the transition element.
A transition element to the blank is added at the end of the contour.
Parameters Description for contour element "straight line" Unit
X Target position in the X direction ∅ (abs.) or target position in the X direction (inc.) mm
L Length of line mm
α1 Angle of lead with reference to the Z axis Degrees
α2 Angle to preceding element Degrees
Tangential transition: α2=0
FB Feedrate for contour element "Straight line" mm/rev
Transition to FS: Chamfer as transition element to next contour element mm
following R: Radius as transition element to next contour element mm
element Undercut: Undercut (thread, DIN thread, Form E or Form F) as transition element to
the next contour element
Z1 Length 1 (inc.) – (thread only) mm

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
Z2 Length 2 (inc.) – (thread only) mm

R1 Radius 1 (inc.) – (thread only) mm
R2 Radius 2 (inc.) – (thread only) mm
T Depth (inc.) – (thread only) mm
P Pitch (for DIN thread only) mm/rev
α Insertion angle (for DIN thread only) Degrees
Undercut size Undercut size acc. to DIN table (for forms E and F only):
Radius/depth, e.g.: E1.0x0.4 (undercut form E) or
F0.6x0.3 (undercut form F)
FRC Feedrate for transition element chamfer or radius mm/rev
CA Allowance for subsequent grinding mm
Grinding allowance to right of contour (viewed from starting point)
Grinding allowance to left of contour (viewed from starting point)

command
Parameters Description for contour element "circle" Unit
Direction of
Clockwise rotation
rotation
Counterclockwise rotation
R Radius of circle mm
X Target position in the X direction ∅ (abs.) or target position in the X direction (inc.) mm
I Position of circle center point in X direction ∅ (abs.) or mm
Position of circle center point in X direction (inc.)
K Position of circle center point in Z direction (abs. or inc.) mm
α1 Start angle with reference to Z axis Degrees
β1 End angle with reference to Z axis Degrees
β2 Angle of aperture of circle Degrees
FB Feedrate for circle contour element mm/rev
following R: Radius as transition element to next contour element mm
element
FRC Feedrate for transition element chamfer or radius mm/rev
CA Allowance for subsequent grinding mm
Grinding allowance to right of contour (viewed from starting point)
Grinding allowance to left of contour (viewed from starting point)

command

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
Parameters Description for end of contour Unit
Transition to Location of transition element relative to contour end point

contour end
5.4.4 Changing a contour
You can change a previously created contour later.

Individual contour elements can be
• appended,
• modified,
• inserted or
• deleted.
If your program contains two contours of the same name, changes to

the one contour are automatically applied to the second contour with
the same name.
Append a contour Ø Select the contour in the process plan.

element
The individual contour elements are listed.
Ø Position the cursor on the last element before the end of the
contour.
Ø Select the required contour element via soft key.

... Ø Enter the parameters in the input screen.
The required contour element is appended to the contour.
Alter a contour element Ø Select the contour in the process plan.
Ø Position the cursor on the contour element that you want to

modify.
The associated input form is opened and an enlarged view of the

selected element appears in the programming graphic.

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
Ø Enter the desired changes.
The current values for the contour element are accepted and the
change is immediately visible in the programming graphic.
Alter the selected dialog If when you entered the data for a contour element there were two
different contour options and you chose the wrong one, you can alter
your choice afterwards. If the contour is unique as a result of other
parameters, the system will not prompt you to make a selection.
Ø Open the input screen form for the contour element.
Change Ø Press the "Change selection" soft key.

selection
The two selection options appear again.
dialog
Accept Ø Press the "Accept dialog" soft key.

dialog
The chosen alternative is accepted.
Insert contour element Ø Select the contour in the process plan.
Ø Position the cursor on the contour element after which the new
element is to be inserted.
Ø Select a new contour element via soft key.

... Ø Enter the parameters in the input screen.
The contour element is inserted in the contour. Subsequent contour

elements are updated automatically according to the new contour
status.
When you insert a new element into a contour, the remaining contour
elements are not interpreted until you select the symbol for the first
subsequent element alongside the graphics window using the cursor.
The end point of the inserted element may not correspond to the start
point of the subsequent element. In this case, ShopTurn outputs the
error message "Geometrical data contradictory". To rectify the
problem, insert an incline without entering parameter values.

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
Delete a contour element Ø Select the contour in the process plan.

delete.
Delete Ø Press the "Delete element" soft key.

element
The selected contour element is deleted.

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
5.4.5 Stock removal
You can use the "Stock removal" function to machine contours in the
longitudinal or transverse direction or parallel to the contour.
Stock removal
Before you can machine the contour, you must enter the contour.
Blank For stock removal, ShopTurn can start from a blank that is defined as
a cylinder, an allowance on the finished-part contour or any unma-
chined-part contour. You must define an unmachined-part contour as
a separate closed contour in advance of the finished-part contour.
If the blank and finished-part contours do not intersect, ShopTurn

defines the boundary between blank and finished part.
If the angle between the straight line and the Z axis is greater than 1°,
the boundary is placed at the top and if the angle is less than or equal
to 1°, the boundary is placed at the side.
Finish contour X
Blank
Finished part
α > 1°: Boundary to top
α
Boundary between unmachined and finished parts at the top

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
X
Blank
Finished
part Finish contour α ≤ 1°: Boundary to side
Boundary between unmachined and finished parts at the side
Alternating cutting depth Instead of working with constant cutting depth D, you can use an
alternating cutting depth to vary the load on the tool edge and
increase the tool life.
D First cut D - 10%
D - 10% Second cut D
Alternating cutting depth
The percentage for alternating cutting depth is stored in a machine

data code.
Rounding at the contour You can prevent residual corners after roughing by rounding the
contour by the infeed depth D at the end of the cut.
When set to "automatic", rounding is always performed if the angle
between the cutting edge and the contour exceeds a certain value.
The angle is set in a machine data code.
Cut segmentation To avoid the occurrence of very thin cuts in cut segmentation due to
contour edges, you can align the cut segmentation to the contour
edges. During machining the contour is then divided by the edges into
individual sections and cut segmentation is performed separately for
each section.

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
Set machining area If, for example, you want to machine a certain area of the contour with
limits a different tool, you can set machining area limits so that machining
only takes place in the area of the contour you have selected.
You can define between 1 and 4 limit lines.
Feed interruption To prevent the occurrence of excessively long chips during machin-
ing, you can program a feed interruption. Parameter DI specifies the
distance after which the feed interruption should occur.
The interruption time or retraction distance is defined in machine data.
Machining type You can select the machining mode (roughing or finishing). During
contour roughing, parallel cuts of maximum infeed depth are created.
Roughing is performed up to the final machining allowance pro-
grammed.
You can also specify a compensation allowance U1 for finishing

operations, which allows you to either finish several times (positive
allowance) or to shrink the contour (negative allowance).
Finishing is performed in the same direction as roughing.
If you want to rough and then finish, you have to call the machining
cycle twice (Block 1 = roughing, Block 2 = finishing). The pro-
grammed parameters are retained on the second call.
If you want to finish a contour more than once, you must program the
machining cycle a corresponding number of times.
Stock Ø Press the "Cont. turn." and "Stock removal" soft keys.
removal

5 5
5.4 Contour turning

Machining Roughing
type Finishing
Stock removal Stock removal direction: Longitudinal, transverse or parallel to contour.
direction
Machining side Machining side:
For stock removal direction longitudinal and parallel to contour: External or internal
For stock removal direction transverse and parallel to contour: End face or rear side
Machining Machining direction:
direction ↑: From inside to outside
↓: From outside to inside
←: From end face to rear side
→: From rear side to end face
The machining direction depends on the stock removal direction and choice of tool.
D Infeed depth for roughing (inc.) mm
DX Infeed depth for roughing in X direction (inc) – (for parallel to contour alternative to mm
D only)
DZ Infeed depth for roughing in Z direction (inc) – (for parallel to contour alternative to mm
D only)
Do not round contour at end of cut
Always round contour at end of cut
Round contour automatically at end of cut
Equal cut segmentation
Align cut segmentation to edges
Constant cutting depth
Alternating cutting depth - (only with align cut segmentation to edges)
U Finishing allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to UX mm
and UZ)
UX Finishing allowance in X direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm
UZ Finishing allowance in Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm
Allowance Compensation allowance for contour or not – (finishing only)
U1 Compensation allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (with allowance only) mm
Positive value: Compensation allowance is not removed
Negative value: Compensation allowance is removed in addition to finishing
allowance
DI Distance after which feed interruption occurs – (only for roughing) mm
BL Description of unmachined part: Cylinder, allowance or contour (only for roughing)
XD Allowance or cylinder dimension in X direction ∅ (abs.) – (for cylinder only) mm
Allowance or cylinder dimension in X direction (inc.) – (for cylinder only)
Allowance based on contour in X direction (inc.) – (for allowance only)
ZD Allowance or cylinder dimension in Z direction (abs. or inc.) – (for cylinder only) mm
Allowance based on contour in Z direction (inc.) – (for allowance only)
Set machining Limit machining area or not
area limits
XA Limit X (abs.) – (with limited machining area only) mm
XB Limit X (abs. or inc.) – (with limited machining area only) mm

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
ZA Limit Z (abs.) – (with limited machining area only) mm

ZB Limit Z (abs. or inc.) – (with limited machining area only) mm
Relief cuts Machine relief cut elements or not
FR Insertion feedrate relief cut mm/rev
5.4.6 Removal of residual material
The "Residual material" function is used when you want to machine

the material that remained after stock removal along the contour.
During stock removal along the contour, ShopTurn automatically de-

tects any residual material and generates an updated blank contour.
Material that remains as part of the finishing allowance is not residual
material. The "Residual material" function allows you to remove
unwanted material with a suitable tool.
The "Residual material" function is a software option.
Remove Ø Press the "Cont. turn." and "Remove resid." soft keys.
resid.

Machining Roughing
type Finishing
Stock removal Stock removal direction: Longitudinal, transverse or parallel to contour.
direction
Machining Machining side:
side For stock removal direction longitudinal and parallel to contour: External or internal
For stock removal direction transverse and parallel to contour: End face or rear side
Machining Machining direction:
direction ↑: From inside to outside
↓: From outside to inside
←: From end face to rear side
→: From rear side to end face
The machining direction depends on the stock removal direction.
DX Infeed depth for roughing in X direction (inc.) – (for parallel to contour alternative to mm
D only)
DZ Infeed depth for roughing in Z direction (inc.) – (for parallel to contour alternative to mm
D only)

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
Do not round contour at end of cut

Always round contour at end of cut
Round contour automatically at end of cut
Equal cut segmentation
Align cut segmentation to edges
Constant cutting depth
Alternating cutting depth – (only with align cut segmentation to edges)
U Finishing allowance in X and Z direction (inc.) – (roughing only) – (alternative to UX mm
and UZ)
UX Finishing allowance in X direction (inc.) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm
UZ Finishing allowance in Z direction (inc.) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm
Allowance Compensation allowance for contour or not– (finishing only)
U1 Compensation allowance in X and Z direction (inc.) – (with allowance only) mm
allowance
area limits
XA Limit X (abs) – (with limited machining area only) mm
XB Limit X (abs or inc) – (with limited machining area only) mm
ZA Limit Z (abs) – (with limited machining area only) mm
ZB Limit Z (abs or inc) – (with limited machining area only) mm
Relief cuts Machine relief cut elements or not
FR Insertion feedrate relief cut mm/rev

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
5.4.7 Grooving
The "Grooving" function is used to machine grooves of any shape.
Grooving
Before you program the groove, you must define the groove contour.
If a recess is wider than the active tool, it is machined in several cuts.

The tool is moved by (a maximum of) 80% of the tool width for each
recess.
Blank For grooving, ShopTurn can start from a blank that is defined as a cy-
linder, an allowance on the finished-part contour or any unmachined-
part contour.
ing, you can program a feed interruption.
Machining type You can select the machining mode (roughing or finishing).
For more detailed information, please refer to section "Stock removal"

in each case.
Ø Press the "Cont. turn." and "Grooving" soft keys.

Grooving

5 5
5.4 Contour turning

Machining Roughing
type Finishing
Stock removal Stock removal direction: Longitudinal or transverse
direction
For stock removal in longitudinal direction: External or internal
For stock removal in transverse direction: End face or rear side
XDA 1st grooving limit tool (inc.) – (end face or rear face only) mm
XDB 2nd grooving limit tool (inc.) – (end face or rear face only) mm
and UZ)
allowance
area limits
N Number of grooves
5.4.8 Grooving residual material
The "Grooving residual material" function is used when you want to

machine the material that remained after grooving along the contour.
During grooving along the contour, ShopTurn automatically detects

any residual material and generates an updated blank contour.
material. The "Grooving residual material" function allows you to
remove unwanted material with a suitable tool.

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
The "Grooving residual material" function is a software option.
Grooving Ø Press the "Cont. turn." and "Grooving resid." soft keys.
resid.

Machining Roughing
type Finishing
direction
side For stock removal in longitudinal direction: External or internal
and UZ)
allowance
area limits
N Number of grooves

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
5.4.9 Plunge-turning
The "Plunge-turning" function is used to machine grooves of any

shape.
In contrast to grooving, the plunge-turning function removes material
on the sides after the groove has been machined in order to reduce
machining time. Unlike grooving, the plunge-turning function allows
you to machine contours that the tool must enter vertically.
Plunge-turning
You will need a special tool for plunge-turning.

Before you program the "Plunge-turning" cycle, you must define the
contour.
Blank With plunge-turning, ShopTurn can start from a blank that is defined
as a cylinder, an allowance on the finished-part contour or any
unmachined-part contour.
ing, you can program a feed interruption.
Machining type You can select the machining mode (roughing or finishing).
For more detailed information, please refer to section "Stock removal"

in each case.

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
Plunge- Ø Press the "Cont. turn." and "Plunge-turning" soft keys.

turning

FX Feed in X direction mm/rev
FZ Feed in Z direction mm/rev
Machining Roughing
type Finishing
direction
side For stock removal in longitudinal direction: External or internal
and UZ)
allowance
area limits
N Number of grooves

5 5
5.4 Contour turning
5.4.10 Plunge-turning residual material
The "Plunge-turning residual material" function is used when you want

to machine the material that remained after grooving along the
contour.
During plunge-turning, ShopTurn automatically detects any residual

material and generates an updated blank contour. Material that
remains as part of the finishing allowance is not residual material. The
"Plunge-turning residual material" function allows you to remove
unwanted material with a suitable tool.
The "Plunge-turning residual material" function is a software option.
Plunge- Ø Press the "Cont. turn." and "Plunge-turn. resid." soft keys.
turn. resid.

FX Feed in X direction mm/rev
FZ Feed in Z direction mm/rev
Machining Roughing
type Finishing
direction
For stock removal in longitudinal direction: External or internal
and UZ)
allowance

5 5
5.4 Contour turning

area limits
N Number of grooves

5 5
5.5 Milling
5.5 Milling
The functions explained in this section are used when you want to mill
simple geometric shapes on the end face or peripheral surface.
The following geometric shapes are available for milling:

• Rectangular pocket
• Circular pocket
• Rectangular spigot
• Circular spigot
• Longitudinal slot
• Circumferential slot
• Multiple edge
• Engraving
To mill pockets, spigots or slots at one position only, enter the position
in the technology block. If you want to mill these shapes at more than
one position, however, you must program the positions or position
pattern in a separate block after the technology block.
The technology block and the positioning block are shown in the
process plan in square brackets.
Example: Milling
Clamp spindle If you wish to insert the tool vertically into the material for milling, for
example, you can clamp the spindle in order to avoid spindle rotation.
You should note that when machining in planes End face/End face C
and Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C, clamping is automatical-
ly released after insertion. When machining in planes End face Y and
Peripheral surface Y, on the other hand, clamping is modal, i.e. it
remains activated until the machining plane is changed or clamping is
deselected in the "Straight circle" à "Tool" menu.
facturer.

5 5
5.5 Milling
5.5.1 Rectangular pocket
The "Rectangular pocket" function is used when you want to mill any
rectangular pocket on the end face or peripheral surface.
The following machining methods are available:

• Mill rectangular pocket from solid material.
• Predrill rectangular pocket in the center first if, for example, the
milling cutter does not cut across center (program the drilling,
rectangular pocket and position program blocks one after
another).
Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the center point of the pocket at rapid
traverse at the height of the return plane and adjusts to the safety
clearance.
2. The tool is inserted into the material according to the chosen
strategy.
3. The pocket is always machined with the chosen machining type
from inside out.
Machining type You can select the machining mode for milling the rectangular pocket
as follows:
• Roughing
In "Roughing" mode, the individual planes of the pocket are
machined one after another from inside out until depth Z1 or X1 is
reached.
• Finishing
In "Finishing" mode the edge is always machined first. The pocket
edge is approached on the quadrant which joins the corner
radius. In the last infeed, the base is finished from inside out.
• Edge finishing
Edge finishing is performed in the same way as finishing, except
that the last infeed (finish base) is omitted.
Ø Press the "Milling", "Pocket" and "Rectangular pocket" soft keys.

Pocket >
Rectangu-
lar pocket

5 5
5.5 Milling

Clamp/release spindle (only for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y, and for End face
C/Peripheral surface C if the tool is inserted in the center for roughing)
Machining Roughing
type
Finishing
Finishing the edge
Single pos. Mill rectangular pocket at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0, L0, C0, CP).
Pos. pattern Mill several rectangular pockets in a positioning pattern (e.g. full circle or matrix).
Single position End face/End face C:
The reference point is always the center point of the rectangular pocket.
Y0 Reference point in Y direction (abs.) mm
L0 Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) mm
C0 Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Degrees
Z0 Reference point in Z direction (abs.) mm
Z1 Depth of pocket with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) mm
DXY Maximum infeed in the XY plane – (for roughing and finishing only) mm
DZ Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) mm
UXY Finishing allowance in plane (pocket edge) mm
UZ Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) – (for roughing and finishing only) mm
Single position Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C:
X1 Depth of pocket with reference to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.) mm
DYZ Maximum infeed in the YZ plane – (for roughing and finishing only) mm
DX Maximum depth infeed (X direction) mm
UYZ Finishing allowance in plane (pocket edge) mm
UX Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) – (for roughing and finishing only) mm

5 5
5.5 Milling
Single position End face Y:

Single position Peripheral surface Y:
X0 Reference point (abs.) mm
X1 Depth of pocket with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) mm
W Pocket width mm
L Pocket length mm
R Radius at pocket corners mm
α0 Angle of rotation of pocket Degrees
Face: α0 refers to the X axis or to the position of C0 with a polar reference point
Peripheral surface: α0 refers to the Y axis
Insertion Insertion strategy
Helical: Insertion along helical path
The cutter center point traverses along the helical path determined by the radius
and depth per revolution. If the depth for one infeed has been reached, a full circle
motion is executed in the plane.
Oscillation: Insertion with oscillation along center axis of pocket
The cutter center point oscillates along a linear path until it reaches the depth
infeed. If the depth has been reached, the path is executed again in the plane
without depth infeed.
Center: Insert vertically in center of pocket
The tool executes the calculated depth infeed vertically in the center of the pocket.
Note: This setting can be used only if the cutter can cut across center or if the
pocket has been predrilled.
EP Maximum insertion pitch (for helical insertion only) mm/rev
ER Insertion radius (for helical insertion only) mm
EW Insertion angle (for insertion with oscillation only) Degrees

5 5
5.5 Milling
FZ Depth infeed feedrate (for end face/end face C and end face Y with central insertion mm/tooth
only) mm/min
FX Depth infeed feedrate (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral mm/tooth
surface Y with central insertion only) mm/min
5.5.2 Circular pocket
The "Circular pocket" function is used when you want to mill any
circular pocket on the end face or peripheral surface.

• Mill circular pocket from solid material.
• Predrill circular pocket in the center first if, for example, the milling
cutter does not cut across center (program the drilling, circular
pocket and position program blocks one after another).
Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the center point of the pocket at rapid
traverse at the height of the return plane and adjusts to the safety
clearance.
strategy.
3. The pocket is always machined with the chosen machining type
from inside out.
Machining type You can select the machining mode for milling the circular pocket as
follows:
• Roughing
In "Roughing" mode, the individual planes of the pocket are
reached.
• Finishing
In "Finishing" mode, the edge is always machined first. The
pocket edge is approached on the quadrant, which joins the
pocket radius. In the last infeed, the base is finished from the
center out.
• Edge finishing
Ø Press the "Milling", "Pocket" and "Circular pocket" soft keys.

Pocket >
Circular
pocket

5 5
5.5 Milling

Machining Roughing
type Finishing
Finishing the edge
Single pos. Mill circular pocket at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0, L0, C0, CP).
Pos. pattern Mill several circular pockets in a positioning pattern (e.g. full circle or matrix).
The reference point is always the center point of the circular pocket.
X1 Depth of pocket with reference to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.) mm

5 5
5.5 Milling

CP Positioning angle for machining area mm
X1 Depth of pocket with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) mm
∅ Diameter of pocket mm
Insertion Insertion strategy
Helical: Insertion in a helical path
The cutter center point traverses along the helical path determined by the radius
and depth per revolution. If the depth for one infeed has been reached, a full circle
motion is executed in the plane.
Feedrate: Machining feed
Center: Vertical insertion at center of pocket
The tool executes the calculated depth infeed vertically in the center of the pocket.
Feedrate: Infeed rate as programmed under FZ
Note: Vertical insertion into the pocket center can be used only if the tool can cut
across center or if the workpiece has been predrilled.
only) mm/min

5 5
5.5 Milling
5.5.3 Rectangular spigot
The "Rectangular spigot" function is used when you want to mill

various rectangular spigots.
You can select from the following shapes with or without a corner
radius:
Rectangular spigot
In addition to the required rectangular spigot, you must also define a

blank spigot, i.e. the outer limits of the material. The tool moves at
rapid traverse outside this area. The blank spigot must not overlap
any adjacent blank spigots. ShopTurn automatically centers the
finished spigot within the blank.
The spigot is machined using only one infeed. If you want to machine
the spigot using multiple infeeds, you must program the "Rectangular
spigot" function several times with a reducing finishing allowance.
Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the starting point at rapid traverse at the
height of the return plane and adjusts to the safety clearance. The
starting point is on the positive X axis rotated through α0.
2. The tool traverses the spigot contour sideways in a semicircle at
machining feed. The tool first executes infeed at machining depth
and then moves in the plane. The spigot is machined as a function
of the programmed machining direction (climb/conventional) in a
clockwise or counterclockwise direction.
3. When the spigot has been circumnavigated once, the tool retracts
from the contour in the plane in a semicircle and then infeeds to
the next machining depth.
4. The spigot is approached again in a semicircle and circumnavi-
gated once. It repeats the process until the spigot depth has been
reached.

5 5
5.5 Milling
Tool
X
Retracting
contour Approaching
contour
Rectangular
spigot
Approaching and retracting from the rectangular

spigot in a semicircle
Ø Press the "Milling", "Spigot" and "Rectangular spigot" soft keys.

Spigot >
Rectangu-
lar spigot

Machining Roughing
type
Finishing
Single pos. Mill rectangular spigot at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0, L0, C0, CP).
Pos. pattern Mill several rectangular spigots in a positioning pattern (full circle or matrix).
The reference point is always the center point of the rectangular spigot.
Z1 Depth of spigot with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) mm
UXY Finishing allowance in the plane (spigot edge) mm
UZ Finishing allowance in the depth (spigot depth) mm

5 5
5.5 Milling

UXY Finishing allowance in plane (spigot edge) mm
UZ Finishing allowance in depth (spigot depth) mm
X1 Depth of spigot with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) mm
UYZ Finishing allowance in plane (spigot edge) mm
UX Finishing allowance in depth (spigot depth) mm
W Width of finished-part spigot mm
L Length of finished-part spigot mm
R Radius at edges of spigot (corner radius) mm
α0 Angle of rotation of spigot Degrees
W1 Width of specified blank spigot (important for determining approach position) mm
L1 Length of specified blank spigot (important for determining approach position) mm
5.5.4 Circular spigot
The "Circular spigot" function is used when you want to mill a circular
spigot.
In addition to the required circular spigot, you must also define a blank
spigot, i.e. the outer limits of the material. The tool moves at rapid
traverse outside this area. The blank spigot must not overlap any
adjacent blank spigots. ShopTurn automatically centers the finished
spigot within the blank.
The spigot is machined using only one infeed. If you want to machine
the spigot using multiple infeeds, you must program the "Circular
spigot" function several times with a reducing finishing allowance.

5 5
5.5 Milling
starting point is always on the positive X axis.
2. The tool traverses the spigot contour sideways in a semicircle at
machining feed. The tool first executes infeed at machining depth
and then moves in the plane. The spigot is machined as a function
of the programmed machining direction (climb/conventional) in a
3. When the spigot has been circumnavigated once, the tool retracts
from the contour in the plane in a semicircle and then infeeds to
the next machining depth.
4. The spigot is approached again in a semicircle and circumnavi-
gated once. It repeats the process until the spigot depth has been
reached.
Tool
X
Retracting
contour Approaching
contour
Y
Circular
spigot
Approaching and retracting from the circular

spigot in a semicircle
Ø Press the "Milling", "Spigot" and "Circular spigot" soft keys.

Spigot >
Circular
spigot


5 5
5.5 Milling

Machining Roughing
type
Finishing
Single pos. Mill circular spigot at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0, L0, C0, CP).
Pos. pattern Mill several circular spigots in a positioning pattern (e.g. full circle or matrix).
The reference point is always the center point of the circular spigot.
X1 Depth of spigot with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) mm
UYZ Finishing allowance in plane (spigot edge) mm
UX Finishing allowance in depth (spigot depth) mm
∅ Diameter of finished-part spigot mm
∅1 Diameter of blank spigot (important for determining approach position) mm

5 5
5.5 Milling
5.5.5 Longitudinal slot
The "Longitudinal slot" function is used when you want to mill a

longitudinal slot on the end face or peripheral surface.

• Mill longitudinal slot from solid material.
• Predrill longitudinal slot in the center first if, for example, the
milling cutter does not cut across center (program the drilling,
rectangular pocket and position program blocks one after
another).
Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the center point of the slot at rapid traverse at
the height of the return plane and adjusts to the safety clearance.
strategy.
3. The longitudinal slot is always machined with the chosen machin-
ing type from inside out.
Machining type You can select the machining mode for milling the longitudinal slot as
follows:
• Roughing
In "Roughing" mode, the individual planes of the slot are
reached.
• Finishing
In "Finishing" mode, the edge is always machined first. The slot
edge is approached on the quadrant, which joins the corner
radius. In the last infeed, the base is finished from the center out.
• Edge finishing
Ø Press the "Milling", "Slot" and "Long. slot" soft keys.

Slot >
Long. slot

5 5
5.5 Milling

Position Select position:
Machining Roughing
type
Finishing
Edge finishing
Single pos. Mill longitudinal slot at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0, L0, C0, CP).
Pos. pattern Mill several longitudinal slots in a positioning pattern (e.g. full circle or matrix).
The reference point is always the center point of the longitudinal slot.
Z1 Depth of slot with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) mm
DXY Maximum infeed in the XY plane mm
UXY Finishing allowance in plane (slot edge) mm
UZ Finishing allowance in depth (slot base) mm
X1 Depth of slot with reference to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.) mm
DYZ Maximum infeed in the YZ plane mm
UYZ Finishing allowance in plane (slot edge) mm
UX Finishing allowance in depth (slot base) mm

5 5
5.5 Milling

UZ Finishing allowance in depth (slot base) mm
X1 Depth of slot with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) mm
UX Finishing allowance in depth (slot base) mm
W Slot width mm
L Slot length mm
α0 Angle of rotation of slot Degrees
Insertion Insertion strategy mm
Central: Vertical insertion at center of slot
The tool executes the depth infeed vertically in the center of the slot.
Note: This setting can be used only if the cutter can cut across center.
Oscillation: Insert with oscillation along center axis of longitudinal slot:
The cutter center point oscillates along a linear path until it reaches the depth
infeed. If the depth has been reached, the path is executed again in the plane with-
out depth infeed.
EW Insertion angle (for oscillation only) Degrees
only) mm/min

5 5
5.5 Milling
5.5.6 Circumferential slot
The "Circumferential slot" function is used when you want to mill one
or more circumferential slots of the same size in a full circle or pitch
circle.
Tool size Please note that there is a minimum size for the milling cutter used to
machine the circumferential slot:
• Roughing:
1/2 slot width W – finishing allowance UXY ≤ milling cutter
diameter
• Finishing:
1/2 slot width W ≤ milling cutter diameter
• Edge finishing:
Finishing allowance UXY ≤ milling cutter diameter
Annular slot To create an annular slot, you must enter the following values for the
"Number N" and "Aperture angle α1" parameters:
N=1
α1 = 360°
Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the center point of the semicircle at the end of
the slot at rapid traverse at the height of the return plane and
adjusts to the safety clearance.
2. It then plunges into the workpiece at machining feedrate, allowing
for the maximum Z direction infeed (for face machining) and X
direction infeed (for peripheral surface machining) as well as the
finishing allowance. The circumferential slot is machined in the
programmed machining direction (climb or conventional) in a
3. When the first circumferential slot is finished, the tool moves to the
retraction plane at rapid traverse.
4. The next circumferential slot is approached along a straight line or
circular path and then machined.
The rapid traverse feedrate for positioning on a circular path is

5 5
5.5 Milling
Machining type You can select the machining mode for milling the circumferential slot
as follows:
• Roughing
In "Roughing" mode, the individual planes of the slot are
machined one after another from the center point of the
semicircle to the end of the slot until depth Z1 is reached.
• Finishing
In "Finishing" mode, the edge is always machined first until depth
Z1 is reached. The slot edge is approached on the quadrant,
which joins the radius. In the last infeed, the base is finished from
the center point of the semicircle to the end of the slot.
• Edge finishing
Ø Press the "Milling", "Slot" and "Circ. slot" soft keys.

Slot >
Circ. slot

FZ Depth infeed rate mm/tooth
mm/min
Position You can select 8 different positions:
Machining Roughing
type
Finishing
Edge finishing
Full circle Position slots around a full circle. The slot spacing is uniform and is calculated by
the control.
Pitch circle Position slots around a pitch circle. The slot spacing can be determined on the
basis of angle α2.
The reference point is always the center point of the full or pitch circle.

5 5
5.5 Milling

X1 Depth of slot with reference to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.) mm
End face Y:
X1 Depth of slot with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) mm
W Slot width mm
R Radius of circumferential slot mm
α0 Start angle Degrees
α0 is based on the end face on the X axis and the peripheral surface on the Y axis
α1 Angle of aperture of a slot Degrees
α2 Advance angle (for pitch circle only) Degrees
N Number of slots

5 5
5.5 Milling
5.5.7 Positions
If you want to mill a pocket, spigot or longitudinal slot at more than

one position, you must program a separate positioning block.
You must set "Pos. Pattern" for the milling cycle if you want to mill at
more than one position.
Position pattern
You will find further information about freely definable positions or

position patterns in the Section "Drilling".
Ø Press the "Drilling" and "Positions" soft keys.

Positions >
Ø Select the required position pattern via soft key.

...
Ø Then proceed as described in the Section "Drilling".

5 5
5.5 Milling
5.5.8 Multiple edge
The "Multiple edge" function is used when you want to mill a multiple
edge with any number of edges on the end face.
You can select from the following shapes with or without a corner
radius or chamfer:
Multiple edge
height of the return plane and adjusts to the safety clearance.
2. The tool traverses the multiple edge in a quadrant at machining
feed. The tool first executes infeed at machining depth and then
moves in the plane. The multiple edge is machined as a function of
the programmed machining direction (climb/conventional) in a
3. When the first plane has been machined, the tool retracts from the
contour in the plane in a quadrant and then infeeds to the next
machining depth.
4. The multiple edge is traversed again in a quadrant. It repeats the
process until the depth of the multiple edge has been reached.
A multiple edge with more than two edges is circumnavigated heli-

cally; with a single or double edge, each edge is machined separately.
Tool
X
Retracting
contour
Approaching
contour
Y
Multiple
edge
Approaching and retraction from the multiple

edge in a quadrant

5 5
5.5 Milling
Multiple Ø Press the "Milling", and "Multiple edge" soft keys.

edge >

Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y only)
Machining Roughing
type
Finishing
Finishing the edge
∅ Diameter of blank part mm
Z1 End point Z1 (abs. or inc.) mm
N Number of edges (1, 2,.....)
SW Across the flats (alternative to L) – (for N = 1 or N = integer only) mm
L Edge length (alternative to SW) mm
α0 Angle of rotation of first edge with reference to X axis Degrees
α0 > 0: Multiple edge is rotated in CCW direction.
α0 < 0: Multiple edge is rotated in CW direction.
FS Chamfer (alternative to R) – (for 3 edges or more) mm
R Rounding (alternative to FS) – (for 3 edges or more) mm
UZ Finishing allowance in depth (for roughing and finishing only) mm
UXY Finishing allowance in plane mm

5 5
5.5 Milling
5.5.9 Engraving
The "Engraving" function is used when you want to mill a text along a
line or arc.
ShopTurn uses a proportional font for engraving, i.e. the width of the
individual characters varies.
height of the return plane and adjusts to the safety clearance.
2. The tool moves to machining depth Z1 or X1 at infeed rate FZ or
FX and mills the character.
3. The tool retracts to the safety clearance at rapid traverse and
moves along a straight line to the next character.
4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the entire text has been milled.
Mirrored text Programming engraving in the "End face rear" or "Peripheral surface
inner" machining planes produces mirrored text. To obtain normal text
here, you must first program mirroring (see "Defining the coordinate
transformations") and then the "Engraving" function.
Please note that before mirroring you are in the machining plane in
which you want to engrave. (To change the machining plane see
"Selecting the tool and the machining plane".)
To engrave mirrored text in the "End face front" and "Peripheral
surface outer" machining planes, first program mirroring and then
enter the normal text in the "Engraving" function.
Full circle To distribute the characters evenly around a full circle, there is no
need to calculate the arc angle α2 between the first and the last
character; instead simply enter α2=360°. ShopTurn then distributes
the characters evenly around the full circle.
Ø Press the "Milling" and "Engraving" soft keys.

Engraving
Lowercase letters
Lowercase
Ø Press the "Lowercase" soft key to enter lowercase letters.
Press it again to enter uppercase letters.

5 5
5.5 Milling
Special characters
Special Ø Press the "Special characters" soft key if you need a character
characters
that does not appear on the input keys.
The "Special characters" window appears.
Ø Place the cursor on the character you require.
The desired character is inserted in the text.
Delete text
Delete Ø Press the "Delete text" soft key to remove text that has already
text
been entered.
Delete
Ø Press the "Delete" soft key.
The entire text is deleted.
The "Lowercase", "Special characters" and "Delete text" soft keys only
appear when you place the cursor in the input field for engraving text.

Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y and Peripheral surface Y only)
Alignment
Align text to line
Align text to arc
Align text to arc
Reference Position of reference point within text
point
Engraving text Max. 91 characters
Z1 Machining depth (inc.) mm
FZ Depth infeed rate mm/min
mm/tooth

5 5
5.5 Milling
W Character height mm
DX1 Character spacing mm
DX2 Total width (alternative to DX1) – (for linear alignment only) mm
α1 Text direction (for linear alignment only) Degrees
α2 Arc angle (alternative to DX1) – (for curved alignment only) Degrees
The center point of the arc is the workpiece zero.
C0 Reference point (alternative to Y0) – (for linear alignment only) mm
R Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to Y0) – (for curved align- mm
ment only)
α0 Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Z0) – (for curved alignment Degrees
only)
X1 Machining depth (inc.) mm
FX Depth infeed rate mm/min
mm/tooth
DY1 Character spacing mm
DY2 Total width (alternative to DY1) – (for linear alignment only) mm
α2 Arc angle (alternative to DY1) – (for curved alignment only) Degrees
YM Center point of arc (abs.) – (for curved alignment only) mm
CM Center point of arc (abs.) – (alternative to YM) Degrees
ZM Center point of arc (abs.) – (for curved alignment only) mm
End face Y:
CP Positioning angle for machining area
Z1 Machining depth (inc.) mm
FZ Depth infeed rate mm/min
mm/tooth
DX1 Character spacing mm
DX2 Total width (alternative to DX1) – (for linear alignment only) mm
α2 Arc angle (alternative to DX1) – (for curved alignment only) Degrees
The center point of the arc is the workpiece zero.
C0 Reference point mm
R Ref point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to Y0) – (for curved alignment only) mm
α0 Ref. point on angular polar axis (alternative to Z0) – (for curved alignment only) Degrees
X1 Machining depth (inc.) mm
FX Depth infeed rate mm/min
mm/tooth

5 5
5.5 Milling
DY1 Character spacing mm
DY2 Total width (alternative to DY1) – (for linear alignment only) mm
α2 Arc angle (alternative to DY1) – (for curved alignment only) Degrees
YM Center point of arc (abs.) – (for curved alignment only) mm
ZM Center point of arc (abs.) – (for curved alignment only) mm

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
5.6 Contour milling

The "Contour milling" function is used when you want to mill simple and
complex contours. You can define open contours or closed contours
(pockets, islands, spigots) and machine them with path milling or milling
cycles.
A contour comprises separate contour elements, whereby at least two

and up to 250 elements result in a defined contour. You can also
program chamfers, radii or tangential transitions between the contour
elements.
The integrated contour calculator calculates the intersection points of the
individual contour elements taking into account the geometrical
relationships, which allows you to enter incompletely dimensioned
elements.
With contour milling, you must always program the geometry of the
contour before you program the technology.
You have the option of machining contours of any type by path milling,
stock removal from pockets with or without islands, or clearing spigots.
Freely-definable The machining of freely-definable open or closed contours is generally
contours programmed as follows:
1. Enter contour
You build up the contour gradually from a series of different contour
elements.
2. Path milling (roughing)
The contour is machined taking into account various approach and
retract strategies.
3. Path milling (finishing)
If you programmed a finishing allowance for roughing, the contour is
machined again.
Contours for pockets Contours for pockets or islands must be closed, i.e. the start point and
or islands end point of the contour are identical. You can also mill pockets that
contain one or more islands. The islands can also be located partially
outside the pocket or overlap each other. ShopTurn interprets the first
contour specified as a pocket contour and all others as islands.
The machining of contour pockets with islands is generally programmed
as follows:
1. Enter contour for the pocket
You build up the contour pocket gradually from a series of different
contour elements.
2. Enter contour for the island
You enter the contour for the island after the contour for the pocket.
You can program any number of islands which can also be located
partially outside the pocket or overlap each other.

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
3. Centering predrilling of the contour pocket

If you want to predrill the contour pocket, you can center the drill hole
first to prevent the drill slipping.
4. Predrill contour pocket
If you want the cutter to plunge into the material vertically and if a
milling cutter with an end tooth is not available, you can predrill the
pocket.
5. Remove stock from contour pocket with island (roughing)
The stock is removed from the contour pocket complete with island
taking into account various insertion strategies.
During stock removal from the pocket, ShopTurn automatically detects
residual material that has been left. A suitable tool will allow you to
remove this without having to machine the complete pocket again.
7. Remove stock from contour pocket with island (finish edge)
If you programmed a finishing allowance for the edge when you
programmed roughing, the pocket edge will be machined again.
All machining steps involved in the contour milling operation are shown in
the process plan in square brackets.
Example: Removing stock from a contour pocket

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
Contours for spigots Contours for spigots must be closed, i.e. the start point and end point of
the contour are identical. You can define multiple spigots, which can also
overlap. ShopTurn interprets the first contour specified as a blank contour
and all others as spigots.
The machining of contour spigots is generally programmed as follows:
1. Enter the blank contour, i.e. the outer limits of the material
The tool moves at rapid traverse outside this area. Material is then
removed between the blank contour and spigot contour.
2. Enter contour for the spigot
You enter the contour for the spigot after the blank contour.
3. Clear contour spigot (roughing)
The contour spigot is cleared.
As it mills the spigot, ShopTurn automatically detects residual material
that has been left behind. A suitable tool will allow you to remove this
without having to machine the complete spigot again.
5. Clear contour spigot (edge finishing)
If you programmed a finishing allowance for roughing, the spigot edge
is machined again.
Clamp spindle If you wish to insert the tool vertically into the material for contour milling,
for example, you can clamp the spindle in order to avoid spindle rotation.
You should note that when machining in planes End face/End face C and
Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C, clamping is automatically
released after insertion. When machining in planes End face Y and
Peripheral surface Y, on the other hand, clamping is modal, i.e. it remains
activated until the machining plane is changed or clamping is deselected
in the "Straight circle" à "Tool" menu.
facturer.

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
5.6.1 Presentation of the contour
ShopTurn presents a contour as one program block in the process

plan. If you open this block, the individual contour elements are listed
symbolically and displayed in broken-line graphics.
Symbolic representation The individual contour elements are represented by symbols adjacent
to the graphics window. They appear in the order in which they were
entered.
Contour element Symbol Meaning
Start point Start point of contour
Straight line up Straight line in 90° matrix
Straight line down Straight line in 90° matrix
Straight line left Straight line in 90° matrix
Straight line right Straight line in 90° matrix
Straight line in any Straight line with any gradient

direction
Arc Right Circle
Arc Left Circle

Finish contour END End of contour definition
The different color of the symbols indicates their status:
Foreground Background Meaning

– Red Cursor on new element
Black Red Cursor on current element
Black White Normal element
Red White Element not currently evaluated
(element will only be evaluated when
it is selected with the cursor)

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
Graphical representation The progress of contour programming is shown in broken-line

graphics while the contour elements are being entered.
Graphical presentation of the contour during contour milling
When the contour element has been created, it can be displayed in

different line styles and colors:
• Black: Programmed contour
• Orange: Current contour element
• Green dashed: Alternative element
• Blue dotted: Partially defined element
The scaling of the coordinate system is adjusted automatically to

match the complete contour.
The position of the coordinate system is displayed in the graphics

window.

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
5.6.2 Creating a new contour
For each contour that you want to mill, you must create a new
contour.
The first step in creating a contour is to specify a starting point.

ShopTurn automatically defines the end of the contour.
You can enter any additional commands (up to 40 characters) in G
code format for the start point.
If you want to create a contour that is similar to an existing contour,

you can copy the existing one, rename it and just alter selected
contour elements.
In contrast, if you want to use an identical contour at another place in
the program, you must not rename the copy. Changes to the one
contour will then automatically be applied to the other contour with the
same name.
Contour Ø Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "New contour" soft keys.
milling >
New
contour >
Ø Enter a name for the new contour.
The contour name must be unique.
The input form for the start point of the contour appears. You can
enter Cartesian or polar coordinates.
Cartesian starting point Ø Select the machining plane.
Ø Enter the starting point for the contour.
Ø Enter any additional commands in G code format, as required.

contour elements").
Polar starting point Ø Select the machining plane.
Pole
Ø Press the "Pole" soft key.
Ø Enter the pole position in Cartesian coordinates.
Ø Enter the starting point for the contour in polar coordinates.

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
Ø Enter any additional commands in G code format, as required.

contour elements").

• End face/End face C
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C
• End face Y (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y (only when Y axis exists)
End face/End face C and End face Y – Cartesian:
X Start point in X direction (abs.) mm
Y Start point in Y direction (abs.) mm
End face/End face C and End face Y – Polar:
X Pole position in X direction (abs.) mm
Y Pole position in Y direction (abs.) mm
L1 Distance between pole and start point for contour (abs.) mm
ϕ1 Polar angle between pole and start point for contour (abs.) Degrees
Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Cartesian:
∅ Cylinder surface mm
Y Start point in Y direction (abs.) – (calculated from Yα or vice versa) mm
Yα Starting angle (abs.) – (calculated from Y or vice versa) Degrees
Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Polar:
∅ Cylinder surface mm
Z Pole position in Z direction (abs.) mm
Peripheral surface Y – Cartesian:
Y Start point in Y direction (abs.) mm
Peripheral surface Y – Polar:
Z Pole position in Z direction (abs.) mm
Additional command Any additional command in G code format

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
5.6.3 Creating contour elements
When you have created a new contour and specified the start point,
you can define the individual elements that the contour comprises.
The following contour elements are available for the definition of a

contour:
• Horizontal line
• Vertical line
• Diagonal line
• Circle/arc
For each contour element, you must parameterize a separate screen

form. The coordinates for a horizontal or vertical line are entered in
Cartesian format; however, for the contour elements Diagonal line and
Circle/arc you can choose between Cartesian and polar coordinates.
If you wish to enter polar coordinates you must first define a pole. If
you have already defined a pole for the start point, you can also relate
the polar coordinates to this pole. In this case there is therefore no
need to define another pole.
Parameter entry is supported by various "help displays" that explain

the parameters.
If you leave certain fields blank, ShopTurn assumes that the values
are unknown and attempts to calculate them from other parameters.
Conflicts may result if you enter more parameters than are absolutely
necessary for a contour. In such a case, try entering less parameters
and allowing ShopTurn to calculate as many parameters as possible.
In the case of path milling, the contour is always machined in the

programmed direction. By programming the contour in the clockwise
direction or counterclockwise direction, you can determine whether
the contour is machined with down-cut milling or up-cut milling (see
the following table).

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
Outside contour
Required direction of CW spindle rotation CCW spindle rotation
rotation for machining
Down-cut Programming in clockwise direction Programming in counterclockwise direction,
CCW cutter radius compensation CW cutter radius compensation
Up-cut Programming in counterclockwise direction, Programming in clockwise direction
CW cutter radius compensation CCW cutter radius compensation
Inside contour
Required direction of CW spindle rotation CCW spindle rotation
rotation for machining
Down-cut Programming in counterclockwise direction, Programming in clockwise direction
CCW cutter radius compensation CW cutter radius compensation
Up-cut Programming in clockwise direction Programming in counterclockwise direction,
CW cutter radius compensation CCW cutter radius compensation
Contour transition As a transition between two contour elements, you can choose a radius
elements or a chamfer. The transition is always appended to the end of a contour
element. The contour transition is selected in the parameterization screen
form of the contour element.
You can use a contour transition element whenever there is an

intersection between two successive elements which can be calculated
from input values. Otherwise you must use the "Straight/Circle" contour
elements.
Additional commands For each contour element, you can enter any additional commands in G
code format, for example, you can program a special feedrate for the
circle contour element.
You can enter the additional commands (max. 40 characters) in the
extended parameterization screen form ("All parameters" soft key).
Additional functions The following additional functions are available for programming a
contour:
• Tangent to preceding element
You can program the transition to the preceding element as a tangent.
• Dialog selection
If two different possible contours result from the parameters entered
thus far, one of the options must be selected.
• Close contour
From the current position, you can close the contour with a straight
line to the starting point.

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
Create contour
elements
Ø Select a contour element via soft key.
… Ø Enter all the data available from the workpiece drawing in the
input form (e.g. length of straight line, target position, transition to
next element, angle of lead, etc.).
The contour element is added to the contour.
Ø Repeat the procedure until the contour is complete.
The programmed contour is transferred to the process plan.
All If you want to display further parameters for certain contour elements,
parameters
e.g. to enter additional commands, press the "All parameters" soft
key.
Define pole If you wish to enter the contour elements Diagonal line and Circle/arc
in polar coordinates, you must first define a pole.
Continue Pole
Ø Press the "Continue" and "Pole" soft keys.
Ø Enter the coordinates of the pole.
The pole is defined. You can now choose between "Cartesian" and
"Polar" in the input screen form for the Diagonal line and Circle/arc
contour elements.
Tangent to preceding When entering data for a contour element you can program the
element transition to the preceding element as a tangent.
Tangent to Ø Press the "Tangent to prec. elem." soft key.

prec. elem.
The angle to the preceding element α2 is set to 0°. The "tangential"
selection appears in the parameter input field.
Select a dialog When entering data for a contour element, there may be two different
contour options, one of which you have to select.
dialog
The selected contour appears in the graphics window as a solid black

line and the alternative contour appears as a dashed green line.

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
Accept Ø Press the "Accept dialog" soft key to accept the chosen
dialog
alternative.
Close the contour A contour always has to be closed. If you do not wish to create all
contour elements from starting point to starting point, you can close
the contour from the current position to the starting point.
Continue
Close Ø Press the "Continue" and "Close contour" soft keys.
contour
ShopTurn inserts a straight line between your current position and the
starting point.
Parameters Description for contour element "straight line" Unit

X End point in the X direction (abs. or inc.) mm
Y End point in the Y direction (abs. or inc.) mm
L Length of line mm
α1 Starting angle to X axis Degrees
L1 abs.: distance between pole and end point mm
inc.: distance between final point and end point mm
ϕ1 abs.: polar angle between pole and end point Degrees
inc.: polar angle between final point and end point Degrees
L Length of line mm
Y End point in Y direction (abs. or inc.) – (calculated from Yα or vice versa) mm
Yα End angle (abs. or inc.) – (calculated from Y or vice versa) Degrees
Z End point in the Z direction (abs. or inc.) mm
L Length of line mm
α1 Starting angle to Y axis Degrees
Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C and Peripheral surface Y – Polar:

5 5
5.6 Contour milling

L Length of line mm
L Length of line mm
following element R: Radius as transition element to next contour element mm
Additional command Any additional command in G code format
Parameters Description for contour element "circle" Unit
Direction of rotation
Clockwise rotation
Counterclockwise rotation
R Radius of circle mm
X End point in the X direction (abs. or inc.) mm
I Circle center point in X direction (abs. or inc.) mm
J Circle center point in Y direction (abs. or inc.) mm
β1 End angle to X axis Degrees
L2 abs.: distance between pole and center of circle mm
inc.: distance between final point and center of circle mm

5 5
5.6 Contour milling

abs.: polar angle between pole and center of circle Degrees
ϕ2 inc.: polar angle between final point and center of circle Degrees
Starting angle to X axis Degrees
α2 Tangential transition: α2=0
β1 End angle to X axis Degrees
Y End point in Y direction (abs. or inc.) – (calculated from Yα or vice versa) mm
Yα End angle (abs. or inc.) – (calculated from Y or vice versa) Degrees
Jα Circle center point in Y direction (abs. or inc.) Degrees
K Circle center point in Z direction (abs. or inc.) mm
β1 End angle to Y axis Degrees
Angle of aperture of circle Degrees
β2
Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C and Peripheral surface Y –
L1 Polar: mm
abs.: distance between pole and end point mm
inc.: distance between final point and end point
ϕ1 Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Degrees
abs.: polar angle between pole and end point Degrees
inc.: polar angle between final point and end point
L2 Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. mm
abs.: distance between pole and center of circle mm
inc.: distance between final point and center of circle
ϕ2 Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Degrees
abs.: polar angle between pole and center of circle Degrees
inc.: polar angle between final point and center of circle
α1 Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Degrees
Angle to preceding element
β1 Tangential transition: α2=0 Degrees
End angle to Y axis Degrees
β2
Angle of aperture of circle

5 5
5.6 Contour milling

K Circle center point in Z direction (abs. or inc.) mm
β1 End angle to Y axis Degrees
following element R: Radius as transition element to next contour element mm
command
5.6.4 Changing a contour
You can change a previously created contour later. Individual contour

elements can be
• Appended
• Modified
• Inserted
• Deleted.
If your program contains two contours of the same name, changes to

the one contour are automatically applied to the second contour with
the same name.
Append a contour Ø Select the contour in the process plan.

element
Ø Position the cursor on the last element before the end of the
contour.
Ø Select the required contour element via soft key.

… Ø Enter the parameters in the input screen.
The required contour element is appended to the contour.
Alter a contour element Ø Select the contour in the process plan.

5 5
5.6 Contour milling

modify.
The associated input form is opened and an enlarged view of the

selected element appears in the programming graphic.
Ø Enter the desired changes.
The current values for the contour element are accepted and the
change is immediately visible in the programming graphics.
Alter the selected dialog If when you entered the data for a contour element there were two
different contour options and you chose the wrong one, you can alter
your choice afterwards. If the contour is unique as a result of other
parameters, the system will not prompt you to make a selection.
Ø Open the input screen form for the contour element.
Change Ø Press the "Change selection" soft key.

selection
The two contour options are displayed again.
dialog
Accept Ø Press the "Accept dialog" soft key.

dialog
The chosen alternative is accepted.
Insert contour element Ø Select the contour in the process plan.
Ø Position the cursor on the contour element after which the new
element is to be inserted.
Ø Select a new contour element via soft key.

… Ø Enter the parameters in the input screen.
The contour element is inserted in the contour. Subsequent contour

elements are updated automatically according to the new contour
status.

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
When you insert a new element into a contour, the remaining contour
elements are not interpreted until you select the symbol for the first
subsequent element alongside the graphics window using the cursor.
The end point of the inserted element may not correspond to the start
point of the subsequent element. In this case, ShopTurn outputs the
error message "Geometrical data contradictory". To rectify the
problem, insert an incline without entering parameter values.
Delete a contour element Ø Select the contour in the process plan.

delete.
Delete Ø Press the "Delete element" soft key.

element
The selected contour element is deleted.

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
5.6.5 Path milling
The "Path milling" function is used when you want to machine open or
closed contours. Before you can mill the contour, you must enter the
contour.
You can select the machining mode (roughing or finishing) for path
milling. If you want to rough and then finish, you have to call the
machining cycle twice (Block 1 = roughing, Block 2 = finishing). The
programmed parameters are retained on the second call.
It is also possible to choose between machining the contour with a cutter
radius offset and traversing the center path.
Cutter radius The cutter radius offset allows you to machine a programmed contour to
compensation the right or left of the contour. You can choose between different
approach and retract modes as well as between different approach and
retract strategies.
• Approach/Retract mode
You can approach or retract from the contour in a quadrant,
semicircle or along a straight line.
In the case of a quadrant or semicircle, you have to specify the radius
of the cutter center path and for a straight line, the distance from the
outer edge of the cutter to the start point or end point of the contour.
You can also specify different modes for approach and retraction, for
example, approach in quadrant mode and retract in semicircle mode.
Approaching on a straight line, in a quadrant and in a semicircle
• Approach/Retract strategy
Approaching in the plane is performed first in the Z direction in the
depth and then in the XY plane. Retraction is performed in reverse
order.
In the case of three-dimensional approach/retraction, traversing is
performed simultaneously in the depth and in the plane.
You can also specify different strategies for approach and retraction,
for example, approach in the plane and retract three-dimensionally.

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
Center path If you do not want to use cutter radius compensation, the programmed
contour is milled on the center path.
In this case, approaching and retraction is only possible along a straight
line or vertical. Vertical approach/retraction can be used for closed
contours, for example.
Slot wall offset When you want to mill a contour on the peripheral surface ("peripheral
surface/peripheral surface C" machining plane), you can work with or
without a slot wall offset.
• Slot wall offset off

ShopTurn creates slots with parallel walls when the tool diameter is
equal to the slot width.
If the slot width is larger than the tool diameter, the slot walls will not
be parallel.
• Slot wall offset on
ShopTurn creates slots with parallel walls also when the slot width is
larger than the tool diameter.
If you want to work with a slot wall offset, you must not program the
contour of the slot, but instead the imagined center path of a bolt inserted
in the slot whereby the bolt touches both walls. The parameter D is used
to specify the slot width.
Contour Ø Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Path milling" soft keys.
milling >
Path
milling >

5 5
5.6 Contour milling

C/Peripheral surface C if the tool is approached vertically for roughing)
Machining type Roughing
Finishing
Radius Input defining which side of the contour the milling cutter machines in the
compensation programmed direction:
Machining to the right of the contour
Machining to the left of the contour
Machining along the center path

Z1 Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) mm
UZ Finishing allowance in depth (for roughing only) mm
UXY Finishing allowance in the plane (only for roughing and to the left of the contour) mm
Slot wall offset Activate slot wall offset
D Offset to programmed path (only with activated slot wall offset) mm
X1 Depth with reference to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.) mm
UX Finishing allowance in depth (for roughing only) mm
UYZ Finishing allowance in the plane (only for roughing and to the left of the contour) mm
End face Y:
CP Reference point Degrees
UZ Finishing allowance in depth (for roughing only) mm
UXY Finishing allowance in the plane (only for roughing and to the left of the contour) mm
X1 Depth with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) mm
UX Finishing allowance in depth (for roughing only) mm
UYZ Finishing allowance in the plane (only for roughing and to the left of the contour) mm

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
Approach mode Approach mode:

In a quadrant: Part of a spiral (only with path milling left and right of the contour)
In a semicircle: Part of a spiral (only with path milling left and right of the contour)
In a straight line: Slope in space
Perpendicular: Perpendicular to the path (only with path milling on the center
path)
Approach
strategy Axis-by-axis
Three-dimensionally (not with perpendicular approach mode)

R1 Approach radius (only for quadrant or semicircle approach mode) mm
L1 Approach distance (only for straight-line approach mode) mm
FZ Depth infeed feedrate mm/tooth
(for end face/end face C and end face Y with axis-by-axis approach strategy) mm/min
FX Depth infeed feedrate mm/tooth
(for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y with axis-by- mm/min
axis approach strategy)
Retract mode Retract mode
In a quadrant: Part of a spiral (only with path milling left and right of the contour)
In a semicircle: Part of a spiral (only with path milling left and right of the contour)
In a straight line: Slope in space
Perpendicular: Perpendicular to the path (only with path milling on the center
path)
Retract strategy
Axis-by-axis
Three-dimensionally (not with perpendicular retraction mode)

R2 Retraction radius (only for quadrant or semicircle retraction mode) mm
L2 Retraction distance (only for straight-line retraction mode) mm
Retraction If more than one depth infeed is necessary, specify the retraction height to which
mode the tool retracts between the separate infeeds (in the transition from the end of
the contour to the beginning).
• To retraction plane
• Z0+safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or
X0+safety clearance (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and
peripheral surface Y only)
• Safety clearance
• No retraction

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
5.6.6 Predrilling contour pockets
When removing stock from a contour pocket, if you want the cutter to
plunge into the material vertically and if a milling cutter with an end
tooth is not available, you must predrill the pocket first. To prevent the
drill slipping during drilling, you can center it first.
Before you drill the pocket, you must enter the pocket contour. If you
want to center before predrilling, you have to program the two
machining steps in separate blocks.
The number and positions of the necessary predrilled holes depend

on the specific circumstances (such as shape of contour, tool, plane
infeed, finishing allowance) and are calculated by ShopTurn.
If you mill several pockets and want to avoid unnecessary tool

changeover, predrill all the pockets first and then remove the stock. In
this case, for centering/predrilling, you also have to enter the para-
meters that appear when you press the "All parameters" soft key.
Then program as follows:
1. Contour pocket 1
2. Centering
3. Contour pocket 2
4. Centering
5. Contour pocket 1
6. Predrilling
7. Contour pocket 2
8. Predrilling
9. Contour pocket 1
10. Remove stock
11. Contour pocket 2
12. Remove stock
If you machine a pocket completely, i.e. center, predrill and remove

stock in immediate succession, and do not complete the additional
parameters on centering/predrilling, ShopTurn loads these parameter
values from the stock removal (roughing) machining step.
Centering
Contour Ø Press the "Milling", "Contour Milling", "Predrilling" and "Centering"

milling > soft keys.
Predrilling Centering
>

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
All Ø Press the "All parameters" soft key if you want to enter additional
parameters
parameters.
Parameters Description of centering Unit

TR Reference tool for centering
D Cutting edge of reference tool (1 or 2)
Z1 Depth with reference to Z0 (inc.) mm
X1 Depth with reference to X0 (inc.) mm
UYZ Finishing allowance in plane mm
End face Y:
Z1 Depth with reference to Z0 (inc.) mm
X1 Depth with reference to X0 (inc.) mm

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
Retraction If more than one insertion point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which
mode the tool retracts between insertion points.
• Z0 + safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or
X0 + safety clearance (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and
If there are no islands larger than Z0 (X0) in the pocket area, Z0 + safety clearance
(X0 + safety clearance) can be programmed as the retraction mode.
Predrilling
Contour Ø Press the "Milling", "Contour Milling", "Predrilling" and "Predrilling"

milling > soft keys in this order.
Predrilling Predrilling
>
parameters
parameters.
Parameters Description of predrilling Unit

TR Reference tool for predrilling
UZ Finishing allowance in depth mm
UX Finishing allowance in depth mm

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
End face Y:
mode the tool retracts between insertion points:

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
5.6.7 Milling contour pockets (roughing)
The "Mill pocket" function is used when you want to mill a pocket on
the end face or peripheral surface.
Before you can program stock removal from the pocket, you must
enter the contour of the pocket and, if applicable, the contour of an
island.
Stock is removed from the pocket parallel to the contour from the
inside to the outside. The direction is determined by the machining
direction (climb/conventional) (see "Changing program settings").
If an island is located in the pocket, ShopTurn automatically takes this
into account during stock removal.
You can select the machining mode (roughing or finishing) for stock
removal. If you want to rough and then finish, you have to call the
machining cycle twice (Block 1 = roughing, Block 2 = finishing). The
programmed parameters are retained on the second call. For further
details on finishing, please read the Section "Finishing the contour
pocket".
Contour Ø Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Pocket milling" soft
milling > keys.
Pocket
milling
Ø Select "Roughing" machining mode.
Parameters Description for roughing Unit

Clamp/release spindle (only for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y, and for
End face C/Peripheral surface C if the tool is inserted in the center for roughing)
Machining
Roughing
type

5 5
5.6 Contour milling

End face Y:
Start point Determine start point automatically or enter it manually.
Manual entry allows for a start point outside the pocket, whereby straight line
machining into the pocket is performed first, e.g. for a pocket with a side opening
without any insertion.
X Start point X (abs.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y mm
Y with manual start point) mm
Y Start point Y (abs.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y mm
Z with manual start point) mm

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
Insertion Insertion strategy:

Oscillation: Oscillating insertion with the programmed angle (EW).
Helical: Helical insertion with the programmed radius (ER) and the programmed
gradient (EP).
Center: For this insertion strategy, a milling cutter is required that cuts in the center.
It is inserted at the programmed feedrate (FZ or FX).
FZ Depth infeed feedrate (for end face/end face C and end face Y with central mm/tooth
insertion only) mm/min
5.6.8 Removing residual material from pocket
When you have removed stock from a pocket (with/without islands) and
residual material remains in place, this is automatically detected by
ShopTurn. You can use a suitable tool to remove this residual material
without having to machine the whole pocket again, i.e. avoiding
unnecessary idle motions.
material.
The residual material is calculated on the basis of the milling cutter used
for stock removal.
If you mill several pockets and want to avoid unnecessary tool

changeover, remove stock from all the pockets first and then remove the
residual material. In this case, for removing the residual material, you
also have to enter a value for the "Reference tool TR" parameter that
appears when you press the "All parameters" soft key. Then program as
follows:
1. Contour pocket 1
2. Remove stock
3. Contour pocket 2
4. Remove stock
5. Contour pocket 1

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
6. Remove residual material

7. Contour pocket 2
8. Remove residual material
Contour Ø Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Pocket resid. mat." soft
milling > keys.
Pocket
resid. mat.
parameters
parameters.

Machining
Roughing
type
TR Reference tool for residual material

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
End face Y:
5.6.9 Finishing the contour pocket
If you programmed stock removal from the pocket with a finishing

allowance for the base or edge of the pocket, you still have to finish
the pocket.
Separate blocks must be programmed for finishing the base and for
finishing the edge. In each case, the pocket will only be machined
once.
ShopTurn takes into account any islands as was the case for
roughing.
You can program "Path milling" as an alternative to "Edge finishing".

Optimization possibilities are also offered for the approach/retract
strategy and the approach/retract mode. Then program as follows:
1. Contour pocket
2. Contour island
3. Remove stock (roughing)
4. Contour pocket
6. Contour island
Contour Ø Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Pocket milling" soft
milling > keys.
Pocket
milling

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
Ø Select machining mode "Finish base" or "Finish edge".
Parameters Description of finishing the base Unit

Machining
Finishing the base
type
End face Y:

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
Start point Determine start point automatically or enter it manually
Manual entry allows for a start point outside the pocket, whereby straight line
machining into the pocket is performed first, e.g. for a pocket with a side opening
without any insertion.
X Start point X (abs.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y mm
with manual start point)
Y Start point Y (abs.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y mm
with manual start point)
Y Start point Y (abs.) – (only for peripheral face/peripheral face C and peripheral face mm
Y with manual start point)
Z Start point Z (abs.) – (only for peripheral face/peripheral face C and peripheral face mm
Y with manual start point)
Insertion Insertion strategy:
Oscillation: Oscillating insertion with the programmed angle (EW).
Helical: Helical insertion with the programmed radius (ER) and the programmed
gradient (EP).
Center: For this insertion strategy, a milling cutter is required that cuts in the center.
It is inserted at the programmed feedrate (FZ or FX).
FZ Depth infeed feedrate (for end face/end face C and end face Y mm/tooth
with central insertion only) mm/min

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
Parameters Description of finishing the edge Unit

Machining
Finishing the edge
mode
End face Y:
mode the tool retracts between insertion points:

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
5.6.10 Milling contour spigots (roughing)
The "Mill spigot" function is used when you want to mill a spigot on the
end face or peripheral surface.
Before you mill the spigot, you must first enter a blank contour and
then one or more spigot contours. The blank contour defines the outer
limits of the material. The tool moves at rapid traverse outside this
area. Material is then removed between the blank contour and spigot
contour.
You can select the machining mode (roughing or finishing) for milling.
If you want to rough and then finish, you have to call the machining
cycle twice (Block 1 = roughing, Block 2 = finishing). The programmed
parameters are retained on the second call. For further details on
finishing, please read the Section "Finishing the contour spigot".
If you only program a blank contour without a second contour for the
spigot, you can face mill the blank contour.
start point is calculated by ShopTurn.
2. The tool first infeeds to the machining depth and then approaches
the spigot contour from the side in a quadrant at machining
feedrate.
3. The spigot is cleared in parallel with the contours from the outside
in. The direction is determined by the machining direction
(climb/conventional) (see "Changing program settings").
4. When the first plane of the spigot has been cleared, the tool
retracts from the contour in a quadrant and then infeeds to the next
machining depth.
5. The spigot is again approached in a quadrant and cleared in
parallel with the contours from outside in.
6. Steps 4 and 5 are repeated until the programmed spigot depth is
reached.
Contour Ø Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Spigot milling" soft
milling > keys.
Spigot
milling
Ø Select "Roughing" machining mode.

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
Parameters Description for roughing Unit

Machining
Roughing
type
End face Y:

5 5
5.6 Contour milling

Retraction If more than one approach point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which
mode the tool retracts between approach points:
If there are no spigots or other elements in the machining range higher than Z0 (X0),
Z0 + safety clearance (X0 + safety clearance) can be programmed as the retraction
mode.
5.6.11 Removing residual material from the spigot
When you have milled a contour spigot and residual material remains
in place, this is automatically detected by ShopTurn. You can use a
suitable tool to remove this residual material without having to
machine the whole spigot again, i.e. avoiding unnecessary idle
motions.
material.
The residual material is calculated on the basis of the milling cutter

used for clearing.
If you mill several spigots and want to avoid unnecessary tool

changeover, clear all the spigots first and then remove the residual
material. In this case, for removing the residual material, you also
have to enter a value for the "Reference tool TR" parameter that
appears when you press the "All parameters" soft key. Then program
as follows:
1. Contour blank 1
2. Contour spigot 1
3. Clear spigot 1
4. Contour blank 2
5. Contour spigot 2
6. Clear spigot 2
7. Contour blank 1
8. Contour spigot 1
9. Clear residual material spigot 1
10. Contour blank 2
11. Contour spigot 2
12. Clear residual material spigot 2

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
Contour Ø Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Spigot resid. mat." soft
milling > keys.
Spigot
resid. mat.
parameters
parameters.

Machining
Roughing
type
TR Reference tool for residual material
End face Y:

5 5
5.6 Contour milling

5.6.12 Finishing the contour spigot
If you programmed a finishing allowance for the base or edge of the

spigot in spigot milling, you still have to finish the spigot.
Separate blocks must be programmed for finishing the base and for
finishing the edge. In each case, the spigot will only be machined
once.
You can program "Path milling" as an alternative to "Edge finishing".

Optimization possibilities are also offered for the approach/retract
strategy and the approach/retract mode. Then program as follows:
1. Contour blank
2. Contour spigot
3. Mill spigot (roughing)
4. Contour blank
6. Contour spigot
Contour Ø Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Spigot milling" soft
milling > keys.
Spigot
milling
Ø Select "Finish base" or "Finish edge" machining mode.

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
Parameters Description of finishing the base Unit

Machining
Finishing the base
type
End face Y:

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
mode the tool retracts between approach points.
If there are no spigots or other elements in the machining range higher than Z0 (X0),
Z0 + safety clearance (X0 + safety clearance) can be programmed as the retraction
mode.
Parameters Description of finishing the edge Unit

Machining
Finishing the edge
mode
End face Y:
mode the tool retracts between approach points.

5 5
5.6 Contour milling
X0 + safety clearance (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peri-
pheral surface Y only)
If there are no spigots or other elements in the machining range higher than Z0
(X0), Z0 + safety clearance (X0 + safety clearance) can be programmed as the
retraction mode.

5 5
5.7 Calling a subroutine

If you require the same machining steps in the programming of
different workpieces, you can define these machining steps in a sepa-
rate routine. You can then call this subroutine in any programs. Identi-
cal machining steps therefore only have to be programmed once.
ShopTurn does not distinguish between main programs and subrou-

tines, i.e. you can call a "normal" ShopTurn or G code program as a
subroutine in another ShopTurn program. In this subroutine, you can
also call another subroutine. The maximum nesting depth is 8 subrou-
tines.
You cannot not insert subroutines among blocks chained by the
control.
If you want to call a ShopTurn program as a subroutine, the program

must already have been calculated previously (load or simulate pro-
gram in Machine Auto mode). This is not necessary for G code sub-
routines.
The subroutine must always be stored in the NC main memory (in a

separate directory "XYZ" or in the "ShopTurn", "Part programs", "Sub-
routines" directories). If you want to call a subroutine located on an-
other drive, you can use G code command "EXTCALL".
Subroutine call
"DRILL"
Subroutine call
Please note that ShopTurn evaluates the settings from the program
header of the subroutine, excluding the blank settings, when the sub-
routine is called. These settings also remain active even after the sub-
routine has ended.
If you wish to activate the settings from the program header for the
main program again, you can make the settings again in the main pro-
gram after calling the subroutine (see "Changing program settings").

5 5
Ø Create a ShopTurn or G code program that you would like to call

as a subroutine in another program.
Ø Position the cursor in the process plan of the main program on the
program block after which the subroutine call is to be inserted.
Sub- Ø Press the "Various" and "Subroutine" soft keys.

routine >
Ø Enter the path of the subroutine if the desired subroutine is not

stored in the same directory as the main program.
Directory Path to enter

ShopTurn ShopTurn
Separate directory XYZ XYZ
Part programs MPF
Subroutines SPF
Ø Enter the name of the subroutine that you want to insert.

You only need to enter the file extension (*.mpf or *.spf) if the sub-
routine does not have the file extension specified for the directory
in which the subroutine is stored.
Directory Specified file extension

ShopTurn *.mpf
Separate directory XYZ *.mpf
Part programs *.mpf
Subroutines *.spf
The subroutine call is inserted in the main program.

5 5
5.8 Repeat program blocks

If certain steps in the machining of a workpiece have to be executed
more than once, it is only necessary to program these steps once.
ShopTurn allows you to repeat program blocks.
You must mark the program blocks that you want to repeat with a start
and end marker. You can then call these program blocks up to 9999
times again within a program. The markers must be unique, i.e. they
must have different names.
You can also set markers and repeats after creating the program, but
not within chained program blocks.
It is also possible to use the same marker as the end marker of the
preceding program blocks and as the start marker for the following
program blocks.
Start mark
End mark
Repetition
Repeat program blocks
Set Ø Press the "Various" and "Set marker" soft keys.

marker >
Ø Enter a name.
A start marker is inserted behind the current block.
Ø Enter the program blocks that you want to repeat later.
Set Ø Press the "Various" and "Set marker" soft keys.

marker >
Ø Enter a name.
An end marker is inserted behind the current block.
Ø Continue programming up to the point where you want to repeat

the program blocks.

5 5
Ø Press the "Various" and "Repeat" soft keys.

Repeat >
Ø Enter the names of the start and end markers and the number of
times the blocks are to be repeated.
The marked program blocks are repeated.

5 5
5.9 Machining with the counterspindle

If your turning machine has a counterspindle, you can machine work-
pieces using turning, drilling and milling functions on the front and rear
faces without reclamping the workpiece manually.
Before machining commences on the rear face, the counterspindle
must grip the workpiece, remove it from the main spindle and move it
to the new machining position. You can program these operations
with the "Counterspindle" function.
ShopTurn offers the following five programming steps:

• Gripping: Gripping the workpiece with the counterspindle
• Pulling: Pulling the workpiece out of the main spindle with the
counterspindle
• Rear face: Moving the workpiece with the counterspindle to the
new machining position
• Complete: Gripping, pulling (optionally with parting) and rear face
steps
• Front face: Work offset for machining the next front face (for bars)
If you start to execute a program containing a counterspindle machin-

ing operation, the counterspindle is first retracted to the return position
Work offsets In the case of the "Pulling" and "Rear face" functions, you must speci-
fy in which work offset ShopTurn should save the shifted coordinate
system; you do not have to specify these work offsets beforehand.
In the case of the "Front face" function, however, you must specify the
work offset that you want to use.
Caution
The work offsets selected in the "Pulling" and "Rear face" functions
will change even if you only start one block search or simulation. You
should therefore not use these work offsets for other purposes at the
same time, otherwise problems may arise.
To simplify the programming process, programming suggestions for

three typical applications are provided below:
• Machine main spindle – Transfer workpiece – Machine
counterspindle
• Machine counterspindle (without first transferring workpiece)
• Machine bars

5 5
Machine main spindle – Transfer workpiece – Machine

counterspindle
The programming for this operation might look like this:
Alternative 1: Alternative 2:
1. Machine main spindle 1. Machine main spindle
2. Gripping 2. Complete (gripping, pulling
3. Pulling and rear face)
4. Rear face 3. Machine counterspindle
5. Machine counterspindle
Gripping ShopTurn first synchronizes the main spindle and counterspindle. The
counterspindle then moves towards the workpiece at rapid traverse to
programmed position ZR and then continues at reduced feedrate FR
to transfer position Z1. Whether it is the front edge or stop edge of the
counterspindle that moves up to the position is defined in the
"Spindles" screen form (see "Counterspindle settings").
As an alternative, the counterspindle moves to the limit stop as of a
particular distance. This distance and the corresponding feedrate are
programmed in a machine data code.
Machining on the workpiece rear face is not affected if you specify an

angular offset of α1 so as to grip the workpiece better.
Pulling The counterspindle pulls the workpiece out of the main spindle by
amount Z1.
ShopTurn shifts the coordinate system accordingly and saves the
offset in the selected work offset.
Rear face The counterspindle moves with the workpiece at rapid traverse to the
new machining position ZW. The workpiece zero moves too and shifts
by ZV (with sign) from the front face to the rear face of the workpiece.
The coordinate system is then transposed into a mirror image for
machining on the rear face and saved in the selected work offset.
Synchronous operation of both spindles is disabled.
The counterspindle is now the master spindle.
Machine counterspindle When the rear face is machined, ShopTurn automatically transposes
the coordinate system into a mirror image, i.e. you program the
machining operation for the rear face as for the front face.
Machine counterspindle (without first transferring workpiece)

The programming might look like this:
1. Rear face

5 5
WO: Work offset is only activated

ZV: Parameter is not calculated.
Rear face Please note the following special features of the "Rear face" program
step when machining on the counterspindle without first transferring
the workpiece. The work offset that you choose in the parameteriza-
tion screen form is only activated and not calculated. This means that
the workpiece zero for counterspindle machining should be stored in
the work offset.
In addition, parameter ZV is not calculated.
Machine bars
If you use bars to produce your workpieces, you can machine several
workpieces on the front and rear face by starting the program just
once.
Machining of bars can be programmed as follows, for example:
1. Program header specifying the work offset in which the workpiece
zero is stored
2. Machine main spindle
3. Complete (gripping, pulling (with Pull blank parameters: Yes;
Parting cycle: Yes), rear face)
4. Parting
6. End of program with number of workpieces to be machined
Alternatively you can program the machining of bars as follows:

1. Start marker
2. Machine main spindle
3. Complete (gripping, pulling (with parameters Pull blank: Yes;
Parting cycle: Yes), rear face)
4. Parting
6. Front face
7. End marker
8. Repeat from start to end marker
Complete If you program the "Complete" program step, you must enter "Pull
blank: Yes" and "Parting cycle: Yes" in the "Pulling" step. Then you
can program the "Parting" function. The workpiece is then cut off after
it has been gripped or pulled out of the main spindle.
You do not need to specify the amount by which the workpiece is
pulled out of the main spindle as this is calculated from the parting
cycle parameters.
The two program blocks "Complete" and "Parting" are linked in the
machining plan.

5 5
Front face As soon as machining on the rear face of a workpiece is finished,

machining on the front of the next workpiece starts. You can activate
a work offset in the meantime for machining the front face using the
"Front face" function. You will typically use the work offset that was
active before the workpiece was gripped.
The main spindle is now the master spindle again.
Counter- Ø Press the "Various" and "Counterspindle" soft keys.

spindle >
Function Select from five different functions:

• Gripping
• Pulling
• Rear face
• Front face
• Complete
Gripping:
XP Part position of tool in X direction (abs.) mm
ZP Part position of tool in Z direction (abs.) mm
Rinse chuck Rinse counterspindle chuck or not
S Spindle speed (main spindle and counterspindle) rpm
Direction of Direction of rotation of the main spindle (and counterspindle):
rotation
No spindle rotation
α1 Angular offset of counterspindle on gripping Degrees
Z1 Transfer position (abs.) mm
ZR Position at which traversal at reduced feedrate starts (abs. or inc.) mm
FR Reduced feedrate mm/min
Limit stop Yes: The counterspindle comes to a halt a specified distance from the
transfer position Z1 and then traverses at the specified feedrate as far
as the limit stop.
No: The counterspindle traverses to the transfer position Z1.
Pulling:
Work offset Work offset in which the coordinate system displaced by Z1 must be saved.
Z1 Amount by which the workpiece is pulled out of the main spindle (inc.) mm
F Feed mm/min
Rear face:
Work offset Work offset in which the coordinate system shifted to ZW and displayed by ZV
must be saved.
Z3W Machining position for special axis (abs.) mm
ZV Workpiece zero offset in Z direction (inc., the sign is also evaluated) mm

5 5
Front face:
Work offset Work offset for machining the next front face
Complete:
XP Part position of tool in X direction (abs.) mm
ZP Part position of tool in Z direction (abs.) mm
Gripping:
Rinse chuck Rinse counterspindle chuck or not
S Spindle speed (main spindle and counterspindle) rpm
Direction of Direction of rotation of the main spindle (and counterspindle):
rotation
No spindle rotation
α1 Angular offset of counterspindle on gripping Degrees
Z1 Transfer position (abs.) mm
ZR Position at which traversal at reduced feedrate starts (abs. or inc.) mm
FR Reduced feedrate mm/min
Limit stop Yes: The counterspindle comes to a halt a specified distance from the
transfer position Z1 and then traverses at the specified feedrate as far as
the limit stop.
No: The counterspindle traverses to the transfer position Z1.
Pulling:
Pull blank Yes: Pull blank one blank length (preparation for next workpiece)
No: Do not pull blank
F Feedrate for pulling mm/min
Parting cycle Yes: The workpiece is parted after it has been pulled out.
No: No automatic parting.
Rear face:
Work offset Work offset in which the coordinate system shifted to ZW and displayed by ZV
must be saved.
Z3W Machining position for special axis (abs.) mm
ZV Workpiece zero offset in Z direction (inc., the sign is also evaluated) mm

5 5
5.10 Changing program settings
5.10 Changing program settings

All parameters specified in the program header with the exception of
the blank shape and the unit of measurement can be changed at any
point in the program. It is also possible to change the basic setting for
the direction of rotation of machining in the case of milling.
The settings in the program header are modal, i.e. they remain active
until they are changed.
Retraction If you program a new return plane, it will not be taken into account
until after the next tool change.
Machining direction The machining direction of rotation (down-cut or up-cut) is defined as

the direction of movement of the milling tooth with respect to the work-
piece, i.e. ShopTurn evaluates this parameter in conjunction with the
direction of rotation of the spindle for milling, with the exception of
path milling.
The basic setting for the direction of rotation of machining is pro-
grammed with a machine data code.
Down-cut Up-cut
Direction of rotation of machining for milling

a pocket on the end face
Ø Press the "Various" and "Settings" soft keys.

Settings >
Ø Enter the desired parameters.
For a description of the parameters, see Section "Create new
program".
The new settings for the program are loaded.

5 5
5.11 Calling work offsets
5.11 Calling work offsets

You can call work offsets (G54, etc.) from any program.
You can use these offsets, for example, when you want to machine
workpieces with various blank dimensions using the same program.
The offset will, in this case, adapt the workpiece zero to the new
blank.
You define the work offsets in the work offset list (see Section
"Defining work offsets"). You can also view the coordinates of the
selected offset here.
Transfor- Ø Press the "Various", "Transformation" and "Work offset" soft keys.
mation >
Work
offset >
Ø Select one of the work offsets or the standard offset.
-or-
Ø Enter the desired offset directly in the input field.
-or-

offset >
The work offset list is displayed.
-and-
Ø Select a work offset.
-and-
To Ø Press the "To program" soft key.

program
The work offset is loaded into the parameterization screen form.
To deselect the work offsets, select the standard offset or enter zero
in the field.

5 5
5.12 Defining coordinate transformations

To make programming easier, you can transform the coordinate
system. Use this possibility, for example, to rotate the coordinate
system.
Coordinate transformations only apply in the current program.

You can define displacement, rotation, scaling or mirroring. You can
select between a new or an additive coordinate transformation.
In the case of a new coordinate transformation, all previously defined
coordinate transformations are deselected. An additive coordinate
transformation acts in addition to the currently selected coordinate
transformations.
• Displacement
For each axis, you can program a displacement of the zero point.
New offset Additive offset
• Rotation
You can turn the X and Y axes through a specific angle. A positive
angle corresponds to rotation in the counterclockwise direction.
New rotation Additive rotation
On turning machines without a physical Y axis, problems with the

coordinate system can occur if the axis is rotated.

5 5
• C axis rotation
You can turn the C axis through a specific angle to enable sub-
sequent machining operations to be performed at a particular
position on the end face or peripheral surface.
The direction of rotation is set in a machine data code.
New C axis rotation Additive C axis rotation
• Scaling
You can specify a scale factor for the active machining plane as
well as for the tool axis. The programmed coordinates are then
multiplied by this factor.
New scaling Additive scaling
• Mirroring
Furthermore, you can mirror all axes.
Enter the axis to be mirrored in each case.
New mirroring Additive mirroring

5 5
Transfor- Ø Press the "Various" and "Transformation" soft keys.

mation >
Offset Mirroring Ø Select the coordinate transformation using the soft key.
> ... >
Ø Select whether you want to program a new or an additive

coordinate transformation.
Ø Enter the desired coordinates.

5 5
5.13 Programming the approach/return cycle

If you wish to reduce the approach to or return from a machining cycle
or solve a complex geometric situation on approach/return, you can
create a special cycle. In this case, ShopTurn ignores the standard
approach/return strategy provided (see Section "Machining cycle
approach and return").
You can insert the approach/return cycle between any ShopTurn

program blocks, but not within chained blocks.
The starting point for the approach/return cycle is the safety clearance
approached after the last machining operation.
If you want to perform a tool change, you can move the tool through a
total of 3 positions (P1 to P3) to the tool change point and through a
further 3 positions (P4 to P6) to the next starting point.
If the tool does not need to be changed, however, you have a total of
6 positions available for the approach to the next starting position.
If 3 to 6 positions are not sufficient for the approach/return, you can

call the cycle several times in succession to program further positions.
Caution
Note that the tool will move from the last position programmed in the
approach/return cycle directly to the starting point for the next
machining operation.
Approach/ Ø Press the "Strai. Circle" and "Approach/Return" soft keys.

Return
F1 Feedrate for approach to first position mm/min

Alternative to rapid traverse
X1 1st position (inc.) or 1st position ∅ (abs.) mm
Z1 2nd position (abs. or inc.) mm
F2 Feedrate for approach to second position mm/min
X2 2nd position (inc.) or 2nd position ∅ (abs.) mm
Z2 2nd position (abs. or inc.) mm
F3 Feedrate for approach to third position mm/min

5 5
X3 3rd position (inc.) or 3rd position ∅ (abs.) mm

Z3 3rd position (abs. or inc.) mm
Tool change TlChngPt: Approach tool change point from the last position programmed and
change tool
Direct: Do not change tool at tool change point, but at the last position
programmed
No: Do not change tool
T Tool name (not with tool change "no")
D Edge number (not with tool change "no")
F4 Feedrate for approach to fourth position mm/min
X4 4th position (inc.) or 4th position ∅ (abs.) mm
Z4 4th position (abs. or inc.) mm
F5 Feedrate for approach to fifth position mm/min
F6 Feedrate for approach to sixth position mm/min

5 5
5.14 Inserting a G code in a ShopTurn program

You can program G code blocks in a ShopTurn program. You can
also insert comments to explain the program.
You will find a detailed description of G code blocks to DIN 66025 in:
References: /PG/, Programming Guide Fundamentals
You cannot insert G code blocks before the program header, after the
end of the program or within a chained sequence of program blocks.
ShopTurn does not display G code blocks in the program graphics.
If you want to stop machining of the workpiece at specific points, you

should program the G code command "M01" at these points in the
process plan (see Section "Controlling the program run").
Caution
If you use a G code command to move the tool into the retraction
zone specified in the program header, you must also move the tool
out again. Otherwise a collision could occur as a result of the
traversing movements in a subsequently programmed ShopTurn
cycle.
Ø Position the cursor in the process plan of a ShopTurn program on

the program block after which a G code block is to be inserted.
Ø Enter the G code commands or comments. The comment must

always start with a semicolon (;).
The newly created G code block is marked with a "G" in front of the
block number in the process plan.

5 5
G code block
G code in a ShopTurn program

5 5
Notes

6 6
06.03 G Code Program
G Code Program
6.1 Creating a G code program .................................................................................... 6-308
6.2 Executing a G code program .................................................................................. 6-311
6.3 G code editor........................................................................................................... 6-313
6.4 Arithmetic parameters ............................................................................................. 6-316

6 6
G Code Program 06.03
6.1 Creating a G code program

If you do not want to program a function using ShopTurn functions,
you can also create a G code program using G code commands
within the ShopTurn user interface.
You can program a G code command according to DIN 66025.

Parameter screen forms also provide assistance for programming
contours, drilling, turning and milling cycles. G code is generated from
the individual forms, which you can recompile back to the screen
forms. The measuring cycle support function must be set up by the
machine manufacturer.
For a more exact description of G code commands to DIN 66025, and

of cycles and measuring cycles, please refer to:
References: /PG/, Programming Guide Fundamentals
/PGZ/, Programming Guide Cycles
/BNM/, User Manual Measuring Cycles
You can call a context-sensitive help function if you require further

information about particular G code commands or cycle parameters
on the PCU 50.
For a more detailed description of the online help, please refer to:
References: /BAD/, HMI Advanced Operator's Guide
Create a G code program
Ø Select the directory in which you want to create a new program.
New G code Ø Press the "New" and "G code program" soft keys.
program
Ø Enter a program name.
Program names may be a maximum of 24 characters in length.
You can use any letters, digits or the underscore symbol (_).
ShopTurn automatically changes lower case to upper case.

6 6
Ø Press the "OK" soft key or the "Input" key.

-or- The G code editor is opened.
Ø Enter the desired G code commands.
Call a tool
Continue
Tools
Ø Select the "Continue" and "Tools" soft keys if you want to select a
>
tool from the tool list.
-and-
-and-
To Ø Press the "To program" soft key.

program
The selected tool is loaded into the G code editor.
Text such as the following is displayed at the current cursor position in
the G code editor: T="ROUGHING80"
Unlike programming with ShopTurn, when you call the tool, the
settings stored in the tool management are not activated auto-
matically.
You therefore have to program the tool change (M6), the direction of
spindle rotation (M3/M4), the spindle speed (S...) and the coolant
(M7/M8) as well as the tool.
Example:
...
T="ROUGHING80" ;Call tool
M6 ;Change tool
M7 M3 S1=2000 ;Switch on coolant and main spindle
...
Cycle support
Contour Turning
Ø Select via a soft key whether you want support in programming
... contours, drilling, milling or turning cycles.
Create Ø Select the cycle you want via the soft key.
contour ...
OK
The cycle is transferred as G code to the editor.
Ø Position the cursor on a cycle in the G code editor if you want to

display the associated parameter screen form again.
Re- Ø Select the "Recompile" soft key.

compile
The parameter screen for the selected cycle appears.

6 6
Edit
Select the "Edit" soft key if you want to go directly back to the G code
editor from a parameter screen form.
Measuring cycle support

Ø Switch to the extended horizontal soft key bar.
Measure Measure Ø Press the "Measure turning" or "Measure milling" soft key.
turning -or- milling
Calibrate Ø Select the required measuring cycle via the soft key.
meas. cal. ...
OK
The measuring cycle is transferred to the editor as G code.
Ø Position the cursor on a measuring cycle in the G code editor to

display the associated parameter screen form again.
Re- Ø Select the "Recompile" soft key.

compile
The parameter screen for the selected measuring cycle appears.
Edit
editor from a parameter screen form.
Online help (PCU 50)

Ø Place the cursor on a G code command in the G code editor or on
an input field in a cycle support parameter screen form.
Ø Press the "Help" key.
The appropriate help screen is displayed.

6 6
6.2 Executing a G code program

During execution of a program, the workpiece is machined in
accordance with the programming on the machine.
After the program is started in automatic mode, workpiece machining
is performed automatically. You can, however, stop the program at
any time and then resume execution later.
Execution of the program can be simulated graphically on the screen

to enable you to check the programming result without moving the
machine axes.
For more information about simulation, see Section "Simulation".
The following conditions must be met before a program can be

executed:
• The measuring system of the control is synchronized with the
machine.
• A program created in G code is available.
• The necessary tool offsets and work offsets have been entered.
• The necessary safety interlocks implemented by the machine
manufacturer are activated.
When a G code program is executed, the same functions are

available as for executing a ShopTurn program (see Section "Execute
workpiece").
Simulate a G code
program
-or- Ø Position the cursor on the desired G code program.

-or- The program is opened in the G code editor.
Ø Press the "Simulation" soft key.
Execution of the program will be displayed in full on the screen in

graphical form.
Edit
editor from the simulation screen.

6 6
Run a G code program

-or- -and-
Ø Position the cursor on the desired G code program.
-and-
Execute
-or-
Ø Press the "Execute" soft key if you are in the "Program" operating
area.
ShopTurn switches automatically to "Machine Auto" operating mode

and loads the G code program.

Cycle Start
Execution of the G code program starts on the machine.

6 6
6.3 G code editor
6.3 G code editor

You use the G code editor when you want to change the sequence of
program blocks within a G code program, delete program blocks or
copy program blocks from one program to another.
When you want to change G code in a program that you are currently
executing, you can only change the G code blocks that have not yet
been executed. These blocks are highlighted.
The following functions are available in the G code editor:

• Mark
You can mark any G code.
• Copy/Paste
You can copy and paste G code within a program or between
different programs.
• Cut
You can cut and therefore delete any G code. However, the G
code remains in the buffer, so you can still paste it in somewhere
else.
• Search/Replace
In a G code program, you can search for a specific character string
and replace it with a different one.
• To Start/End
You can jump easily to the start or end of the G code program.
• Renumber
If you insert a new or copied G code block between two existing G
code blocks, a new block number is automatically assigned by
ShopTurn. This block number may be higher than the one in the
following block. The "Renumber" function is used to renumber the
G code blocks in ascending order.
The G code editor will be opened automatically if you write or open a

G code program.
Select G code
Ø Place the cursor at the position in the program where the marking
should start.
Mark Ø Press the "Mark" soft key.
Ø Place the cursor at the position in the program where the marking
should end.
The G code is marked.

6 6
6.3 G code editor
Copy G code
Ø Select the G code that you want to copy.
Copy Ø Press the "Copy" soft key.
The G code is stored in buffer memory and remains there even on

changeover to another program.
Paste G code
Ø Copy the G code that you want to insert.
Insert Ø Press the "Insert" soft key.
The copied G code is pasted from buffer memory into the text in front
of the cursor.
Cut G code
Ø Select the G code that you want to cut.
Cut Ø Press the "Cut" soft key.
The marked G code is removed and stored in buffer memory.
Find G code
A new vertical soft key menu appears.
Ø Enter the character string that you want to locate.
The G code program is searched for the character string in the

forwards direction. The character string is marked in the editor by the
cursor.
Find next Ø Press the "Find next" soft key to continue the search, as
necessary.
The next character string found is displayed.

6 6
6.3 G code editor
Find and replace G code
A new vertical soft key menu appears.
Search/ Ø Press the "Search/Replace" soft key.

Replace
Ø Enter the character string that you want to find and the characters
that you want to insert in its place.
The G code program is searched for the character string in the

forwards direction. The character string is marked in the editor by the
cursor.
Replace all Ø Press the "Replace all" soft key if you want to replace the
character string throughout the entire G code program.
-or-
Find next Ø Press the "Find next" soft key if you want to continue the search
without replacing the instance of the character string found.
-or-
Replace Ø Press the "Replace" soft key if you want to replace the character
string at this point in the G code program.
Jump to start/end
Continue To Ø Select the "Continue" and "To Start" or "To End" soft keys.
> Start
To
The beginning or end of the G code program is displayed.
End
Renumber the G code

blocks
Continue Renumber Ø Select the "Continue" and "Renumber" soft keys.
> >
Ø Enter the number of the first block and the increment between
block numbers (e.g. 1, 5, 10).
The blocks are renumbered.

You can cancel the numbering again by entering 0 for the increment
or block number.

6 6
6.4 Arithmetic parameters
6.4 Arithmetic parameters

Arithmetic parameters (variables) are variables that you can use
within a G code program.
G code programs can read and write the variables. You can assign a
value in the R parameter list to variables that can be read.
Input and deletion of variables can be disabled via the keyswitch.
Display R variables
Ø Press the "Tools WOs" soft key or the "Offset" key.

-or-
Ø Press the "R vari." soft key.
The variable list is opened.
Finding R variables
Ø Enter the parameter number you want to find.
The parameter is displayed.
Editing R variables
Ø Place the cursor on the input field of the parameter that you want
to change.
Ø Enter the new value.
The new value of the parameters is accepted immediately.
Deleting R variables
Ø Place the cursor on the input field of the parameter whose value
you want to delete.
Ø Press the "Backspace" key.
The value of the parameter is deleted.

7 7
06.03 Tool Management
Tool Management
7.1 Tool list, tool wear list and tool magazine ............................................................... 7-318
7.2 Entering tools in the tool list .................................................................................... 7-323

7.2.1 Creating a new tool ................................................................................................. 7-323
7.2.2 Set up more than one edge for each tool ............................................................... 7-324
7.2.3 Creating a replacement tool.................................................................................... 7-325
7.3 Sort tools ................................................................................................................. 7-326
7.4 Deleting tools from the tool list................................................................................ 7-326
7.5 Loading/unloading a tool into/out of the magazine ................................................. 7-327
7.6 Relocating a tool ..................................................................................................... 7-329
7.7 Entering tool wear data ........................................................................................... 7-331
7.8 Activating tool monitoring ........................................................................................ 7-332
7.9 Managing magazine locations ................................................................................ 7-334

7 7
Tool Management 06.03
7.1 Tool list, tool wear list and tool magazine

Various tools are used for machining workpieces. The geometry and
technology data for these tools must be available to ShopTurn before
you can execute a program (see Section "Setting up the machine").
ShopTurn provides the "Tool list", "Tool wear list" and "Magazine list"
screen forms for managing your tools, enabling you to manage tools
that are not in the turret (magazine).
The various lists may have been changed by the machine manu-
facturer so that they are no longer identical to the lists described
below.
Tool list You must enter all the tools that you want to use on the turning
machine in the tools list. The tools that are in the tool turret must be
assigned to specific magazine locations. You can also sort or delete
tools here.
Tool list
Loc. Location number in the magazine
The location number of the tool in the machining position in the turret
is displayed with a gray background.
If you are working with more than one magazine, you will see the
magazine number here first followed by the location number within the
magazine (e.g. 1/10). Tools that are not currently in a magazine are
listed without a location number (these tools can be found at the end
of the tool list when the list is sorted according to magazine location
number).

7 7
With chain and plate magazines, the locations for a spindle and a
double gripper can also be displayed.
Spindle location
Locations for grippers 1 and 2
Type Tool type and tool point direction

You can change the tool point direction of the tool with the "Alternat."
soft key.
Tool name A tool is identified by its name. The tool name can be entered as a
text string or number.
DP Duplo number of the replacement tool

(DP 1 = Original tool, DP 2 = First replacement tool,
DP 3 = Second replacement tool, etc.)
Tool offset data

A detailed description of the tool offset data can be found in Section
"Setting up the machine" (Subsection "Tools").
(D No.) edge The tool offset data listed here are applicable to currently selected
edge of a tool.
Length X Tool length compensation in the X direction
Length Z Tool length compensation in the Z direction
Radius or ∅ Radius or diameter of the tool

You can also enter the radius or diameter for milling cutters and drills,
but only the tool radius for turning tools. A machine data code is used
to switch from radius to diameter specification.
Direction of motion for holder angle

The holder angle is taken into account during relief cutting.

The cutting tip angle is taken into account during relief cutting.
Pitch Pitch of a screw tap in mm/rev or turns/"
Bore ∅ Diameter of bore for a rotary drill
Tip. width Tip width of grooving tool

ShopTurn needs the tip width to calculate the grooving cycles.

7 7
Tip. length Tip length of a cutting or grooving tool

ShopTurn needs the tip length to display tools when simulating the
program run.
N Angle of teeth for a milling cutter

The control system calculates the revolutional feedrate F internally
from this if the feed is set in mm/tooth in the program.
Angle of tool tip on a drilling machine

If you want to insert a drill down to the shank, and not just to the tool
tip, the control will need the angle of the drill tip.
Tool-specific data
Specification of direction of spindle rotation
The direction of spindle rotation applies to the tool spindle in the case
of driven tools (drill and milling tool), and to the main spindle or
counterspindle in the case of turning tools.
If you are using a drill or milling tool for "Drill centered" or "Thread
centered", the specified direction of rotation thus refers to the cutting
direction of the tool. The main spindle then rotates in the same
direction as the tool.
Clockwise spindle rotation
Counterclockwise spindle rotation
Spindle not activated
Coolant supplies 1 and 2 (e.g. internal and external cooling) ON/OFF

when this tool is used
Coolant on
Coolant off
Please not that some machines are not equipped with a coolant
supply.
Tool wear list You must enter the wear data for your tools in the tool wear list.
ShopTurn takes this data into account on machining the workpiece.
You can also activate tool monitoring here as well as disable tools or
identify them as oversize.

7 7
Tool wear list
Loc., type, tool name, Indicates the magazine location number, tool type and tool point
DP direction, text/number ID for the tool and duplo number
(D No.) edge The wear data displayed are the data for the selected tool edge.
∆ Length X Wear in the X direction
∆ Length Z Wear in the Z direction
∆ Radius or ∆ ∅ Wear on the radius or diameter
TC Tool monitoring based on tool life (T),

workpiece count (C) or
wear (W)
Prewarning limit Prewarning limit for tool life, workpiece count or wear
Tool life Life of tool

Count Number of workpieces machined
Wear Maximum permissible wear on tool
Tool status If the tool is disabled for machining (G) or oversize (U).
(last two columns)

7 7
Tool magazine In the magazine list, you can enable or disable individual magazine
locations.
Magazine list
Loc., type, tool name, Indicates the magazine location number, tool type and tool point
DP direction, text/number ID for the tool and duplo number
Location disable Disable the magazine location
Tool status Indicates the tool status specified in the tool wear list

7 7
7.2 Entering tools in the tool list

You can enter tools and the associated offset data directly in the tool
list, or you can simply import existing tool data outside the tool
management system (see Section "Back-up/import tool or zero point
data").
7.2.1 Creating a new tool
When you want to create a new tool, ShopTurn offers a range of

generally available tool types. The tool type determines what
geometry data you have to enter and how it is calculated.
Possible tool types
The rotary drill can be used for centric drilling and turning.
Ø Install the new tool in the tool turret.
Ø Place the cursor on the location in the tool list that the tool
occupies in the tool turret. The location must still be empty in the
tool list.
New > Ø Press the "New tool" soft key.

tool
Roughing 3D_Probe
Ø Select the desired tool type and the tool point direction with the
tool ... soft keys.
Additional tool types and tool point directions can be called up by
pressing the "Further" soft key.

7 7
The new tool is created and automatically assumes the name of the
selected tool type.
Ø Enter a unique tool name.

You can edit the tool name as required. A tool name may contain
a maximum of 17 characters. You can use letters, digits, the
underscore symbol (_), periods (".") and slashes ("/").
If you want to change the tool point direction subsequently, place the
-or- cursor in the "Type" column and select one of the following options
with the "Alternative" soft key or the "Select" key.
7.2.2 Set up more than one edge for each tool
In the case of tools with more than one cutting edge, a separate set of
offset data is assigned to each cutting edge. You can set up a total of
9 edges for each tool.
Follow the instructions given above to set up tools with more than one
edge in the tool list and enter the offset data for the 1st edge.
Cutting New Ø Then select the "Cutting edges" and "New edge" soft keys.
edges > edge
Instead of the input fields for the first cutting edge, the offset data
input fields for the second cutting edge are displayed.
Ø Select another tool point direction if appropriate.
Ø Enter the offset data for the second cutting edge.
Ø Repeat this process if you wish to create more tool edge offset
data.
Delete Ø Select the "Delete edge" soft key if you want to delete the tool
edge
edge offset data for an edge.
You can only delete the data for the edge with the highest edge
number.
D No. + D No. –
By selecting soft key "D No. +" or "D No. –", you can display the offset
data for the edge with the next higher or next lower edge number
respectively.

7 7
7.2.3 Creating a replacement tool
A replacement tool is one that can be employed to perform the same

machining operation as a tool that has already been entered. You can
use it, for example, to replace a broken tool.
For each tool in the tool list, you can create several replacement tools.
The duplo number 1 is always assigned to the original tool and duplo
numbers 2, 3, etc. are assigned to the replacement tools.
New > Ø Create the replacement tool as a new tool

tool
(see Section "Creating a new tool").
Ø Assign the same name as the original tool to the replacement tool.
The replacement tool is automatically assigned duplo number 2.

7 7
7.3 Sort tools
7.3 Sort tools

When you are working with large magazines or several magazines, it
is useful to display the tools sorted according to different criteria. Then
you will be able to find a specific tool more easily in the lists.
Ø Select the "Tool list" or "Tool wear"
soft key in the "Tools WOs" operating area.

-or-
Sort Ø Press the "Sort" soft key.

>
To To name Ø Activate one of the soft keys to choose the sort criteria.
magazine -or-
The tools are listed in the new order.
To type
-or-
7.4 Deleting tools from the tool list

Tools that are no longer in use can be deleted from the tool list for a
clearer overview.
Ø Position the cursor on the tool that you want to delete.
Delete tool Ø Press the "Delete tool" soft key.
Ø Press the "Delete" soft key.

Delete
The tool data of the selected tool are deleted and the magazine
location is released again.

7 7
7.5 Loading/unloading a tool into/out of the magazine

You can unload tools in the magazine that you are not using at
present. ShopTurn then automatically saves the tool data in the tool
list outside the magazine. Should you want to use the tool again later,
simply load the tool with the tool data into the corresponding maga-
zine location again. Then the same tool data does not have to be
entered more than once.
Loading and unloading of tools into and out of magazine locations

must be enabled in a machine data code.
When you are loading a tool, ShopTurn automatically suggests an

empty location. The magazine in which ShopTurn searches for an
empty location first is stored in a machine data code.
You can also specify an empty magazine location directly when

loading a tool, or define the magazine ShopTurn should search for an
empty location.
If your machine has only one magazine, you simply need to enter the
location number you require when loading the tool, not the magazine
number.
If a spindle location is shown in the tool list, you can also load or
unload a tool directly into or out of the spindle.
Load a tool into the

magazine
Ø Place the cursor on the tool that you want to load into the
magazine (if the tools are sorted according to magazine location
number you will find it at the end of the tool list).
Load Ø Press the "Load" soft key.
The "Empty location" window appears. The "Location" field is

initialized with the number of the first empty magazine location.
Ø Press the "OK" soft key to load the tool into the suggested
location.
-or-

7 7
Ø Enter the location number you require and press the "OK" soft
key.
-or-
Ø Press the "Spindle" and "OK" soft keys to load a tool into the
Spindle
spindle.
The tool is loaded into the specified magazine location.
Find an empty location

in the magazine and load
the tool
Ø Place the cursor on the tool that you want to load into the
magazine.
Load Ø Press the "Load" soft key.

Ø Enter the magazine number and a "0" for the location number if
you wish to search for an empty location in a particular magazine.
-or-
Ø Enter a "0" for the magazine number and location number if you
wish to search for an empty location in all magazines.
An empty location is suggested.
The tool is loaded into the suggested magazine location.
Unload an individual tool

from the magazine
Ø Position the cursor on the tool that you want to unload.
Unload Ø Press the "Unload" soft key.
The tool is unloaded from the magazine.

7 7
7.6 Relocating a tool
Unload all tools from the

magazine
Ø Select the "Magazine" soft key in the "Tools WOs" operating area.
Unload Unload Ø Press the "Unload all" and "Unload" soft keys.
all
All tools are unloaded from the magazine.
Abort
You can abort the unloading process at any time by pressing the
"Abort" soft key. The current tool is still unloaded, but then the
process is aborted.
The unloading process is also aborted if you exit the magazine list.

Tools can be relocated within magazines or between different
magazines, which means that you do not have to unload tools from
the magazine in order to load them into a different location.
ShopTurn automatically suggests an empty location to which you can

relocate the tool. The magazine in which ShopTurn searches for an
empty location first is stored in a machine data code.
You can also specify an empty magazine location directly or define

the magazine ShopTurn should search for an empty location.
If your machine has only one magazine, you simply need to enter the
location number you require, not the magazine number.
If a spindle location is shown in the tool list, you can also load or
unload a tool directly into or out of the spindle.
Specify an empty
location
Ø Place the cursor on the tool that you wish to relocate to a different
magazine location.
Relocate
Ø Press the "Relocate" soft key.


7 7
Ø Press the "OK" soft key to relocate the tool to the suggested
location.
-or-
Ø Enter the location number you require and press the "OK" soft
key.
-or-
Ø Press the "Spindle" and "OK" soft keys to load a tool into the
Spindle
spindle.
The tool is relocated to the specified magazine location.
Find an empty location

Ø Place the cursor on the tool that you wish to relocate to a different
magazine location.
Relocate
Ø Press the "Relocate" soft key.

Ø Enter the magazine number and a "0" for the location number if
you wish to search for an empty location in a particular magazine.
-or-
Ø Enter a "0" for the magazine number and location number if you
wish to search for an empty location in all magazines.
An empty location is suggested.
The tool is relocated to the suggested magazine location.

7 7
7.7 Entering tool wear data
7.7 Entering tool wear data

Tools that are in use for long periods are subject to wear. You can
measure this wear and enter it in the tool wear list. ShopTurn then
takes this information into account when calculating the tool length or
radius compensation. This ensures a consistent accuracy in work-
piece machining.
When you enter the wear data, ShopTurn checks that the values do
not exceed an incremental or absolute upper limit. The incremental
upper limit indicates the maximum difference between the previous
and new wear value. The absolute upper limit indicates the maximum
total value that you can enter.
The upper limits are set in a machine data code.
Ø Select the "Tool wear" soft key in the "Tools WOs" operating area.
Ø Place the cursor on the tool whose wear data you want to enter.
Ø Enter the differences for length (∆Length X, ∆Length Z) and

radius/diameter (∆Radius/∆∅) in the appropriate columns.
The wear data entered is added to the radius but subtracted from the
tool length. A positive differential value for the radius therefore
corresponds to an oversize (e.g. for subsequent grinding).

7 7
7.8 Activating tool monitoring

ShopTurn allows you to monitor the tool life of the tools automatically
to ensure constant machining quality.
You can also disable tools that you no longer want to use or identify
them as oversize.
Tool monitoring can be activated via a machine data code.

Tool life (T) With the tool life T (Time), the service life for a tool with machining
feedrate is monitored in minutes. When the remaining tool life is = 0,
the tool is set to "disabled". The tool is not put into operation on the
next tool change. If a replacement tool is available, it is inserted in its
place.
Tool life is monitored on the basis of the selected tool cutting edge.
Count (C) With the count C, the number of workpieces machined by the tool is
counted. The tool is also disabled in this case, when the remainder
reaches "0".
Wear (W) With wear W, the greatest value in the wear parameters ∆ Length X,
∆ Length Z or ∆ Radius or ∆ ∅ in the wear list is monitored. Here too
the tool is disabled if one of the wear parameters reaches the value
for wear W.
Prewarning limit The prewarning limit specifies a tool life, workpiece count or wear at
which the first warning is displayed.
Disabled (G) Individual tools can also be disabled manually if you no longer want to
use them for workpiece machining.
Oversize (U) In the case of oversize tools, neighboring magazine locations are only
reserved alternately, i.e. you can only insert the next tool in the next
magazine location but one (this can also contain an oversize tool).

7 7
Monitor tool use
Ø Position the cursor on the tool that you want to monitor.
Ø In the column "T/C" select the parameter that you wish to monitor
(T = Tool life, C = Count, W = Wear).
Ø Enter a prewarning limit for the tool life, count or wear.
Ø Enter the scheduled service life for the tool, the scheduled
number of workpieces to be machined or the maximum
permissible wear.
The tool is disabled when the tool life, count or wear is reached.
If you wish to monitor the count, you must also insert the following G
code commands before the end of the program in every program that
calls the tools to be monitored:
SETPIECE(1) ; increase count by 1
SETPIECE(0) ; delete T no.
Enter tool status

Ø Place the cursor on a tool.
Ø Select the option "G" in the first field of the last column if you want
to disable the tool for machining.
-or-
Ø Select the option "U" in the second field of the last column if you
want to mark the tool as oversize.
The tool disable or location disable for neighboring magazine loca-

tions is now active.

7 7
7.9 Managing magazine locations
7.9 Managing magazine locations

If a magazine location is defective, or when an oversize tool requires
more than half a neighboring location, you can disable the magazine
location.
It is no longer possible to assign any tool data to a disabled magazine

location.
From the "Tool status" columns, you can also see whether a tool is
disabled (G) or oversize (U).
You can change the tool status settings in the tool wear list (see
Section "Activate tool monitoring").
Disable magazine
location
Ø Place the cursor on the relevant empty magazine location in the

"Location disable" column.
The letter "G" is displayed to indicate that the location is disabled.
Enable magazine
location
Ø Place the cursor on an empty magazine location in the "Location

disable" column.
The letter "G" disappears and the magazine location is now enabled
again.

8 8
06.03 Program Management
Program Management
8.1 Program management in ShopTurn........................................................................ 8-336

8.2.1 Open a program ...................................................................................................... 8-339
8.2.3 Execute a G code program from floppy disk or network drive ................................ 8-341
8.2.4 Create a new directory/program ............................................................................. 8-342
8.2.6 Copy/Rename a directory or program..................................................................... 8-344
8.2.7 Delete directory/program ........................................................................................ 8-345
8.2.8 Execute program via RS-232 interface ................................................................... 8-346
8.2.9 Read program in/out via RS-232 interface ............................................................. 8-347
8.2.11 Back-up/Import tool or zero point data.................................................................... 8-349

8.3.1 Open a program ...................................................................................................... 8-354
8.3.3 Load/Unload program ............................................................................................. 8-355
8.3.4 Execute a G code program from the hard disk, floppy disk or network drive ......... 8-356
8.3.5 Create directory/program ........................................................................................ 8-358
8.3.7 Copy/Rename/Move a directory or program........................................................... 8-360
8.3.8 Delete directory/program ........................................................................................ 8-362
8.3.9 Read program in/out via RS-232 interface ............................................................. 8-363
8.3.11 Back-up/Import tool or zero point data.................................................................... 8-365

8 8
Program Management 06.03
8.1 Program management in ShopTurn
8.1 Program management in ShopTurn

All programs that you have created in ShopTurn for machining work-
pieces are stored in NC main memory.
You can access these programs at any time via the Program Manager
for execution, editing, copying or renaming. Programs that you no
longer require can be deleted to release their storage space.
ShopTurn offers various options for exchanging programs and data

with other workstations.
• Own hard disk (PCU 50 only)

• RS-232 interface
• Floppy disk drive
• Network connection
The following Sections explain the alternative program management

functions as used with PCU 20 or PCU 50.
Find out which PCU your ShopTurn system is running on and then
read either "Program management with PCU 20" or "Program
management with PCU 50".

8 8
8.2 Program management with PCU 20

In the case of the ShopTurn variant for PCU 20, all programs and data
are stored in NC main memory.
You can exchange data and programs via a RS-232 interface.
It is also possible to display the directory tree for a floppy disk drive or
network drive.
ShopTurn user interface PCU 20

RS-232
interface
edit edit
ShopTurn programs ShopTurn programs

ShopTurn subroutines ShopTurn subroutines
G code programs G code programs
Network drive
Diskette drive NC main memory
Data storage with PCU 20
You will find an overview of all directories and programs in the

Program Manager.
PCU20 program manager
In the horizontal soft key bar, you can select the storage medium that
contains the directories and programs that you want to display. In ad-
dition to the "NC" soft key, via which the NC main memory data can
be displayed, a further four soft keys can also be assigned.

8 8
You can display the directories and programs on floppy disks and
network drives:
In the overview, the symbols in the left-hand column have the

following meaning:
0 Directory
2
Program
Zero point/tool data
The directories and programs are always listed complete with the
following information:
• Name
The name can be up to 24 characters long. For data transfer to
external systems, the name is truncated to 8 characters.
• Type
Directory: WPD
Program: MPF
Zero point/tool data: INI
• Size (in bytes)
• Date/time (of creation or last change)
ShopTurn stores the programs in the "TEMP" directory that are

created internally for calculating the stock removal procedures.
Information about memory allocation in the NC is displayed above the

horizontal soft key bar.
Open a directory
Ø Press the "Program" soft key or the "Program Manager" key.

Ø Select the storage medium using the soft key.

...
Ø Place the cursor on the directory that you want to open.


8 8
Return to the next higher

directory level
Ø Press the "Cursor left" key with the cursor in any line.
-or-
Ø Place the cursor on the Return line.
-and-
Ø Press the "Input" or "Cursor left" key.

-or- The higher directory level is displayed.
8.2.1 Open a program
To view a program in more detail or modify it, you must display the
process plan for the program.
Ø Place the cursor on the program that you want to open.

-or-
The selected program is opened in the "Program" operating area. The

8 8
8.2.2 Execute a program
You can select any program that is stored in your system at any time
to machine workpieces automatically.
• Open the Program Manager.
• Place the cursor on the program that you want to execute.
Execute • Press the "Execute" soft key.
ShopTurn switches to "Machine Auto" operating mode and loads the

program.
• Then press the "Cycle Start" key.

Cycle Start
Machining of the workpiece is started (see Section "Machining the
workpiece").
If the program is already open in the "Program" operating area,

press the "Execute" soft key to load the program in "Machine Auto"
mode. Then start machining of the workpiece by pressing the "Cycle
Start" key.

8 8
8.2.3 Execute a G code program from floppy disk or network drive
If the capacity of your NC main memory is already stretched, you can

also execute G code programs from a floppy disk or network drive.
The entire G code program is not loaded into NC main memory before
it is executed, but only the first part of it. Subsequent program blocks
are then continuously reloaded as the first part is executed.
The G code program remains stored on the floppy disk/network drive

when executed from there.
ShopTurn programs cannot be executed from the floppy disk/network

drive.
• Select the floppy disk/network drive via the appropriate soft key.
...
• Place the cursor on the directory that contains the G code
program you want to execute.
• Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

-or- The directory opens.
• Place the cursor on the G code program you want to execute.
Continue Execute • Select the "Continue" and "Execute HD" soft keys.
> HD
G code program.
• Press the "Cycle Start" key.

Cycle Start
workpiece"). The program contents are loaded continuously to the NC
main memory while the program is being processed.

8 8
8.2.4 Create a new directory/program
Directory structures help you to manage your program and data trans-
parently. You can create any number of subdirectories for this pur-
pose in a directory.
In a subdirectory or directory, you can create programs and then
create program blocks within them (see Section "Creating a ShopTurn
program").
The new program will be automatically stored in NC main memory for
you to use.
Create a directory
New Directory • Press the "New" and "Directory" soft keys.

>
• Enter a new directory name.
• Press the "OK" soft key.
The new directory is created.
Create a program
• Place the cursor on the directory in which you want to create a

new program.
• Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

-or-
New • Press the "New" soft key.
>
ShopTurn • Press the "ShopTurn program" soft key if you want to create a
program
ShopTurn program (see Section "Creating a ShopTurn program")
-or-
G code • Press the "G code program" soft key if you want to create a G
program
code program (see Section "G code program")

8 8
8.2.5 Mark several programs
You can mark several programs individually or in a block for

subsequent copying, deleting, etc.
Mark several programs

in a block
Ø Open the Program Manager.
Ø Place the cursor on the first program that you want to mark.
Mark
Ø Expand the program selection area by pressing the cursor up or

-or- down key.
The entire block of programs is marked.

individually
Ø Press the "Select" key.
Ø Move the cursor to the next program that you want to select.
-or-
Ø Press the "Select" key again.
The individually selected programs are marked.

8 8
8.2.6 Copy/rename a directory or program
To create a new directory or program that is similar to an existing pro-

gram, you can save time by copying the old directory or program and
only changing selected programs or program blocks.
You can also use the functions for copying directories and programs
and pasting them at a different location for the purpose of transferring
data to other ShopTurn systems via a floppy disk or network drive.
You can also rename directories or programs.
It is not possible to rename a program when it is loaded in "Machine

Auto" mode at the same time.
Copy directory/program
Ø Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to copy.
Copy
Ø Select the directory level in which you want to insert your copied
directory/program.
Insert
The copied directory/program is inserted in the selected directory

level. If a directory/program of the same name already exists in the
directory level, a prompt asks whether you want to overwrite or insert
it under a different name.
Ø Press the "OK" soft key if you want to overwrite the directory/
program.
-or-
Ø Enter another name if you want to insert the program/directory

under another name.
-and-

8 8
Rename directory/
program
Ø Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to

rename.
Rename
Ø Enter the new directory or program name in the field "To:".

The name must be unique, i.e. two directories or programs are not
permitted to have the same name.
The directory/program is renamed.
8.2.7 Delete directory/program
Delete programs or directories from time to time that you are no

longer using to maintain the clarity of your data management system
and to release NC main memory.
Back up this data beforehand on an external data medium if
necessary (see Section "Read program in/out via RS-232 interface").
Please note that when you delete a directory, all programs, tool data
and zero point data and subdirectories that this directory contains are
deleted.
If you want to release space in NC main memory, delete the contents

of the "TEMP" directory. ShopTurn stores the programs here that are
Ø Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to delete.
Ø Press the "Delete" and "OK" soft keys.

Delete
The selected directory or program is deleted.

8 8
8.2.8 Execute program via RS-232 interface
You can execute programs stored on external data media directly via
the RS-232 interface, i.e. it is not necessary to read in these programs
before you can machine a workpiece with them.
If a program needs more memory space for execution than is avail-
able in the NC main memory, for example, the program contents are
continuously loaded via the RS-232 interface.
The RS-232 interface of the control and the external data medium
must be compatible, i.e. you must make the same settings for each
RS-232 interface.
Continue Execute Ø Select the "Continue" and "Execute RS-232" soft keys.
> RS-232
Set-up Ø Press the "Set-up RS-232" soft key to set up the interface.
RS-232
Ø Enter the desired settings.
The settings for the interface are saved.
Ø On the partner system, select the program that you want to

execute.
Ø Start the transfer on the partner system.
Start
ShopTurn switches to "Machine Auto" operating mode and loads part

of the program.
Ø Then press the "Cycle Start" key.

Cycle Start
main memory while the program is being processed. When the
program has been executed via the RS-232 interface, the program
remains stored on the external medium.

8 8
8.2.9 Read program in/out via RS-232 interface
The RS-232 interface enables programs to be transferred between

ShopTurn workstations by means of external data memory.
The data read out function can also be used to export data that is not
currently required for the purpose of releasing NC main memory. As
soon as you need the exported programs, you can read them in
again.
When a program is read into or read out of ShopTurn, all the

ShopTurn subroutines are transferred with it.
It is also possible to read in or read out more than one program in the
same operation.
RS-232 interface.
Make sure that you set the correct file format (binary/PC, punched
tape or punched tape/ISO format) on reading out. Otherwise the
partner system will not be able to interpret the data.
Read out program
Ø Place the cursor on the program that you want to read out.
Continue Read Out

Ø Select the "Continue" and "Read Out" soft keys.
>
RS-232
All files
Ø Press the "All files" soft key if you want to select all the programs
displayed.
Start
The selected program and all its ShopTurn subroutines are read out.
The "Readout" window displays the name of the program that has just
been read out and the number of bytes transferred.

8 8
Stop
Ø Press the "Stop" soft key if you want to interrupt data transfer.
Ø Then press the "Start" soft key again to restart data transfer.
Read in program
Continue Read In
Ø Select the "Continue" and "Read In" soft keys.
>
RS-232
Ø On the partner system, select the programs that you want to read
in.
Start
The "Read in" window displays the name of the program that has just
been read in and the number of bytes transferred. The program is
stored in the directory specified in the program header.
Stop

8 8
8.2.10 Display error log
If errors occur during data transfer via the RS-232 interface, ShopTurn
records them in a log.
Continue Ø Press the "Continue" soft key.

>
Read Out Read In

Ø Press the "Read In" or "Read Out" soft key.
-or-
Error log
Ø Then press the "Error log" soft key.
The data transfer log is displayed.
8.2.11 Back-up/import tool or zero point data
Apart from programs, you can also save tool data and zero point
settings.
This option allows you, for example, to back up the tool and zero point
data for a particular ShopTurn program. If you want to execute this
program at a later point in time, you will then have quick access to the
relevant settings.
Even tool data that you have measured on an external tool setting
station can be copied easily into the tool management system using
this option. For further details, see:
References: /FBT/, Description of Functions ShopTurn
You can choose which data you want to back up:

• Tool data
• Magazine loading
• Zero points
• Basic zero point
You can also specify the amount of data to be backed up:

• Complete tool list or all zero points
• All tool data or zero points used in the program
Magazine loading data can be read out only if your system supports
the loading and unloading of tool data to or from the magazine (see
Chapter "Tool Management", Section "Loading or unloading a tool in
the magazine").

8 8
Back up data
Ø Place the cursor on the program whose tool and zero point data
you wish to back up.
Continue Back Up Ø Select the "Continue" and "Back Up Data" soft keys.
> Data
Ø Select the data you want to back up.
Ø Change the suggested name if you want to.

The name of the originally selected program with extension
"..._TMZ" will be suggested as a name for your tool or zero point
file.
The tool/zero point data will be set up in the same directory in which
the selected program is stored.
If a tool/zero point file with the specified name already exists, this will
now be overwritten with the new data.
Read in data
Ø Place the cursor on the tool/zero point data backup that you wish
to read back in.
Ø Select the "Execute" soft key or the "Input" key.

Execute
-or- The window "Read in backup data" is opened.
Ø Select the data (tool offset data, magazine loading data, zero
point data, basic work offsets) that you wish to read in.
The data are read in.

Depending on which data you have selected, ShopTurn will do the
following:
All tool offset data

All data in the tool management system is deleted first. The backup
data is then read in.
All tool offset data used in the program

If at least one of the tools to be read in already exists in the tool
management system, you can choose between the following options.
Replace all
Ø Select the "Replace all" soft key to read in all tool data. Any
existing tools will now be overwritten without a warning prompt.

8 8
-or-
Replace Ø Select the "Replace none" soft key if you want to cancel the data
none
import.
-or-
Ø Select the "No" soft key if you want to keep the old tool.
If the old tool is not at the saved magazine location, it is relocated
there.
-or-
Ø Select the "Yes" soft key if you want to overwrite the old tool.
With the tool management option without loading/unloading, the old

tool is deleted; the old tool is unloaded beforehand in the variant with
loading/unloading.
If you change the tool name before importing it with "Yes", the tool will
be added as an extra tool to the tool list.
Work offsets
Existing work offsets are always overwritten when new offsets are
imported.
Magazine loading
If magazine loading data are not imported at the same time, tools are
entered without location number in the tool list.

8 8

The ShopTurn variant with PCU 50 has its own hard disk in addition to
the NC user memory. This makes it possible to store all programs that
are not currently required in the NC on the hard disk.
It is also possible to display the directory management of a floppy disk
or network drive and programs and data can be read in or out via an
RS-232 interface.
ShopTurn user interface PCU 50

RS-232
interface
edit edit edit
ShopTurn programs ShopTurn programs ShopTurn programs

ShopTurn subroutines ShopTurn subroutines ShopTurn subroutines
G code programs edit G code programs
load G code programs
unload
Network drive Data manage-
ment on hard save
Diskette drive disk NC main memory
Data storage with PCU 50
You will find an overview of all directories and programs in the

Program Manager.
PCU 50 program manager
In the horizontal soft key bar, you can select the storage medium that
contains the directories and programs that you want to display.

8 8
In addition to the "NC" soft key, via which the data in the NC main
memory and the data management directories on the hard disk can
be displayed, a further 4 soft keys can also be assigned. You can
display the directories and programs of the following storage media:
• Network drives (network card necessary)
• Floppy disk drive
• The hard disk as archive directory
In the overview, the symbols in the left-hand column have the

following meaning:
0 Directory
2
Program
Zero point/tool data
The directories and programs are always listed complete with the
following information:
• Name
The name can be up to 24 characters long. For data transfer to
external systems, the name is truncated to 8 characters.
• Type
Directory: WPD
Program: MPF
Zero point/tool data: INI
• Loaded
A cross in the "Loaded" column indicates whether the program is
still in NC main memory (X) or whether it has been read out to
hard disk ( ).
• Size (in bytes)
• Date/time (of creation or last change)
ShopTurn stores the programs in the "TEMP" directory that are

Information about memory allocation on the hard disk and in the NC is

displayed above the horizontal soft key bar.

8 8
Open a directory
Ø Press the "Program" soft key or the "Program Manager" key.

Ø Select the storage medium using the soft key.

...
Ø Place the cursor on the directory that you want to open.

Return to the next higher

directory level
Ø Press the "Cursor left" key with the cursor in any line.
-or-
Ø Place the cursor on the Return line.
-and-
Ø Press the "Input" or "Cursor left" key.

-or- The higher directory level is displayed.
8.3.1 Open a program
To view a program in more detail or modify it, you must display the
process plan for the program.
Ø Place the cursor on the program that you want to open.

-or-
The selected program is opened in the "Program" operating area. The

8 8
8.3.2 Execute a program
You can select any program that is stored in your system at any time
to machine workpieces automatically.
Ø Place the cursor on the program that you want to execute.
Execute

program.
Ø Then press the "Cycle Start" key.

Cycle Start
workpiece").
If the program is already open in the "Program" operating area, press

the "Execute" soft key to load the program in "Machine Auto" mode.
Then start machining of the workpiece by pressing the "Cycle Start"
key.
8.3.3 Load/unload program
If you do not want to execute a program in the near future, you can
unload it from NC main memory. The program is then stored on hard
disk and NC main memory is free again.
As soon as you execute a program that was stored on hard disk, it is

loaded into NC main memory again.
You can, however, load one or more ShopTurn programs into NC
main memory again without executing them immediately.
Programs that are in "Machine Auto" mode cannot be unloaded from

NC main memory to the hard disk.
Unload program
Ø Place the cursor on the program that you want to unload from NC
main memory.

8 8
Continue Manual Ø Press the "Continue" and "Manual unload" soft keys.
> unload
The selected program is no longer marked with an "X" in the "Loaded"
column.
In the line in which the available memory space is displayed, you can
see that NC main memory has become free again.
Load program
Ø Place the cursor on the program that you want to load into NC
main memory.
Continue Manual Ø Press the "Continue" and "Manual load" soft keys.
> load
The selected program is now marked with an "X" in the "Loaded"
column.
8.3.4 Execute a G code program from the hard disk, floppy disk or network drive
If the capacity of your NC main memory is already stretched, you can

also execute G code programs from the hard disk or a floppy disk or
network drive.
The entire G code program is not loaded into NC main memory before
it is executed, but only the first part of it. Subsequent program blocks
are then continuously reloaded as the first part is executed.
The G code program remains stored on the hard disk or floppy disk/
network drive when executed from there.
ShopTurn programs cannot be executed from the hard disk or floppy

disk/network drive.
Run a G code program

from the hard disk
Ø Position the cursor on the directory that contains the G code

program that you want to execute from hard disk.

Ø Position the cursor on the G code program that you want to

execute from hard disk (without "X").

8 8
Continue Execute Ø Select the "Continue" and "Execute HD" soft keys.
> HD
G code program.

Cycle Start
Execute a G code program

from floppy disk or network
drive
Ø Select the floppy disk/network drive via the appropriate soft key.
...
Ø Place the cursor on the directory that contains the G code
program you want to execute.

-or- The directory opens.
Ø Place the cursor on the G code program you want to execute.
Continue Execute Ø Select the "Continue" and "Execute HD" soft keys.
> HD
G code program.

Cycle Start

8 8
8.3.5 Create directory/program
Directory structures help you to manage your program and data

transparently. You can create any number of subdirectories for this
purpose in a directory.
In a subdirectory or directory, you can create programs and then
create program blocks within them (see Section "Creating a ShopTurn
program").
The new program will be automatically stored in NC main memory for
you to use.
Create a directory
New Directory
Ø Press the "New" and "Directory" soft keys.
Ø Enter a new directory name.
The new directory is created.
Create a program
Ø Place the cursor on the directory in which you want to create a

new program.

-or-
New
Ø Press the "New" soft key.
ShopTurn Ø Press the "ShopTurn program" soft key if you want to create a
program
ShopTurn program (see Section "Creating a ShopTurn program")
-or-
G code Ø Press the "G code program" soft key if you want to create a G
program
code program (see Section "G code program")

8 8
8.3.6 Mark several programs
You can mark several programs individually or in a block for

subsequent copying, deleting, etc.

in a block
Mark
Ø Expand the program selection area by pressing the cursor up or

-or- down key.
The entire block of programs is marked.

individually
Ø Press the "Select" key.
Ø Move the cursor to the next program that you want to select.
-or-
Ø Press the "Select" key again.
The individually selected programs are marked.

8 8
8.3.7 Copy/rename/move a directory or program
To create a new directory or program that is similar to an existing

program, you can save time by copying the old directory or program
and only changing selected programs or program blocks.
You can also move directories or programs or rename them.
You can also use the functions for copying directories and programs
or cutting them for pasting at a different location for the purpose of
transferring data to other ShopTurn systems via a floppy disk or
network drive.
It is not possible to rename a program when it is loaded in "Machine

Auto" mode at the same time.
Copy directory/program
Ø Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to copy.
Copy
Ø Select the directory level in which you want to insert your copied
directory/program.
Insert
The copied directory/program is inserted in the selected directory

level. If a directory/program of the same name already exists in the
program.
-or-

under another name.
-and-

8 8
Rename directory/
program
Ø Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to

rename.
Rename
Ø Enter the new directory or program name in the field "To:".

The name must be unique, i.e. two directories or programs are not
permitted to have the same name.
The directory/program is renamed.
Move directory/program
Ø Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to move.
Cut
Ø Press the "Cut" soft key.
The selected directory/program is deleted at this point and stored in

buffer memory.
Ø Select the directory level in which you want to insert the

directory/program.
Insert
The directory/program is moved to the selected directory level.

If a directory/program of the same name already exists in this
program.
-or-

under another name.
-and-

8 8
8.3.8 Delete directory/program
Delete programs or directories from time to time that you are no

longer using to maintain a clearer overview of your data management.
Back up this data beforehand on an external data medium if
necessary (see Section "Read program in/out via RS-232 interface").
Please note that when you delete a directory, all programs, tool data
and zero point data and subdirectories that this directory contains are
deleted.
If you want to release space in NC main memory, delete the contents

of the "TEMP" directory. ShopTurn stores the programs here that are
Ø Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to delete.
Ø Press the "Cut" and "OK" soft keys.

Cut
The selected directory or program is deleted.

8 8
8.3.9 Read program in/out via RS-232 interface
The RS-232 interface enables programs to be transferred between

ShopTurn workstations by means of external data memory.
The data read out function can also be used to export data that is not
currently required for the purpose of releasing NC main memory of
hard disk space. As soon as you need the exported programs, you
can read them in again.
When a program is read into or read out of ShopTurn, all the

ShopTurn subroutines are transferred with it.
It is also possible to read in or read out more than one program in the
same operation.
RS-232 interface.
Make sure that you set the correct file format (binary/PC, punched
tape or punched tape/ISO format) on reading out. Otherwise the
partner system will not be able to interpret the data.
Read out program
Ø Place the cursor on the program that you want to read out.
Continue Read Out

Ø Select the "Continue" and "Read Out" soft keys.
>
RS-232
All files
Ø Press the "All files" soft key if you want to read out all the
programs displayed.
Start
The selected program and all its ShopTurn subroutines are read out.
The "Readout" window displays the name of the program that has just
been read out and the number of bytes transferred.

8 8
Stop
Read in program
Continue Read In
Ø Select the "Continue" and "Read In" soft keys.
>
RS-232
Ø On the partner system, select the programs that you want to read
in.
Start
Ø Press "Start" soft key.
The "Read in" window displays the name of the program that has just
been read in and the number of bytes transferred. The program is
stored in the directory specified in the program header.
Stop

8 8
8.3.10 Display error log
If errors occur during data transfer via the RS-232 interface, ShopTurn
records them in a log.
Continue Ø Press the "Continue" soft key.

>
Read In Read Out

Ø Press the "Read In" or "Read Out" soft key.
-or-
Error log Ø Then press the "Error log" soft key.
The data transfer log is displayed.
8.3.11 Back-up/import tool or zero point data
Apart from programs, you can also save/read in tool data and zero
point settings.
You can use this option for example to back up the tool and zero point
data for a particular ShopTurn program. If you want to execute this
program at a later point in time, you will then have quick access to the
relevant settings.
Even tool data that you have measured on an external tool setting
station can be copied easily into the tool management system using
this option. For further details, see:
References: /FBT/, Description of Functions ShopTurn
You can choose which data you want to back up:

• Tool data
• Magazine loading
• Zero points
• Basic zero point
You can also specify the amount of data to be backed up:

• Complete tool list or all zero points
• All tool data or zero points used in the program
Magazine loading data can be read out only if your system supports
the loading and unloading of tool data to or from the magazine (see
Chapter "Tool Management", Section "Loading or unloading a tool in
the magazine").

8 8
Back up data
Ø Place the cursor on the program whose tool and zero point data
you wish to back up.
Continue Back Up Ø Select the "Continue" and "Back Up Data" soft keys.
> Data
Ø Select the data you want to back up.
Ø Change the suggested name if you want to.

The name of the originally selected program with extension
"..._TMZ" will be suggested as a name for your tool or zero point
file.
The tool/zero point data will be set up in the same directory in which
the selected program is stored.
If a tool/zero point file with the specified name already exists, this will
now be overwritten with the new data.
Read in data
Ø Place the cursor on the tool/zero point data backup that you wish
to read back in.
Ø Select the "Execute" soft key or the "Cursor right" or "Input"

Execute
-or- key.
The window "Read in backup data" is opened.

-or-
Ø Select the data (tool offset data, magazine loading data, zero
point data, basic work offsets) that you wish to read in.
The data are read in.

Depending on which data you have selected, ShopTurn will do the
following:
All tool offset data

All data in the tool management system is deleted first. The backup
data is then read in.
All tool offset data used in the program

If at least one of the tools to be read in already exists in the tool
management system, you can choose between the following options.
Replace all
Ø Select the "Replace all" soft key to read in all tool data. Any
existing tools will now be overwritten without a warning prompt.
-or-

8 8
Replace Ø Select the "Replace none" soft key if you want to cancel the data
none
import.
-or-
Ø Select the "No" soft key if you want to keep the old tool.
If the old tool is not at the saved magazine location, it is relocated
there.
-or-
Ø Select the "Yes" soft key if you want to overwrite the old tool.
With the tool management option without loading/unloading, the old

tool is deleted; the old tool is unloaded beforehand in the variant with
loading/unloading.
If you change the tool name before importing it with "Yes", the tool will
be added as an extra tool to the tool list.
Work offsets
Existing work offsets are always overwritten when new offsets are
imported.
Magazine loading
If magazine loading data are not imported at the same time, tools are
entered without location number in the tool list.

8 8
Notes

9 9
06.03 Messages, Alarms and User Data
Messages, Alarms and User Data
9.1 Messages ................................................................................................................ 9-370
9.2 Alarms ..................................................................................................................... 9-370

9.2.1 Cycle alarms ........................................................................................................... 9-371
9.2.2 ShopTurn alarms..................................................................................................... 9-376
9.3 User data................................................................................................................. 9-388
9.4 Version display........................................................................................................ 9-390

9 9
Messages, Alarms and User Data 06.03
9.1 Messages
9.1 Messages
In the dialog line, ShopTurn outputs messages that provide you with
operating advice or progress information. The displayed messages do
not interrupt the machining process.
Dialog line with message
9.2 Alarms
If errors are detected in ShopTurn, the system generates an alarm
and aborts program execution if necessary. You can display the
alarms complete with alarm code, date, error text and cancel criterion.
The error text indicates the possible error cause.
Warning
If you ignore an alarm that occurs, and do not rectify its cause, this
can result in damage to the machine, workpiece, stored settings and
even to your health.
The alarm numbers are assigned to different areas as follows:
61000–62999 Cycles
100000–100999 Basic system
101000–101999 Diagnosis
102000–102999 Services
103000–103999 Machine
104000–104999 Parameters
105000–105999 Programming
106000–106999 Reserved
107000–107999 OEM
110000–110999 Reserved
111000–112999 ShopTurn
120000–120999 Reserved
In the following Sections, only the cycles and ShopTurn alarms are
explained. For a description of all other alarms, see
References: /DA/, Diagnostics Guide SINUMERIK 840D/
840Di/810D

9 9
9.2 Alarms
Ø Press the "Alarm list" soft key.
The list of active messages and alarms is displayed.
Ø Check the machine carefully with reference to the alarm

description.
Ø Rectify the cause of the alarm.
Ø Press the key that is shown alongside the alarm to cancel the
alarm.
Reset Cycle Start
-or-
Ø Switch the machine or control system off and on again if the main
switch symbol (POWER ON) is displayed next to the alarm.
9.2.1 Cycle alarms
Alarm number Alarm text Explanation, remedy

61000 "No tool offset active" The cutting edge number D for the tool must
be programmed before the cycle call.
61001 "Thread pitch incorrectly defined" The thread size and pitch are incompatible.
61002 "Machining type incorrectly Change the machining type.
defined"
61003 "No feedrate programmed in Change the feedrate.
cycle"
61006 "Tool radius too large" Select a smaller tool.
61007 "Tool radius too small" Select a larger tool.
61009 "Active tool number = 0" Load the required tool.
61010 "Finishing allowance too large" Reduce the value for the finishing allowance.
61011 "Invalid scaling" The active scaling factor is not permissible for
this cycle.
61012 "Different scales in one plane" Cycle can be processed only with uniform
scaling in the plane.
61013 "Basic settings have been altered, Check basic settings and change if necessary.
program cannot be executed"
61101 "Reference plane incorrectly Either specify different values for the reference
defined" plane and retraction plane for relative
specification of depth or enter an absolute
value for the depth.
61102 "No spindle direction program- The spindle direction is missing.
med"
61103 "Number of holes is zero" The number of drill holes is missing.
61104 "Contour violation of slots" The location of the slots on the circle and their
shape are invalid.

9 9
9.2 Alarms
61105 "Cutter radius too large" The diameter of the milling cutter is too large
for the shape to be machined. Use a tool with
a smaller radius or change the contour.
61106 "Number or spacing of circle The circle elements cannot be arranged within
elements" a full circle.
61107 "First drilling depth incorrectly First drilling depth is inverted in relation to total
defined" drilling depth.
61108 "No valid settings for parameters The radius and infeed depth per revolution
_RAD1 and _DP1" must be taken into account for insertion along
helical path.
61109 "Parameter _CDIR incorrectly The milling direction is incorrectly defined.
defined"
61110 "Finishing allowance on base > Alter setting for depth infeed if necessary.
infeed depth"
61111 "Infeed width > tool diameter" The programmed infeed width is greater than
the diameter of the active tool. The infeed
width must be reduced.
61112 "Tool radius negative" The radius of the active tool is negative. This is
illegal.
61113 "Parameter _CRAD for corner Reduce the corner radius.
radius too large"
61114 "Direction of machining G41/G42 Check the machining direction of tool radius
incorrectly defined" compensation left/right and alter.
61115 "Approach or retract mode An incorrect contour approach or retract mode
(line/circle/plane/space) incor- was defined. Check the approach/retract mode
rectly defined" or approach/retract strategy parameter.
61116 "Approach or retract path = 0" The approach or retract path is set to zero, it
must be increased.
61117 "Active tool radius <= 0" The radius of the active tool is negative or
zero. This is illegal.
61118 "Length or width = 0" The length or width of the milling surface is
illegal.
61119 "Nominal or core diameter Check thread geometry.
incorrectly programmed"
61120 "Thread type internal, external not You must enter the internal, external thread
defined" type.
61121 "Number of teeth/cutting edge Enter the number of teeth/cutting edge for the
missing" active tool in the tool list.
61122 "Safety clearance in the plane The safety clearance is negative or zero. This
incorrectly defined" is illegal.
61124 "Infeed width is not programmed" In active simulation without a tool, a value for
the infeed width must always be programmed.
61125 "Technology selection in Check settings in machine data 9855 and
parameter _TECHNO incorrectly 9856.
defined"

9 9
9.2 Alarms
61126 "Thread length too short" Check thread geometry.

61127 "Speed ratio of tapping axis Check settings in machine data 31050 and
incorrectly defined (machine 31060.
data)"
61128 "Insertion angle = 0 for insertion Use larger insertion angle.
via oscillation or helix"
61200 "Too many elements in machining Edit machining block, delete elements if
block" necessary.
61201 "Incorrect sequence in machining Sort the machining block sequence.
block"
61202 "Not a technology cycle" Program technology block.
61203 "Not a position cycle" Program positioning block.
61204 "Unknown technology cycle" Delete and reprogram technology block.
61205 "Unknown position cycle" Delete and reprogram positioning block.
61210 "Block search element not found" Repeat block search.
61212 "Incorrect tool type" Select a new tool type.
61213 "Circle radius too small" Enter a larger value for the circle radius.
61214 "No pitch programmed" Program the pitch.
61215 "Blank dimension incorrectly Check dimensions of blank spigot. The blank
programmed" spigot must be larger than the finished spigot.
61216 "Feed/tooth possible only for Set another feed type.
milling tools"
61217 "Cutting rate programmed for tool Enter a cutting rate setting.
radius 0"
61218 "Feed/tooth programmed, but Enter the number of teeth of the cutting tool in
number of teeth is zero" the "Tool list" menu.
61222 "Plane infeed greater than tool Reduce plane infeed.
diameter"
61223 "Approach path too small" Enter a larger value for the approach path.
61224 "Retract path too small" Enter a larger value for the retract path.
61233 "Thread inclination incorrectly Check thread geometry.
defined"
61235 "ShopTurn program cannot be Simulate the program in ShopTurn first or load
executed; not yet tested by it in "Machine Auto" operating mode.
ShopTurn"
61236 "ShopTurn subroutine cannot be Simulate the subroutine in ShopTurn first or
executed; not yet tested by load it in "Machine Auto" operating mode.
ShopTurn"
61237 "Retract direction unknown. Move the tool manually out of the return zone
Retract tool manually" defined in the program header and start the
program again.

9 9
9.2 Alarms
61238 "Machining direction unknown." Please contact your Siemens office.

61239 "Tool change point in retraction Enter another tool change point. The tool
area" change point must be far enough outside the
retraction area to ensure that no tool can enter
the retraction area when the tool turret rotates.
61240 "Incorrect feed type" Check the feed type.
61241 "Return plane not defined for this Define other return planes.
machining direction"
61242 "Incorrect machining direction" Check programmed parameters.
61243 "Correct the tool change point: Enter another tool change point. The tool
tool tip in retraction area" change point must be far enough outside the
retraction area to ensure that no tool can enter
the retraction area when the tool turret rotates.
61244 "Undefined thread due to thread Check thread geometry.
pitch change"
61246 "Safety clearance too small" Increase safety clearance.
61247 "Blank radius too small" Increase the radius of the blank.
61248 "Infeed too small" Increase the infeed.
61249 "Number of edges too small" Increase the number of edges.
61250 "Too small across the flats/along Increase the width across flats/edge length.
the edge"
61251 "Too large across the flats/along Reduce the width across flats/edge length.
the edge"
61252 "Chamfer/radius too large" Reduce the chamfer/radius.
61253 "No finishing allowance Program the finishing allowance.
programmed"
61254 "Error traveling to fixed stop" Specify another Z1 position for gripping the
counterspindle.
61255 "Error parting: Tool break?" Workpiece has not been completely parted.
Check the tool.
61257 "Counterspindle start-up Check display machine data 9803, 9851, 9852,
incomplete" 9853 and 9854.
61258 "Set parameters for counter- Specify parameters ZL1, ZL2 and ZL3 in the
spindle chuck in spindle screen" "Tools WO" à > à "Spindles" screen form.
61261 "Center offset too large" Center offset for centric drilling is above
permitted value (see display machine data
9862).
61602 "Tool width incorrectly defined" Recessing tool is larger than programmed
recess width.

9 9
9.2 Alarms
61604 "Active tool is in violation of Contour violation in relief cut elements caused
programmed contour" by the tool clearance angle of the tool used,
i.e. use another tool or check the programmed
contour.
61605 "Contour incorrectly programmed" Illegal relief cut element detected.
61606 "Error on contour preparation" An error was detected during preparation of
the contour. This alarm is always output in
conjunction with an NCK alarm 10930 ...
10934, 15800 or 15810 (see Diagnostics
Guide).
61610 "No infeed depth programmed" Program the infeed depth.
62100 "No drilling cycle active" No modal drilling cycle has been called before
the drilling pattern cycle.
62101 "Milling direction incorrect – G3 Climb or conventional milling programmed.
will be generated" However the spindle was not rotating when the
cycle was called.
62103 "No finishing allowance Program the finishing allowance.
programmed"
62200 "Start spindle" Start the tool spindle before machining the
thread.
62201 "Programmable offset in positive ShopTurn will not permit the zero point to be
Z direction not permissible" offset in the positive Z direction by means of a
coordinate transformation.
Program the zero point offset in the positive Z
direction using Work offset (G54…) rather than
Coordinate transformation (Program menu à
Miscellaneous à Transformation à Offset).

9 9
9.2 Alarms
9.2.2 ShopTurn alarms
111001 Cannot interpret step in line %1

Explanation %1 = Line number
Step is not an element of ShopTurn
Reaction Alarm display
Program not loaded
Remedy Delete program step or change program in PROGRAMS operating area
of SINUMERIK 840D or 810D (CNC-ISO mode).
111002 Not enough memory

Program aborted in line %1
Program contains too many steps
Program not loaded
Remedy Change program in operating area PROGRAMS of SINUMERIK 840D or
810D (CNC-ISO mode).
111004 File does not exist or is incorrect: %1

Explanation %1 = Name of file/contour
Program cannot interpret a step with contour programming. Contour does
not exist in directory.
NC Start disable
Remedy Load contour in directory.
111005 Error while trying to interpret contour %1

Explanation %1 = Name of contour
Contour incorrect
NC Start disable
Remedy Check machining sequence of contour.
111006 Maximum number of contour elements exceeded %1

Max. permissible number of 50 contour elements exceeded during
interpretation of machining sequence of a contour.
Remedy Check machining sequence of contour and change if necessary.
111007 Error in line %1 %2

%2 = Error description
NC Start disable
Remedy Find and eliminate error

9 9
9.2 Alarms
111008 Spindle not synchronized

Explanation Spindle not synchronized
Remedy Run the spindle for at least one revolution (M3, M4).
111009 Load new tool: T%1

Explanation T%1 = Tool number
The tool change program is requesting a new tool.
NC Stop
Remedy Load new tool.
111010 Teach In abort: protocol overflow

Explanation The teach-in operation was aborted.
The teach-in file is closed.
Remedy Increase the refresh rate value by 100 to 200ms in MD 9606:
$MM_CTM_SIMULATION_TIME_NEW_POS.
111100 Incorrect position programmed for spindle

Explanation A position outside the range of 0 - 359.999 was programmed for a
modulo axis.
Interface signals are set
Interpreter stop
NC Start disable
Remedy Program a position within the range from 0 - 359.999.
Clear the alarm with the RESET key. Restart the program.
111105 No measuring system installed

Explanation SPCON, SPOS or SPOSA was programmed. These functions require at
least one measuring system. According to MD: NUM_ENCS, the
machine axis/spindle has no measuring system.
Interpreter stop
NC Start disable
Remedy Install a measuring system.
111106 No spindle stoppage on block change

Explanation The specified spindle was programmed as a spindle or axis, but a
positioning operation was still in progress from the previous block (with
SPOSA ... spindle positioning beyond block boundaries).

9 9
9.2 Alarms
Example:
N100 SPOSA [2] = 100
.
.
N125 S2 = 1000 M2 = 04 ;error if spindle S2 still running
;block N100 running!
Reaction NC Start disable
NC Stop on alarm
Alarm display
Remedy Before programming the spindle/axis again after the SPOSA instruction,
you should use a WAITS command to cause the program to wait for the
programmed spindle position.
Example:
N100 SPOSA [2] = 100
.
.
N125 WAITS (2)
N126 S2 = 1000 M2 = 04
111107 Reference marker not found

Explanation During referencing, the spindle rotated through a distance greater than
axis-specific MD 34 060 REFP_MAX_MARKER_DIST without detecting
a reference marker signal. The check is made during spindle positioning
with SPOS or SPOSA if the spindle did not previously run with rpm servo
control (S=...).
NC Stop on alarm
Alarm display
Remedy Check and correct MD 34 060 REFP_MAX_MARKER_DIST. The value
entered specifies the distance in [mm] or [degrees] between 2 zero
markers.
111108 No transition from rpm servo control to position control

Explanation • An oriented spindle stop (SPOS/SPOSA) was programmed or position
control was activated for the spindle with SPCON but no spindle
encoder is defined.
• On activation of position control, the spindle speed is greater than the
limit speed of the measuring system.
NC Stop on alarm
Alarm display
Remedy Spindle with no encoder attached: NC language elements which
require encoder signals must not be used.

9 9
9.2 Alarms
Spindle with encoder attached: Enter the number of spindle encoders

used in MD NUM_ENCS.
111109 Configured positioning velocity too high

Note See alarm description 111 107
111110 Velocity/speed is negative

111111 Set speed is zero

Explanation The programmed spindle speed setpoint is zero.
Remedy Set the permissible spindle speed setpoint.
111112 Invalid gear stage

Explanation An invalid gear stage was requested by the PLC.
Remedy Check the PLC program and the axis-specific NC machine data.
111115 The programmed position was not reached

111126 Minus absolute value not possible

111127 Plus absolute value not possible

111200 Spindle positioning error

Explanation Alarms 111 110, 111 115, 111 126, 111 127 and 111 200 can occur on
spindle start/stop.
Remedy Inform the service department. Please contact your Siemens office.
111300 NC Start key defective

Explanation Checkback signal to the PLC user program indicating that the NC Start
key is defective, i.e. normally closed contact and normally open contact
signal = 1
NC Start disable
Remedy Replace the key
111301 NC Stop key defective

Explanation Checkback signal to the PLC user program indicating that the NC Stop
key is defective, i.e. normally closed contact and normally open contact
signal = 1

9 9
9.2 Alarms

NC Start disable
111302 Spindle Start key defective

Explanation Checkback signal to the PLC user program indicating that the Spindle
Start key is defective, i.e. normally closed contact and normally open
contact signal = 1
NC Start disable
111303 Spindle Stop key defective

Explanation Checkback signal to the PLC user program indicating that the Spindle
Stop key is defective, i.e. normally closed contact and normally open
contact signal = 1
NC Start disable
111304 Connection to PLC broken

Explanation Checkback signal to the PLC user program indicating that the
SHOPTURN-PCU connection has been interrupted.
SHOPTURN-PLC is terminated
Remedy Check PLC user program
111305 Asynchronous subroutine has not been executed

Note In the asynchronous subroutine, internal settings in the NC are initiated
by the user interface. If an alarm between 111 306 and 111 310 occurs,
these settings cannot be initiated.
Remedy Perform NC reset
111306 Error on selection or deselection of constant cutting rate

111307 Error on clearing handwheel offset
111308 Error on setting upper limit for spindle speed
111309 Error on selecting tool
111310 Error on selecting work offset
111311 NC Start not possible: Deselect SBL mode

Explanation You have activated a program with block search even though SBL mode
was active at the same time.
Alarm display

9 9
9.2 Alarms
Remedy Deselect SBL mode
111400 Unknown PLC error

Explanation An error unknown to the user interface has been output by the PLC.
NC Start disable
Remedy Press POWER ON, inform Siemens.
111410 Tool was created

Explanation When ShopTurn is booted the system checks that all standard tools are
present. If not, the missing tools are automatically created.
If several tools are created, they are output in a group message.
Meaning: Example:
%1 Number of tool that was created 5
%1 First and last tool created 5...16
Reaction None
Remedy None
111411 Could not create tool(s)

Explanation When ShopTurn is booted the system checks that all standard tools are
present. If not, the missing tools are automatically created.
In this case, the specified number of tools could not be created.
NC Start disable
Remedy Increase machine data 18082 $MM_NUM_TOOL by the specified
amount.
111900 Start only possible in main screen

Explanation A G code program can only be started from the main screen of an
operating mode/operating area (except for MANUAL).
Remedy Change to the main screen of the operating mode/operating area (except
for MANUAL).
Start single-step mode with NC Start.
111901 Contour is contained in current program

Processing not enabled
Explanation A contour is in the current program and cannot be changed.
Remedy Stop the program. Reload the program and change it as needed.

9 9
9.2 Alarms
111902 Start only possible with valid reference point

Explanation Axes do not have a valid reference point.
Remedy Reference all axes.
112045 More insertion points required

Explanation The system requires more insertion points to machine the contour
pocket.
The machining process is divided into several individual operations.
Residual material will be left on the workpiece.
This alarm is only a warning.
The program can be started.
Remedy If you use a smaller cutter, you may be able to perform the operation with
a single insertion point.
112046 Main contour cannot be traversed

Explanation The pocket contour cannot be traversed with the programmed cutting
tool.
Residual material will be left on the workpiece.
Remedy You may be able to contour the whole pocket if you use a smaller cutter.
112052 No residual material generated

Explanation No residual material has been generated.
You may not need to remove any residual material.
Remedy No remedial action necessary.
112057 Programmed helix violates contour

Explanation The starting point you have selected for helical insertion means that the
helix is violating the programmed contour.
Remedy Select another starting point.
Use a smaller helix radius.
112099 System error contour pocket

Explanation An error has occurred during calculation of the contour pocket.

9 9
9.2 Alarms
The system cannot calculate the contour pocket.

The program cannot be started.
Remedy Please note the error text and contact the Siemens A&D MC Hotline.
112100 Renumbering error

Initial state restored
Explanation You have selected the "Renumber" soft key in the program editor. An
error during renumbering has damaged the program in the memory. The
initial program must now be reloaded to the memory.
Program has not been renumbered.
Remedy Create space in the memory, e.g. by deleting an old program. Select
"Renumber" soft key again.
112200 Contour is step in current program sequence. Processing not

enabled
Explanation The selected contour is an element of the program loaded under
"Program".
The contour is an element from a loaded program and cannot be deleted
or renamed.
Remedy Remove contour from the loaded program.
112201 Contour is step in current Automatic sequence. Processing not

enabled
Explanation The selected contour is an element of the program loaded under
"Machine Auto".
The contour is an element of a program loaded in "Machine Auto" mode
and cannot be deleted or renamed. After program start, contours
included in the current program cannot be altered under "Program" while
the program is running.
Remedy Stop program run and load program under "Program". Delete contour
from program.

9 9
9.2 Alarms
112210 Tool axis cannot be reselected. Insufficient NC memory.

Explanation If you select another tool axis, you must generate a new NC program.
You must save the old NC program first and then generate the new one.
There is not sufficient NC memory available at this point to store the new
program.
The new tool axis selection is not implemented.
Remedy You must create free space in the NC memory corresponding to at least
the space required by the new program (e.g. by deleting programs you
no longer need).
112211 System unable to process tool preselection. Insufficient NC

memory.
Explanation Before a tool preselection can be processed, you must generate a new
NC program. You must save the old NC program first and then generate
the new one. There is not sufficient NC memory available at this point to
store the new program.
The system does not process the preselected tool.
Remedy You must create free space in the NC memory corresponding to at least
the space required by the new program (e.g. by deleting programs you
no longer need).
112300 Tool management strategy 2 impossible.

Magazine is not fully loaded.
Explanation The magazine is not fully loaded with tools. The number of tools defined
in machine data 18082 MM_NUM_TOOL must be placed in the
magazine of tool management concept 2.
Reaction POWER ON alarm
Remedy Start-up: Set up correct selection of tools
112301 Tool management strategy 2 impossible.

Magazine is not sorted according to tool list.
Explanation The magazine list is not sorted according to the tool list. The tools in the
magazine of tool management concept 2 must be ordered according to T
number.
Reaction POWER ON alarm
Remedy Start-up: Define tools in magazine locations according to T number.

9 9
9.2 Alarms
112360 Step was not included in program chain because program is

running
Explanation The program that you want to change is currently being executed in
"Machine Auto" mode. You cannot change programs when they are being
executed in "Machine Auto" mode.
Remedy End program execution in "Machine Auto" mode.
112400 Does not exist in tool management

Explanation The tool specified in the program does not exist.
Remedy The tool must be created before the data backup.
112401 Could not create tool

Explanation A tool could not be created when reading in tool data.
Remedy Check the tool management system.
112420 Error on inch/metric changeover! Check all data!

Explanation Data conversion not completed for inch/metric changeover.
NC Start disable
Remedy Check the following data:
• Display machine data:
MD9606: $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_TIMT_NEW_POS
MD9656: $MM_CMM_CYC_DRILL_RELEASE_DIST
MD9658: $MM_CMM_CYC_MIN_COUNT_PO_TO_RAD
MD9664: $MM_CMM_MAX_INP_FEED_P_MIN
MD9665: $MM_CMM_MAX_INP_FEED_P_ROT
MD9666: $MM_CMM_MAX_INP_FEED_P_TOOTH
MD9670: $MM_CMM_START_RAD_CONTOUR_POCKET
MD10240: $MN_SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC
MD20150 [12]: $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES
• Tool data for various edges D:
Length Z, radius R,
Wear lengths Z and R
• Work offsets:
Base offset
Position in X, Y, Z and A, C (if available)
Work offset
• Settings in MANUAL operating mode:
Return plane
Safety clearance
Note This alarm is only output on a hardware fault.

9 9
9.2 Alarms
112502 Not enough memory

Program aborted in line %1
Program contains too many program blocks
Program not loaded
Remedy Change program in operating area PROGRAMS of SINUMERIK 840D or
810D (CNC-ISO mode).
112504 File does not exist or is incorrect: %1

Explanation %1 = Name of file/contour
Program cannot interpret a program block with contour programming.
Contour does not exist in directory.
NC Start disable
Remedy Load contour in directory.
112505 Error while trying to interpret contour %1

Contour incorrect
NC Start disable
Remedy Check machining sequence of contour.
112506 Maximum number of contour elements exceeded %1

Max. permissible number of 50 contour elements exceeded during
interpretation of machining sequence of a contour
Remedy Check machining sequence of contour and change if necessary.
112541 Program cannot be interpreted

Explanation Cannot interpret program as ShopTurn program because program
header missing
NC Start disable
Remedy –
112601 ShopTurn XXXX

Explanation A system error has occurred.
Remedy Please note the error text and contact the Siemens A&D MC Hotline.
112604 Connection to PLC broken

Explanation Checkback signal to the PLC user program indicating that the ShopTurn-
PCU connection has been interrupted.

9 9
9.2 Alarms

ShopTurn PLC is terminated
Remedy Check PLC user program.
112605 Asynchronous subroutine has not been executed

Note Input values could not be processed correctly by the NC.
Remedy Perform NC reset.
112650 Unknown PLC error

Explanation An error unknown to the user interface has been output by the PLC.
NC Start disable
Remedy Press POWER ON, inform Siemens.

9 9
9.3 User data
9.3 User data

User data are variables that are used internally both by ShopTurn and
G code programs. These user data can be displayed in a list.
The following types of variables are defined:

• Global User Data (GUD)
Global user data is valid in all programs.
The display of global user data (GUD) can be disabled via
keyswitch or password.
• Local User Data (LUD)

Local User Data is only valid in the program or subroutine in
which it was defined.
When executing the program, ShopTurn displays the LUD
between the current block and the end of the program. If you
press the "Cycle Stop" key, the LUD list is updated. The values,
however, are continuously updated.
• Global Program User Data (PUD)

Global program user data is created from the local variables
(LUD) defined in the main program.
PUD is valid in all subroutines, where it can also be read and
written.
The local data is also displayed with the global program user data.
• Channel-specific user data

Channel-specific user data is only applicable in one channel.
ShopTurn does not display AXIS and FRAME type user data.
The variables displayed by ShopTurn will be listed in the machine

manufacturer's instruction manual.
Display user data
Ø Press the "Tools WOs" soft key or the "Offset" key.

-or-
Ø Press the "User data" soft key.
Global Program Ø Activate one of the soft keys to choose the user data that you
user data ... user data want to display.

9 9
9.3 User data
GUD + GUD – Ø You can press the "GUD +" and "GUD –" soft keys to display the
or global and channel-specific user data from GUD 1 to GUD 9.
Search user data
Search
Ø Enter the text string that you want to locate.

You can search for any character string.
The user data is displayed.
Find next Ø Press the "Find next" soft key to continue the search, as
necessary.
The next user data that contains the search string is displayed.

9 9
9.4 Version display
9.4 Version display

The ShopTurn and NCU version can be viewed in the CNC-ISO user
interface.
The version of ShopTurn PLC can be seen on the ShopTurn start-up
screen.
Ø Switch to the CNC-ISO user interface.
Diagnosis Service Ø Press the "Diagnosis" and "Service displays" soft keys.
displays
Version NCU Ø Press the "Version" and "NCU version" soft keys.
version
The NCU version is displayed at the top of the window that appears:
xx.yy.zz 810D or 840D
MMC Ø Press the "MMC version" soft key.

version
The ShopTurn version can be seen in the list that appears.
PCU 50: ShopTurn.......... V xx.yy.zz
PCU 20: cmm.dll............. V xx.yy.zz

10 10
06.03 Examples
Examples
10.1 Standard machining operations ............................................................................ 10-392
10.2 Contour milling ...................................................................................................... 10-404

10 10
Examples 06.03
10.1 Standard machining operations

Workpiece drawing
FS3
R6
4x∅5 23 FS2 5
X
4°
M48x2
23
∅ 34
∅60
R8
R23
FS1 FS1 3x45°
10
35
∅32 70
∅90 80
85
95
X 5:1
8
4
15° 15°
R1 R1
Workpiece drawing
Blank Dimensions: ∅90 x 120 mm

Material: Aluminum
Tools Roughing tool_80 80°, R0.6

Roughing tool_55 55°, R0.4
Finishing tool 35°, R0.4
Recessing tool Tip width 4
Threading tool_2
Drill ∅5
Milling tool ∅8

10 10
06.03 Examples
Program
1. Create a new program New ShopTurn

Ø Press the and program soft keys in the "Program
manager" operating area in the appropriate directory.
Ø Enter program names (here: Demopart_1).
Ø Press the soft key.
2. Program header The "Program header" parameter screen appears.

Ø Define blank:
Blank Cylinder
XA 90 abs.
ZA 0 abs.
ZI –120 abs.
ZB –100 abs.
Retraction Simple
XRA 2 inc.
ZRA 5 inc.
Tool change point MCS
XT 160 abs.
ZT 409 abs.
SC 1 inc.
S1 4000 rpm
Unit of mm
measurement
3. Stock removal cycle for Stock

face turning Ø Press the removal
soft keys.
Ø Enter parameters:
T Roughing tool_80
F 0.300 mm/rev.
V 300 m/min.
Machining
Position
Direction Face (parallel to X axis)
X0 60 abs.
Z0 2 abs.
X1 –1.6 abs.
Z1 0 abs.
D 2 inc.
UX 0 inc.
UZ 0.1 inc.

10 10
Examples 06.03
4. Enter blank contour using New

contour calculator Ø Press the contour
soft keys.
Ø Enter contour name (here: Cont_1).
Ø Define start point for the contour:
X 60 abs.
Z 0 abs.
Ø Enter the following contour elements and confirm each by
pressing the soft key:
1. Z –40 abs.
2. X 80 abs. Z –45 abs.
3. Z –65 abs.
4. X 90 abs. Z –70 abs.
5. Z –95 abs.
6. X 0 abs.
7. Z 0 abs.
8. X 60 abs. Z 0 abs.

10 10
06.03 Examples
Blank contour
5. Finished-part contour New

using contour calculator Ø Press the contour
soft keys.
Ø Enter contour name (here: Cont_2).
X 0 abs.
Z 0 abs.
1. X 48 abs. FS 3
2. α2 90°
3. Direction of rotation
R 23 abs. X 60 abs. K –35 abs.
Dialog Dialog
I 80 abs. selection accept FS 2
4. Z –80 abs. R 6
5. X 90 abs. Z –85 abs. FS 3
6. Z –95 abs.

10 10
Examples 06.03
Finished-part contour
6. Remove stock (roughing) Stock

removal
Ø Press the soft keys.
T Roughing tool_80
F 0.300 mm/rev.
V 200 m/min.
Machining
Stock removal Longitudinal (parallel to Z axis)
direction
Machining side Outside
Machining direction ← (from end face to rear side)
D 1.9 inc.
Cutting depth
UX 0.2 inc.
UZ 0.1 inc.
BL Contour
Set machining area No
limits
Relief cuts No

10 10
06.03 Examples
Stock removal
7. Removing the residual Residual

material Ø Press the material
soft keys.
T Roughing tool_55
F 0.200 mm/rev.
V 250 m/min.
Machining
direction
D 2 inc.
Cutting depth
UX 0.200 inc.
UZ 0.100 inc.
limits
Relief cuts Yes
FR 0.250 mm/rev.
8. Remove stock (finishing) Stock

removal
T Finishing tool
F 0.150 mm/rev.
V 300 m/min.
Machining

10 10
Examples 06.03

direction
Allowance No
limits
Relief cuts Yes
9. Groove (roughing) Groove

T Recessing tool
F 0.150 mm/rev.
V 300 m/min.
Machining
Groove position
Reference point
X0 60 abs.
Z0 –70
B2 8 inc.
T1 4 inc.
α1 15 degrees
α2 15 degrees
FS1 1
R2 1
R3 1
FS4 1
D 2 inc.
U 0.100 inc.
N 1

10 10
06.03 Examples
Recess
10. Recess (roughing) Groove

T Recessing tool
F 0.150 mm/rev.
V 300 m/min.
Machining
Groove position
Reference point
X0 60 abs.
Z0 –70
B1 5.856 inc.
T1 4 inc.
α1 15 degrees
α2 15 degrees
FS1 1
R2 1
R3 1
FS4 1
N 1
11. Thread longitudinal Thread Thread

M48x2 (roughing) Ø Press the long.
soft keys.
T Threading tool_2
P 2 mm/rev.

10 10
Examples 06.03
G 0
S 400 rpm
Cut segmentation Degressive
Machining type
Thread External thread
X0 48 abs.
Z0 0 abs.
Z1 –25 abs.
W 4 inc.
R 4 inc.
K 1.226 inc.
α 30 degrees
Infeed
AS 10
U 0.020 inc.
V 1 inc.
Q 0 degrees
12. Thread longitudinal Thread Thread

M48x2 (finishing) Ø Press the soft keys long.
.
T Threading tool_2
P 2 mm/rev.
G 0
S 400 rpm
Machining type
Thread External thread
X0 48 abs.
Z0 0 abs.
Z1 –25 abs.
W 4 inc.
R 4 inc.
K 1.226 inc.
α 30 degrees
Infeed
V 1 inc.
Q 0 degrees
13. Drilling Drilling Drilling

Reaming >
Ø Press the soft keys .

10 10
06.03 Examples
T Drill
F 200 mm/min.
S 1000 rpm
Position Face
Tip/shank Tip
Z1 10 inc.
DT 0s
14. Positioning Positions

>
Position Face
Cartesian/polar Polar
Z0 0 abs.
C0 0 abs.
L0 16 abs.
C1 90 abs.
L1 16 abs.
C2 180 abs.
L2 16 abs.
C3 270 abs.
L3 16 abs.
15. Rectangular pocket Pocket Rectang.

milling Ø Press the > pocket
soft keys.
T Milling tool
F 0.030 mm/tooth
S 1800 rpm
Position Face
Machining type
Position Single position
X0 0 abs.
Y0 0 abs.
Z0 0 abs.
W 23
L 23
R 8
α0 4 degrees
Z1 5 inc.
DXY 50 %

10 10
Examples 06.03
DZ 3
UXY 0.1 mm
UZ 0.1
Insertion Center
FZ 50 mm/min.
Result
Programming graphic
Process plan

10 10
06.03 Examples
Simulation, volume model

10 10
Examples 06.03
10.2 Contour milling

Workpiece drawing
Ø120
R10
4
R1
R46
0
T=3
R5
R6
R10
40
80
T=5
Workpiece drawing
Blank Dimensions: ∅120 x 80 mm

Material: Aluminum
Tools Milling tool: ∅18

Milling tool: ∅5
Program
1. Create a new New ShopTurn
program Ø Press the and program soft keys in the "Program

manager" operating area in the appropriate directory.
Ø Enter program names (here: Contour).
2. Complete program The "Program header" parameter screen appears.

header Ø Define blank:
Blank Cylinder
XA 120 abs.
ZA 0 abs.
ZI –80 abs.
ZB –50 abs.

10 10
06.03 Examples
Retraction Simple
XRA 125 abs.
ZRA 2 abs.
Tool change point WCS
XT 200 abs.
ZT 200 abs.
SC 1 inc.
S1 1000 rpm
Unit of mm
measurement
3. Enter limit contour Contour New

milling contour
Ø Enter contour name (here: Contour_1)
Position Face
X 0 abs.
Y –61 abs.
Ø Enter the following contour elements and confirm each with by
R 61 abs. Y –61 abs. I 0 abs.
Dialog Dialog
selection accept

10 10
Examples 06.03
Limit contour
4. Enter outside contour Contour New

milling contour
Ø Enter contour name (here: Contour_2).
Position Face
X 0 abs.
Y 50 abs.
R 50 abs. X 0 abs. Y –50 abs.
Tangent to
2. prec. elem. Direction of rotation
R 10 abs. X 0 abs.
Dialog Dialog
selection accept
Tangent to
R 10 abs. X 0 abs.
Dialog Dialog
selection accept

10 10
06.03 Examples
Tangent to
R 10 abs. X 0 abs.
Dialog Dialog
selection accept
Tangent to
R 10 abs. X 0 abs.
Dialog Dialog
selection accept
Tangent to
R 10 abs. X 0 abs.
Dialog Dialog
selection accept
Outside contour
5. Remove stock from Contour Remove

outside contour Ø Press the milling
soft keys.
T Milling tool_18
F 0.200 mm/tooth
V 200 m/min.
Position Face
Machining
Z0 0 abs.
Z1 5 inc.
DXY 50 %

10 10
Examples 06.03
DZ 2
UXY 0 mm
UZ 0
Start point Auto
Insertion Center
FZ 0.100 mm/tooth
Retraction mode To retraction plane
6. Enter inside contour Contour New

milling contour
Ø Enter contour name (here: Contour_3).
Machining plane Face

X 0 abs.
Y 46 abs.
R 46 abs. X 0 abs. Y –46 abs.
Tangent to
R 6 abs. X 0 abs.
Dialog Dialog
selection accept
Tangent to
R 14 abs. X 0 abs.
Dialog Dialog
selection accept
Tangent to
R 6 abs. X 0 abs.
Dialog Dialog
selection accept
Tangent to

10 10
06.03 Examples
R 14 abs. X 0 abs.
Dialog Dialog
selection accept
Tangent to
R 6 abs. X 0 abs.
Dialog Dialog
selection accept
Inside contour
7. Remove stock from inside Contour Remove

contour Ø Press the milling
soft keys.
T Milling tool_5
F 0.200 mm/tooth
V 250 m/min.
Position Face
Machining
Z0 0 abs.
Z1 3 inc.
DXY 100 %
DZ 2
UXY 0 mm
UZ 0
Start point Auto
Insertion Center
FZ 0.100 mm/tooth
Retraction mode To retraction plane

10 10
Examples 06.03
Result
Programming graphic
Process plan

A A
06.03 Appendix
Appendix
A Abbreviations ..........................................................................................................A-412
B References..............................................................................................................A-415
C Index ........................................................................................................................ I-427

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edition A-411
A A
Appendix 06.03
A Abbreviations
A Abbreviations
ABS Absolute dimension
CNC Computerized Numerical Control
COM Communication
CRC Cutter radius compensation
D Edge
DIN German Industry Standard
DRF Differential Resolver Function: This function in combination with an

electronic handwheel generates an incremental work offset in
automatic mode.
DRY Dry Run Feedrate
F Feed
GUD Global User Data
HW Hardware
INC Increment: Incremental dimension
INI Initializing Data
LED Light Emitting Diode
M01 M function: Programmed stop
M17 M function: Subroutine end
MCS Machine (Machine coordinate system)
MD Machine Data
MDI Manual Data Input (previously MDA: Manual Data Automatic)
MLFB Machine-readable product designation
MPF Main Program File
NC Numerical Control

A-412 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edition
A A
06.03 Appendix
A Abbreviations
NCK Numerical Control Kernel: The NC control comprises the components

NCK, PLC, PCU and COM.
OP Operator Panel
PC Personal Computer
PCU Personal Computer Unit: Component of NC control allowing

communication between operator and machine.
PLC Programmable Logic Control: Component of NC control to process

control logics of machine tool.
REF Reference point approach function
REPOS Reposition function
ROV Rapid override function
RS-232 Serial Interface
S Spindle speed
SBL Single Block
SI Safety Integrated
SK Soft key
SKP Skip block
SPF Subprogram File
SW Software
T Tool
TC Tool Change
TLC Tool Length Compensation
TMZ Tool Magazine Zero
TO Tool Offset
TRC Tool Radius Compensation
V Cutting speed

A A
Appendix 06.03
A Abbreviations
WCS Work (Workpiece Coordinate System)
WO Work offset
WPD Workpiece Directory

A A
06.03 Appendix
B References
B References
General Documentation
/BU/ SINUMERIK & SIMODRIVE, Automation Systems for Machine Tools

Catalog NC 60
Order No.: E86060-K4460-A101-A9-7600
/IKPI/ Industrial Communication and Field Devices

Catalog IK PI
Order No.: E86060-K6710-A101-B2-7600
/ST7/ SIMATIC
Products for Totally Integrated Automation und Micro Automation
Catalog ST 70
Order No.: E86060-K4670-A111-A8-7600
/Z/ MOTION-CONNECT
Cable, Connectors & System Components for SIMATIC, SINUMERIK,
MASTERDRIVES and SIMOTION
Catalog NC Z
Order No.: E86060-K4490-A001-B1-7600
Electronic Documentation
/CD1/ The SINUMERIK System (11.02 Edition)

DOC ON CD
(includes all SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/802 and
SIMODRIVE publications)
Order No.: 6FC5298-6CA00-0BG3

A A
Appendix 06.03
B References
User Documentation
/AUK/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (09.99 Edition)

Short Guide AutoTurn Operation
Order No.: 6FC5298-4AA30-0BP2
/AUP/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (02.02 Edition)

Operator's Guide AutoTurn Graphic Programming System
Programming / Setup
/BA/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (10.00 Edition)

Operator's Guide MMC
/BAD/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)

Operator's Guide HMI Advanced
Order No.: 6FC5298-6AF00-0BP2
/BAH/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)

Operator's Guide HT 6
Order No.: 6FC5298-0AD60-0BP2
/BAK/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (02.01 Edition)

Short Guide Operation
/BAM/ SINUMERIK 810D/840D (08.02 Edition)

Operation/Programming ManualTurn
/BAS/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)

Operation/Programming ShopMill
/BAT/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (06.03 Edition)

Operation/Programming ShopTurn
/BEM/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (11.02 Edition)

Operator's Guide HMI Embedded
Order No.: 6FC5298-6AC00-0BP2
/BNM/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)

User's Guide Measuring Cycles
/BTDI/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (04.03 Edition)

Motion Control Information System (MCIS)
User's Guide Tool Data Information
Order No.: 6FC5297-6AE01-0BP0
/CAD/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.02 Edition)

Operator's Guide CAD-Reader
Order No.: (included in online help)
/DA/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)

Diagnostics Guide

A A
06.03 Appendix
B References
/KAM/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (04.01 Edition)

Short Guide ManualTurn
/KAS/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (04.01 Edition)

Short Guide ShopMill
/KAT/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (07.01 Edition)

Short Guide ShopTurn
/PG/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)

Programming Guide Fundamentals
Order No.: 6FC5298-6AB00-0BP2
/PGA/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)

Programming Guide Advanced
/PGK/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (10.00 Edition)

Short Guide Programming
/PGM/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)

Programming Guide ISO Milling
/PGT/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)

Programming Guide ISO Turning
/PGZ/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)

Programming Guide Cycles
/PI/ PCIN 4.4

Software for Data Transfer to/from MMC Module
Order No.: 6FX2060-4AA00-4XB0 (English, French, German)
Order from: WK Fürth
/SYI/ SINUMERIK 840Di (02.01 Edition)

System Overview
Manufacturer/Service Documentation
a) Lists
/LIS/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)
SIMODRIVE 611D
Lists
b) Hardware
/ASAL/ SIMODRIVE (06.03 Edition)
Planning Guide General Information for Asynchronous Motors
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AC62-0BP0

A A
Appendix 06.03
B References
/APH2/ SIMODRIVE (07.03 Edition)

Planning Guide 1PH2 Asynchronous Motors


/APL6/ SIMODRIVE (07.03 Edition)

Planning Guide 1PL6 Asynchronous Motors
/BH/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)

Operator Components Manual
/BHA/ SIMODRIVE Sensor (03.03 Edition)

User's Guide (HW) Absolute Position Sensor with Profibus-DP
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AB10-0YP2
/EMV/ SINUMERIK, SIROTEC, SIMODRIVE (06.99 Edition)

Planning Guide EMC-Installation Guide
The current Declaration of Conformity is available under the following

Internet address:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de
Please enter the ID No.: 15257461 in the "Search" field (top right) and
click on "go".
/GHA/ SINUMERIK/SIMOTION (02.03 Edition)

ADI4 – Analog Drive Interface for 4 Axes
Manual
Order No.: 6FC5297-0BA01-0BP1
/PFK6/ SIMODRIVE (05.03 Edition)

Planning Guide 1FK6 Three-Phase AC Servomotors
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AD05-0BP0
/PFK7/ SIMODRIVE (01.03 Edition)

Planning Guide 1FK7 Three-Phase AC Servomotors
/PFS6/ SIMODRIVE (06.03 Edition)

Planning Guide 1FS6 Three-Phase AC Servomotors

A A
06.03 Appendix
B References
/PFT5/ SIMODRIVE (05.03 Edition)

Planning Guide 1FT5 Three-Phase AC Servomotors
/PFT6/ SIMODRIVE (06.03 Edition)

Planning Guide 1FT6 Three-Phase AC Servomotors
/PHC/ SINUMERIK 810D (11.02 Edition)

Configuring Manual CCU (HW)
/PHD/ SINUMERIK 840D (10.02 Edition)

Configuring Manual NCU NC 561.2-573.4 (HW)
/PJAL/ SIMODRIVE (01.03 Edition)

Planning Guide Three-Phase AC Servomotors
General Part for 1FT/1FK Motors
/PJFE/ SIMODRIVE (02.03 Edition)

Planning Guide 1FE1 Built-In Synchronous Motors
Three-Phase AC Motors for Main Spindle Drives
/PJF1/ SIMODRIVE (12.02 Edition)

Installation Guide 1FE1 051.-1FE1 147. Built-In Synchronous Motors
Three-Phase AC Motors for Main Spindle Drives
Order No.: 610.43000.02
/PJLM/ SIMODRIVE (06.02 Edition)

Planning Guide 1FN1, 1FN3 Linear Motors
ALL General Information about Linear Motors
1FN1 1FN1 Three-Phase AC Linear Motor
1FN3 1FN3 Three-Phase AC Linear Motor
CON Connections
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AB70-0BP3
/PJM/ SIMODRIVE (11.00 Edition)

Planning Guide Motors
Three-Phase AC Servo Motors for Feed and Main Spindle Drives
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AA20-0BP4
/PJM2/ SIMODRIVE (07.03 Edition)

Planning Guide Servomotors
Three-Phase AC Motors for Feed and Main Spindle Drives
/PJTM/ SIMODRIVE (08.03 Edition)
Planning Guide 1FW6 Integrated Torque Motors
/PJU/ SIMODRIVE 611 (02.03 Edition)

Planning Guide Inverters

A A
Appendix 06.03
B References
/PMH/ SIMODRIVE Sensor (07.02 Edition)

Configuring/Installation Guide
Hollow-Shaft Measuring System SIMAG H
/PMHS/ SIMODRIVE (12.00 Edition)

Installation Guide Measuring System for Main Spindle Drives
SIZAG2 Toothed-Wheel Encoder
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AB00-0YP3
/PMS/ SIMODRIVE (02.03 Edition)

Planning Guide
ECO Motor Spindle for Main Spindle Drives
/PPH/ SIMODRIVE (12.01 Edition)

Planning Guide 1PH2, 1PH4, 1PH7 Motors
AC Induction Motors for Main Spindle Drives
/PPM/ SIMODRIVE (11.01 Edition)

Planning Guide
Hollow-Shaft Motors for 1PM4 and 1PM6 Main Spindle Drives
c) Software
/FB1/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/FM-NC (11.02 Edition)
Description of Functions Basic Machine (Part 1)
(the various sections are listed below)
A2 Various Interface Signals
A3 Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones
B1 Continuous Path Mode, Exact Stop and Look Ahead
B2 Acceleration
D1 Diagnostic Tools
D2 Interactive Programming
F1 Travel to Fixed Stop
G2 Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control
H2 Output of Auxiliary Functions to PLC
K1 Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation Mode
K2 Axes, Coordinate Systems, Frames, Actual-Value System for
Workpiece, External Zero Offset
K4 Communication
N2 EMERGENCY STOP
P1 Transverse Axes
P3 Basic PLC Program
R1 Reference Point Approach
S1 Spindles
V1 Feeds
W1 Tool Offset

A A
06.03 Appendix
B References
/FB2/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)

Description of Functions Extended Functions (Part 2)
including FM-NC: Turning, Stepper Motor
A4 Digital and Analog NCK I/Os
B3 Several Operator Panels and NCUs
B4 Operation via PG/PC
F3 Remote Diagnostics
H1 JOG with/without Handwheel
K3 Compensations
K5 Mode Groups, Channels, Axis Replacement
L1 FM-NC Local Bus
M1 Kinematic Transformation
M5 Measurement
N3 Software Cams, Position Switching Signals
N4 Punching and Nibbling
P2 Positioning Axes
P5 Oscillation
R2 Rotary Axes
S3 Synchronous Spindles
S5 Synchronized Actions (up to and including SW 3/higher/FBSY/)
S6 Stepper Motor Control
S7 Memory Configuration
T1 Indexing Axes
W3 Tool Change
W4 Grinding
/FB3/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)

Description of Functions Special Functions (Part 3)
F2 3-Axis to 5-Axis Transformation
G1 Gantry Axes
G3 Cycle Times
K6 Contour Tunnel Monitoring
M3 Coupled Motion and Leading Value Coupling
S8 Constant Workpiece Speed for Centerless Grinding
T3 Tangential Control
TE0 Installation and Activation of Compile Cycles
TE1 Clearance Control
TE2 Analog Axis
TE3 Master-Slave for Drives
TE4 Transformation Package Handling
TE5 Setpoint Exchange
TE6 MCS Coupling
TE7 Retrace Support
TE8 Path-Synchronous Switch Signal
V2 Preprocessing
W5 3D Tool Radius Compensation

A A
Appendix 06.03
B References
/FBA/ SIMODRIVE 611D/SINUMERIK 840D/810D (11.02 Edition)

Description of Functions Drive Functions
DB1 Operation Messages/Alarm Reactions
DD1 Diagnostic Functions
DD2 Speed Control Loop
DE1 Extended Drive Functions
DF1 Enable Commands
DG1 Encoder Parameterization
DL1 Linear Motor MD
DM1 Calculation of Motor/Power Section Parameters and Controller
Data
DS1 Current Control Loop
DÜ1 Monitors/Limitations
/FBAN/ SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611 digital (02.00 Edition)

Description of Functions ANA MODULE
/FBD/ SINUMERIK 840D (07.99 Edition)

Description of Functions Digitizing
DI1 Start-up
DI2 Scanning with Tactile Sensors (scancad scan)
DI3 Scanning with Lasers (scancad laser)
DI4 Milling Program Generation (scancad mill)
/FBDN/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.03 Edition)

Description of Functions DNC NC Program Management
DN1 DNC Plant/DNC Cell
DN2 DNC IFC SINUMERIK, NC Data Transfer via Network
/FBFA/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)

Description of Functions ISO Dialects for SINUMERIK
/FBFE/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (04.03 Edition)

Description of Functions Remote Diagnosis
FE1 Remote Diagnosis ReachOut
FE3 Remote Diagnosis pcAnywhere
/FBH/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

HMI Configuration Package (11.02 Edition)
Order No.: (supplied with the software)
Part 1 User's Guide

Part 2 Description of Functions
/FBH1/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

HMI Configuration Package (03.03 Edition)
ProTool/Pro Option SINUMERIK
Order No.: (supplied with the software)
/FBHL/ SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611 digital (11.02 Edition)

Description of Functions HLA Module

A A
06.03 Appendix
B References
/FBIC/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (06.03 Edition)

Description of Functions TDI Ident Connection
/FBMA/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (08.02 Edition)

Description of Functions ManualTurn
/FBO/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (09.01 Edition)

Description of Functions Configuring OP 030 Operator Interface
BA Operator's Guide
EU Development Environment (Configuring Package)
PSE Introduction to Configuring of Operator Interface
IK Screen Kit: Software Update and Configuration
/FBP/ SINUMERIK 840D (03.96 Edition)

Description of Functions C-PLC-Programming
/FBR/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (09.01 Edition)

IT Solutions
Description of Functions Computer Link (SinCOM)
NFL Host Computer Interface
NPL PLC/NCK Interface
/FBSI/ SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE (07.02 Edition)

Description of Functions SINUMERIK Safety Integrated
/FBSP/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (05.03 Edition)

Description of Functions ShopMill
/FBST/ SIMATIC (01.01 Edition)

Description of Functions FM STEPDRIVE/SIMOSTEP
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AA70-0YP4
/FBSY/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (10.02 Edition)

Description of Functions Synchronized Actions
/FBT/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (06.03 Edition)

Description of Functions ShopTurn
/FBTC/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (01.02 Edition)

IT Solutions
Tool Data Communication SinTDC Description of Functions

A A
Appendix 06.03
B References
/FBTD/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (02.01 Edition)

IT Solutions
Tool Information System (SinTDI) with Online Help
Description of Functions
/FBTP/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (01.03 Edition)

Description of Functions TPM Total Productive Maintenance
Order No.: Document is supplied with the software
/FBU/ SIMODRIVE 611 universal/universal E (02.03 Edition)

Closed-Loop Control Component for
Speed Control and Positioning
Description of Functions
/FBU2/ SIMODRIVE 611 universal (04.02 Edition)

Installation Guide (enclosed with SIMODRIVE 611 universal)
/FBW/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (11.02 Edition)

Description of Functions Tool Management
/HBA/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.02 Edition)

Manual @Event
Order No.: 6AU1900-0CL20-0BA0
/HBI/ SINUMERIK 840Di (09.02 Edition)

Manual SINUMERIK 840Di
/INC/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (06.03 Edition)

System Description Commissioning Tool SINUMERIK SinuCOM NC
Order No.: (an integral part of the online help for the start-up tool)
/PJE/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (08.01 Edition)

Description of Functions Configuring Package HMI Embedded
Software Update, Configuration Installation
Order No.: 6FC5297-6EA10-0BP0
(The document PS Configuring Syntax is supplied with the software and

available as a pdf-file.)
/POS1/ SIMODRIVE POSMO A (05.03 Edition)

User's Guide Distributed Positioning Motor on PROFIBUS DP
/POS2/ SIMODRIVE POSMO A (05.03 Edition)

Installation Guide (enclosed with POSMO A)
/POS3/ SIMODRIVE POSMO SI/CD/CA (02.03 Edition)

User's Guide Distributed Servo Drive Systems

A A
06.03 Appendix
B References
/POS4/ SIMODRIVE POSMO SI (04.02 Edition)

Installation Guide (enclosed with POSMO SI)
/POS5/ SIMODRIVE POSMO CD/CA (04.02 Edition)

Installation Guide (enclosed with POSMO CD/CA)
/S7H/ SIMATIC S7-300 (2002 Edition)

Installation Manual Technological Functions
Order No.: 6ES7398-8AA03-8BA0
- Reference Manual: CPU Data (Hardware)
- Reference Manual: Module Data
/S7HT/ SIMATIC S7-300 (03.97 Edition)

Manual: STEP 7, Fundamentals, V. 3.1
Order No.: 6ES7810-4CA02-8BA0
/S7HR/ SIMATIC S7-300 (03.97 Edition)

Manual: STEP 7, Reference Manuals, V. 3.1
Order No.: 6ES7810-4CA02-8BR0
/S7S/ SIMATIC S7-300 (04.02 Edition)

FM 353 Positioning Module for Stepper Drive
Order together with configuring package
/S7L/ SIMATIC S7-300 (04.02 Edition)

FM 354 Positioning Module for Servo Drive
/S7M/ SIMATIC S7-300 (01.03 Edition)

FM 357.2 Multimodule for Servo and Stepper Drives
/SP/ SIMODRIVE 611-A/611-D

SimoPro 3.1
Program for Configuring Machine-Tool Drives
Order No.: 6SC6111-6PC00-0BA❏
Order from: WK Fürth

A A
Appendix 06.03
B References
d) Installation
and Start-up
/BS/ SIMODRIVE 611 analog (10.00 Edition)

Description Start-Up Software for Main Spindle and
Ansynchronous Motor Modules Version 3.20
/IAA/ SIMODRIVE 611A (10.00 Edition)

Installation and Start-Up Guide
/IAC/ SINUMERIK 810D (11.02 Edition)

(incl. description of SIMODRIVE 611D start-up software)
/IAD/ SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D (11.02 Edition)

(incl. description of SIMODRIVE 611D digital start-up software
SIMODRIVE 611D)
/IAM/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)

Installation and Start-Up Guide HMI/MMC
AE1 Updates/Supplements
BE1 Expanding the Operator Interface
HE1 Online Help
IM2 Starting up HMI Embedded
IM4 Starting up HMI Advanced
TX1 Creating Foreign Language Texts

I I
06.03 Appendix
Index
C Index
3 Chipbreaking 5-159, 5-161, 5-164, 5-166, 5-167
3D probe 2-61 Chuck dimension 2-54
3-window view 3-115 Circle
A Known center point 5-150
ABS 4-124 Known radius 5-152
Absolute dimensions 4-124 Polar 5-157
Access authorization 1-30 Circular pocket 5-227
Additional command 5-203, 5-256 Circular spigot 5-232
Alarms 9-370 Circumferential slot 5-238
Cycles 9-371 Clamp spindle
ShopTurn 9-376 Contour milling 5-250
Angular offset 5-194 Drilling 5-158
Annular slot 5-238 Mill 5-223
Approach 4-122 Close the contour 5-258
Approach cycle 5-302 CNC-ISO operator interface 1-43
Approach mode 5-264 Complete 5-292
Approach strategy 5-264 Complete machining 4-138
Arithmetic parameters 6-316 Contour viii
Automatic mode 2-51 Contour
Auxiliary function 3-105 Change 5-207, 5-261
Axes Close 5-205
Position 2-82 Copy 4-142
Repositioning 3-95 Create 5-201, 5-253
Traerse 2-80 Exact machining 5-203
Axis key 1-28 Island 5-248
B Pocket 5-248
Back-up tool data 8-349, 8-365 Presentation 5-199, 5-251
Back-up zero point data 8-349, 8-365 Rename 4-143
Basic block display function 3-94 Rounding 5-211
Beginning of contour 5-201 Spigots 5-250
Blank 4-132 Starting point 5-201
Blank contour milling 5-280 Contour calculator 5-197, 5-248
Blank shape Contour element
Edit 3-110 Append 5-207, 5-261
Block search 3-96 Create 5-202
Bore a chuck 2-83 Creating 5-255
Broken-line graphic 1-38 Delete 5-209, 5-263
C Insert 5-208, 5-262
C1 ix Modify 5-207, 5-261
C3 ix Contour end 5-253
Calculation methods 3-96 Contour milling 5-248
Centering 5-162 Contour pocket
Chaining 4-118 Center 5-268
Changing program settings 5-297 Contour pocket
Channel operational messages 1-32 Finish 5-276
Channel status 1-32 Mill 5-272

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edition I-427
I I
Appendix 06.03
Index
Predrill 5-268 Transition element 5-202

Contour spigot End of program 4-119, 4-132, 4-144
Finish 5-284 Engraving 5-244
Contour starting point 5-253 Equidistant path 2-57
Contour transition element 5-202, 5-256 Error log 8-349, 8-365
Contour turning 5-197 External thread 5-168
Coolant 2-64 F
Coordinate system 1-21 F 4-137
Coordinate transformation 2-72 Face 4-121
Define 5-299 Face C 4-121
Counterspindle 4-137 Face Y 4-121
Machining 5-292 Feed 4-137
Settings 2-54 Feed interruption 5-212
Cut segmentation 5-211 Feedrate override 1-29
Cutting depth 5-211 Feedrate status 1-32
Cutting edge 4-136 Find an empty location 7-328, 7-330
Cutting rate V 4-138 Finishing 4-138
Cycle viii Finishing tool 2-59
Cycle approach 4-122 Fit 4-129
Cycle support 6-308 Floppy disk 8-341
D Floppy disk drive 8-356
D 4-136 Front edge 2-54
Dead stop 2-60 Front face 5-292
Deep hole drilling 5-164 Front view 3-113
Dialog selection Full circle 5-176
Alter 5-262 Function group 4-136
Directory G
Copy 8-344, 8-360 G code
Create 8-342, 8-358 Copy 6-314
Delete 8-345, 8-362 Cut 6-314
Move 8-361 Find 6-314
Open 8-338, 8-354 In ShopTurn program 5-304
Rename 8-345, 8-361 Mark 6-313
Select 8-338 Paste 6-314
DP 2-62 Skip 3-101
Drawer 5-195 G code block 5-304
DRF offset 3-102 Renumber 6-315
Drill 2-60, 5-162 G code editor 6-313
Centered 5-159 G code program
Deep hole 5-164 Create 6-308
Dry run feedrate 3-109 Execute 6-311, 8-341, 8-356
Duplo number 7-325 G function 3-105
E Gear stage 2-79
Emergency stop 1-27 Grinding allowance 5-206
End 6-315 Gripping 5-292
End face 4-121 Groove 5-216
End of contour 5-201 Residual material 5-217

I-428 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edition
I I
06.03 Appendix
Index
H Settings 2-54
H function 3-105 Manual Data Automatic 2-87
Hard disk 8-356 Manual mode 2-51, 2-78
Hard key M function 2-85
Operation 1-33 Positioning the axes 2-82
Help display 1-40 Spindle 2-79
I Stock removal 2-83
Import tool data 8-349, 8-365 Tool 2-78
Import zero point data 8-349 Traversing the axes 2-80
INC 4-125 Unit of measurement 2-86
Inch 2-52 Work offset 2-85
Inclined axis 4-120 Marker 5-290
Increment 2-81 Matrix 5-174
Incremental dimension 4-125 MCS 2-53
Input field 1-41 MDI 2-51
Insert mode 1-42 Measurement
Inside contour 5-256 Tool 2-65, 2-67
Internal thread 5-168 Workpiece zero 2-71
K Measuring calipers
Keyswitch 1-30 Calibrating 2-68
L Measuring cycle support 6-308
Line 5-173 Messages 9-370
Longitudinal slot 5-235 Millimeter 2-52
Lowercase letters 5-244 Milling tool 2-59
M Mirror writing 5-244
M function 2-85, 3-105 Mirroring 5-300
M01 3-101 Multiple edge 5-242
Machine control panels 1-27 Mushroom head tool 2-60
Machine coordinate system 2-53 N
Machine zero 1-21 Network drive 8-341, 8-356
Machining 4-138 New contour
Simulation 3-106 Mill 5-253
Simultaneous recording 3-106 Turn 5-201
Machining direction 5-297 New program 4-132
Machining feedrate 4-137 New tool 2-57, 7-323
Machining lines 3-107 Number of workpieces 4-144
Delete 3-116 O
Machining plane 4-120 Offset 5-299
Machining time 3-107 Online help 6-308
Machining type 4-138 Operation 1-33
Magazine list 7-322 Operator interface 1-31
Magazine location Operator panel
Disable 7-334 OP 010 1-22, 1-24
Enable 7-334 OP 010C 1-23
Magnifying glass 3-116 OP 010S 1-23
Main program 5-288 OP 012 1-24
Main spindle 4-137

I I
Appendix 06.03
Index
Original 3-116 Open 8-339, 8-354

Outside contour 5-256 Read in 8-348, 8-364
P Read out 8-347, 8-363
Parameter Rename 8-345, 8-361
Accept 1-42 Select 3-90
Calculate 1-42 Start 3-92
Change 1-42 Stop 3-92
Delete 1-42 Test 3-103
Enter 1-41 Unload 8-355
Select 1-41 Program block 4-118
Parameterization screen form 1-39 Chained 4-118
Parting 5-195 Change 4-140
Password 1-30 Copy 4-142
Path milling 5-264 Create 4-136
Peripheral surface 4-121 Cut 4-142
Peripheral surface C 4-121 Display 3-94
Peripheral surface Y 4-121 Number 4-143
Pitch circle 5-178 Paste 4-142
Plunge-turning 5-219 Repeat 5-290
Residual material 5-221 Search 4-143
Pocket Select 4-142
Circular 5-227 Program control 1-32
Rectangular 5-224 Program editor 4-141
Pole 4-126, 5-154 Program execution
Position 5-241 Stop 3-90
Freely programmable 5-171 Program execution
Repeat 5-180 Start 3-90
Position pattern Program header 4-118, 4-132
Full circle 5-176 Program management
Line 5-173 PCU 20 8-337
Matrix 5-174 PCU 50 8-352
Pitch circle 5-178 Program manager 8-337, 8-352
Positioning block 4-119 Program structure 4-118
Power ON 9-371 Programmed stop 3-101
Prewarning limit 7-332 Programming graphic 1-38
Process plan 1-38 Protection levels 1-30
Program viii Pulling 5-292
Abort 3-92 R
Copy 8-344, 8-360 R variables 6-316
Correct 3-104 Radius compensation 4-137
Create 4-132, 8-342, 8-358 Rapid traverse 2-82
Delete 8-345, 8-362 Rapid traverse override 1-29
Execute 8-340, 8-346, 8-355 Reaming 5-162
Execute a trial run 3-93 Rear face 5-292
Load 8-356 Recess 5-184
Mark several programs 8-343, 8-359 Recessing tool 2-59
Move 8-361 Recompile 6-309, 6-310

I I
06.03 Appendix
Index
Rectangular pocket 5-224 Settings

Rectangular spigot 5-230 Change 5-297
Reference point 2-48 Side view 3-112
Remote diagnosis 1-43 Simulation 3-107, 6-311
Removal Simultaneous recording
Residual material 5-214 Before machining 3-109
Repeat 5-290 During machining 3-110
Replacement tool 7-325 Single block 3-93
Repos 3-95 Single block fine 3-93
Repositioning 3-95 Skip 3-102
Reset 1-27 Slot
Residual material Circumferential 5-238
Contour pocket 5-274 Longitudinal 5-235
Groove 5-217 Slot wall offset 5-265
Plunge-turning 5-221 Soft key
Removal 5-214 Accept 1-36
Spigot 5-282 Back 1-36
Retract mode 5-264 Cancel 1-36
Retract strategy 5-264 CNC ISO 1-43
Retraction 4-133, 5-297 OK 1-36
Return 4-122 Operation 1-33
Return cycle 5-302 Overview 4-130
Rotary drill 2-58, 2-61, 7-323 Special axis ix
Rotation 5-299 Special characters 5-245
Rotation C 5-300 Speed limit 4-134
Roughing 4-138 Spigot
Roughing tool 2-59 Circular 5-232
RS-232 interface 8-346, 8-363 Rectangular 5-230
S Spindle override 1-29
S 4-137 Spindle speed 4-137
S1 ix, 1-31 Spindle status 1-32
S2 ix, 1-31 Start 6-315
S3 ix, 1-31 Stock removal 5-159, 5-161, 5-164, 5-166, 5-181,
Safety clearance 4-134 5-210
Safety Integrated 2-50 Manual mode 2-83
Scale 2-77 Stop edge 2-54
Scaling 5-300 Straight 5-149
Screw tap 2-61 Polar 5-155
Search Subroutine 5-288
Block 3-98 Switching off 2-48
Text 3-100 Switching on 2-48
Secondary mode 1-32 Synchronization point 5-194
Select a dialog 5-203, 5-256 T
Select units 1-42 T 4-136
Selected dialog Tailstock 4-123, 4-133
Alter 5-208 Tangent 5-203, 5-256
Set machining area limits 5-212 Teach tool change point 4-135

I I
Appendix 06.03
Index
Technology block 4-119 Tools

TEMP 8-345, 8-362 Create 2-57
Thread Tool-specific data 7-320
Centered 5-161 Total offset 2-72
Cutting 5-190 Turning 4-121
Drill 5-166 U
Multiple 5-193 Undercut
Re-machining 5-194 Form E 5-187
Thread undercuts 5-188 Form F 5-187
Threading tool 2-60 Thread 5-188
Tolerance class 4-129 Unit of measurement 2-52, 4-132
Tolerance grade 4-129 User agreement 2-50
Tool User data 9-388
Create 7-323 V
Delete 7-326 V 4-138
Loading 7-327 Variables 9-388
Measure 2-65, 2-67 Version display 9-390
More than one edge 7-324 Volume model 3-114
Relocate 7-329 W
Sort 7-326 WCS 2-53
Unloading 7-328 Work offset 2-72
Tool change point 4-133 Basic 2-72
Tool length compensation 2-56 Coordinate transformation 2-72
Tool life 7-332 Define 2-75
Tool list 2-62, 7-318 Set 2-73
Tool magazine 7-322 Total 2-72
Tool monitoring 7-332 Work offset list 2-76
Tool name 2-58 Work offsets
Tool nose radius compensation 2-57 Call 5-298
Tool offset data 2-56, 7-319 Workpiece coordinate system 2-53
Tool point direction Workpiece zero 1-21
Change 2-62 Measure 2-71
Tool radius compensation 2-57 Workpieces, number of 4-144
Tool spindle 4-137 Z
Tool T 4-136 Z3 ix
Tool type 2-62 Zoom 2-70, 3-116
Tool wear data 7-331
Tool wear list 7-321

To Suggestions
SIEMENS AG
Corrections
A&D MC BMS For Publication/Manual:
P.O. Box 3180 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

ShopTurn
D-91050 Erlangen, Germany
Phone: ++49-(0)-180-5050-222 [Hotline] User Documentation
Fax: ++49-(0)-9131-98-2176 [Documentation]
E-mail: motioncontrol.docu@erlf.siemens.de
From Operation/Programming
Name Order No.: 6FC5298-6AD50-0BP2

06.03 Edition
Company/Dept.
Should you come across any printing errors when
Address
reading this publication, please notify us on this sheet.
Suggestions for improvement are also welcome.
Phone: /
Fax: /
Suggestions and/or corrections

Overview of SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Documentation
General Documentation User Documentation
SINUMERIK
SIROTEC
SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK
840D/810D 840D/840Di/ Accessories 840D/810D/ 840D/840Di/ 840D/840Di/ 840D/840Di/
810D/ FM-NC 810D 810D 810D
Brochure Catalog Catalog AutoTurn Operator’s Guide Diagnostics Operator’s Guide *)

Ordering Info. Accessories – Short Guide – HT 6 Guide *) – Short Guide
NC 60 *) NC-Z – Programming/ – HMI Embedded
Setup – HMI Advanced
User Documentation Manufacturer/Service Documentation
SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK

840D/840Di/ 840D/810D 840Di 840D/840Di/ 840D/810D 840D/840Di/
810D 810D 810D
Program. Guide Operator’s Guide System Overview Configuring Operator Description of Description of
– Short Guide – ManualTurn (HW) *) Components Functions Functions
– Fundamentals *) – Short Guide ManualTurn – 810D (HW) *) – ManualTurn Synchronized
– Advanced *) – ShopMill – 840D – ShopMill Actions
– Cycles – Short Guide ShopMill – ShopTurn
– Measuring Cycles – ShopTurn
– ISO Turning/Milling – Short Guide ShopTurn
SINUMERIK
SIMODRIVE SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK
611D 840D/840Di/ 840D/840Di/ 840D/810D 840D/810D 840D/810D
840D/810D 810D 810D
Description of Description of Description of Configuring Kit Description of IT Solutions

Functions Functions Functions HMI Embedded Functions – Computer Link
Drive Functions *) – Basic Machine *) Tool Manage- Operator Interface – Tool Data Information System
– Extended Functions ment OP 030 – NC Data Management
– Special Functions – NC Data Transfer
– Tool Data Communication
SINUMERIK
SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE
SIMODRIVE SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE SIMODRIVE SIMODRIVE SIMODRIVE SIROTEC
840D 840D/840Di 840D 840D
810D 611D 611D
611D
Description of Description of Installation & Lists *) Description of Description of Functions EMC

Functions Functions Start-Up Guide *) Functions – Hydraulics Module Guidelines
SINUMERIK Digitizing – 810D Linear Motor – Analog Module
Safety Integrated – 840D/611D
– HMI Manufacturer/Service Documentation
Electronic Documentation
SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK

SIMODRIVE 840Di
840D/840Di/ 840D/810D 840D/840Di/
840D/840Di/ 810D 810D
810D
611, Motors
DOC ON CD *) Description of Manual Description of Manual

The SINUMERIK System Functions (HW + Installation Functions @Event
ISO Dialects for and Start-Up) Remote Diagnosis
SINUMERIK
*) These documents are a minimum requirement
Siemens AG
Automation & Drives
Motion Control Systems
P.O. Box 3180, D-91050 Erlangen © Siemens AG, 2003
Subject to change without prior notice
Germany Order No.: 6FC5298-6AD50-0BP2
www.ad.siemens.de Printed in Germany

SIEMENS Programming

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SIEMENS Programming

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operation/Programming 06/2003 Edition

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Machining the 3

ShopTurn Creating a ShopTurn 4

Messages, Alarms and 9

Status code in the "Remarks" column:

A .... New documentation.

Edition Order No. Remarks

This manual is also included in the documentation on CD-ROM (DOCONCD)

Order No. 6FC5298-6AD50-0BP2 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft

Target group This documentation is intended for operators of single-slide turning

Validity This Operation/Programming Guide is valid for ShopTurn SW 6.4.

Hotline If you have any queries, please contact our hotline:

If you have any queries (suggestions, corrections) in relation to this

Website address http://www.cnc-werkstatt.de

SINUMERIK 840D Enhanced-performance versions SINUMERIK 840D powerline and

SINUMERIK 810D Enhanced-performance versions SINUMERIK 810D powerline and

Standard scope This Operation/Programming Guide describes the functionality of the

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

Other functions not described in this documentation might be

Principle Your SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D with ShopTurn is designed using

Supplementary devices The applications of Siemens controls can be expanded by adding

Personnel Only properly trained, authorized, reliable personnel must be

The areas of responsibility assigned to personnel involved in setting

Service Repairs to equipment may only be carried out by personnel specially

The following are deemed as improper usage and exclude the

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

Machine manufacturer The following reference appears wherever particular features or

References Whenever specific information can be found in other literature, this is

A complete list of available literature is included in the Appendix of this

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

S1: Main spindle

The machine manufacturer might, however, have used other

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

1.2 Workstation ............................................................................................................... 1-20

1.3 Operator interface ..................................................................................................... 1-31

Setting Up the Machine 2-47

2.2 Approaching a reference point .................................................................................. 2-48

2.3 Operating modes....................................................................................................... 2-51

2.4 Settings for the machine ........................................................................................... 2-52

2.5 Tools ......................................................................................................................... 2-56

2.6 Measuring the workpiece zero .................................................................................. 2-71

2.7 Work offsets .............................................................................................................. 2-72

2.8 Manual mode ............................................................................................................ 2-78

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

2.8.2 Traversing the axes................................................................................................... 2-80

2.9 MDI ............................................................................................................................ 2-87

Machining the Workpiece 3-89

3.2 Executing a trial program run .................................................................................... 3-93

3.3 Displaying the current program block ........................................................................ 3-94

3.4 Repositioning the axes .............................................................................................. 3-95

3.5 Starting execution at a specific point in the program................................................. 3-96

3.6 Controlling the program run..................................................................................... 3-101

3.7 Testing a program ................................................................................................... 3-103

3.8 Correcting the program ........................................................................................... 3-104

3.9 Displaying G functions and auxiliary functions ........................................................ 3-105

3.10 Simulation of machining .......................................................................................... 3-106

Creating a ShopTurn Program 4-117

4.2 Fundamentals.......................................................................................................... 4-120

4.3 ShopTurn program .................................................................................................. 4-130

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

ShopTurn Functions 5-145